JP7835637B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines.

Traditionally, gaming machines have included slot machines (revolving machines), pachinko machines, arrangement ball machines, and jankyu machines. Among these types of gaming machines, there are slot machines like the one shown in Patent Document 1.

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-144015

Conventional gaming machines have incorporated various innovations to enhance gameplay, increase the enjoyment of the game, and ensure smooth gameplay, but there is still room for further improvement.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention has the following features. In the following description of the features, an example of a corresponding configuration in the embodiments described later is shown in parentheses.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a main body member formed in the shape of a box having an opening, a door member attached to the main body member so as to be openable and closable using a hinge mechanism, and a predetermined circuit board having a first surface on which a plurality of types of parts are arranged and a second surface on which the lead wires of the plurality of types of parts are soldered, wherein the plurality of types of parts include a first part, a second part having the same performance as the first part, a third part having different performance from the first part, and a fourth part having different performance from the first part, the second part and the third part, the first part having lead wires 1a and lead wire 1b, the second part having lead wires 2a and lead wire 2b, the third part having lead wires 3a and lead wire 3b, and the fourth part having a plurality of lead wires 4, the lead wire 1a of the first part is inserted into a through-hole 1c of the predetermined circuit board from the first surface side, and the lead wire 1b of the first part is inserted into a through-hole 1 of the predetermined circuit board from the first surface side The lead wire 1a protruding from the second surface is inserted into the through-hole 2c of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side, and the virtual line segment connecting the through-hole 1c and the through-hole 1d is defined as a predetermined virtual line segment 1. When the predetermined substrate is in a predetermined orientation and the second surface is viewed from above, the angle of the lead wire 1a protruding from the second surface is n1 degrees with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 1. When the predetermined substrate is in a predetermined orientation and the second surface is viewed from above, the angle of the lead wire 1b protruding from the second surface is n2 degrees with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 1. The lead wire 2a of the second component is inserted into the through-hole 2c of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side, and the lead wire 2b of the second component is inserted into the through-hole 2d of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side, and the virtual line segment connecting the through-hole 2c and the through-hole 2d is defined as a predetermined virtual line segment 2. The lead wire 2a protruding from the second surface is inserted into the through-hole 2c of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side. When the second surface is viewed from above, the angle with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 2 is n3 degrees, and the lead wire 2b protruding from the second surface has an angle of n4 degrees with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 2 when the second surface is viewed from above with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation, the lead wire 3a of the third component is inserted into the through-hole 3c of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side, and the lead wire 3b of the third component is inserted into the through-hole 3d of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side, and the virtual line segment connecting the through-hole 3c and the through-hole 3d is defined as the predetermined virtual line segment 3, and the lead wire 3a protruding from the second surface has an angle of n5 degrees with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 3 when the second surface is viewed from above with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation, and the lead wire 3b protruding from the second surface has an angle of n4 degrees with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 2 when the second surface is viewed from above with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation The angle with respect to the linear segment 3 is n6 degrees, the n1 and n3 degrees are approximately the same angle, the n2 and n4 degrees are approximately the same angle, the n1 and n5 degrees are different angles, the n2 and n6 degrees are different angles, predetermined part information is printed on the first surface, and when the predetermined substrate is provided on the inner surface of the main body member or the back surface of the door member, the predetermined part information is printed in a horizontal writing manner with characters arranged from left to right, or in a horizontal writing manner with characters arranged from bottom to top, and the plurality of lead wires 4 of the fourth part are inserted into a plurality of through holes of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side, and the height of the plurality of lead wires 4 protruding from the second surface is higher than the height of the lead wires 1a, 1b, 2a and 2b protruding from the second surface.

The gaming machine with the above configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

This is a front view of a slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the slot machine described above. This is a front view showing the slot machine with the front door removed. This diagram shows the arrangement of symbols on the reels of the slot machine described above. This figure shows symbol combination 1 in the slot machine described above. This figure shows symbol combination 2 in the slot machine described above. This figure shows symbol combination 3 in the slot machine described above. This figure shows symbol combination 4 in the slot machine described above. This is a block diagram conceptually illustrating the functions of the slot machine described above. This diagram shows the relationship between each RT (Replay Time) state in the above slot machine. This diagram shows the relationships between the different game modes in the slot machine described above. This figure shows the variables used to control the slot machine described above. The diagram above shows the contents of the following draws in the slot machine: (A) is the draw for transitioning to the advantageous period, (B) is the draw for Chance Mode 1, (C) is the draw for Chance Mode 2-1, (D) is the draw for Chance Mode 2-2, and (E) is the draw for Chance Game 3. The diagram above shows the contents of the following in the slot machine: (A) is the chance game count lottery, (B) is the chance cycle lottery, (C) is the EX1 mode lottery, (D) is the EX2 mode lottery, (E) is the AT mode lottery-1, (F) is the AT mode lottery-2, and (G) is the AT mode lottery-3. The diagram above shows the contents of the following slot machine draws: (A) for Seven 1 draw, (B) for Seven 2 draw, (C) for AT mode rewrite draw, (D) for Seven Loop draw, (E) for Gold Seven Loop draw, (F) for Gold Seven Loop rewrite draw, and (G) for Bonus Mode draw. The diagram above shows the contents of the following draws in the slot machine: (A) for the bell count switching draw, (B) for the Seven Stock 1 draw, (C) for the Seven Stock 2 draw, and (D) for the performance lever weight draw. The diagrams above show the contents of the following slot machines: (A) represents AT cycle lottery-1, (B) represents AT cycle lottery-2, (C) represents pull-back lottery 1-1, and (D) represents pull-back lottery 1-2. The diagram above shows the contents of the following draws in the slot machine: (A) represents the draw for the first draw and (3), (B) represents the draw for the second draw, and (C) represents the draw for the AT cycle preferential game count. In the above-mentioned slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the Seven Table 1 lottery, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the Seven Table 2 lottery. The diagrams above show the contents of the following draws in the slot machine: (A) represents the draw with 1 bell count - 1, (B) represents the draw with 1 bell count - 2, (C) represents the draw with 2 bell counts, and (D) represents the draw with 3 bell counts. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the correspondence between the bonus condition device and the performance group A number, and (B) shows the correspondence between the winning re-play condition device and the performance group B number. This diagram shows the correspondence between the performance group number and the condition device group number in the above-mentioned slot machine. This diagram shows the number of winning positions assigned to each condition device in the above slot machine. In the above-mentioned slot machine, (A) shows the bonus condition device, and (B) shows the winning re-play condition device (1). This figure shows the prize-winning replay condition device (2) in the above slot machine. This figure shows the prize-winning replay condition device (3) in the above slot machine. This figure shows the prize-winning replay condition device (4) in the above slot machine. This figure shows the prize-winning replay condition device (5) in the above slot machine. This figure shows the prize-winning replay condition device (6) in the above-mentioned slot machine. The flowchart above shows the flow of the slot machine, where (A) is the setting change process, (B) is the game progress control process, and (C) is the game start waiting process. The flowchart above shows the flow of the internal lottery process in the slot machine (A) and the group number setting process in (B). This flowchart shows the flow of lever processing for managing section type numbers in the above slot machine. This flowchart shows the continuation of the section type number management lever process described above. The flowchart above shows the flow of the advantageous period transition process in the slot machine, and the chance game count lottery process in (A). This flowchart shows the processing flow when an AT (Automatic Trigger) is won in the above slot machine. The flowchart above shows the flow of the slot machine, where (A) is the seven number correction process, (B) is the correction counter process, and (C) is the arrival flag process. This flowchart shows the lever operation process when entering AT mode in the above slot machine. The flowchart above shows the flow of (A) Loop CU rank set processing, (B) Seven Loop lottery processing, and (C) Gold Seven Loop lottery correction processing in the slot machine described above. This flowchart shows the process of correcting the bell count counter in the slot machine described above. This flowchart shows the lever movement weight processing flow in the above slot machine. This flowchart shows the following processes in the above slot machine: (A) is the main game state number 1 lever processing, (B) is the chance mode number determination processing, and (C) is the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing. This flowchart shows the lever operation process after winning an AT (Automatic Trigger) in the above slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the main game state number 3 lever processing, and (B) is a flowchart showing the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction processing. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the main game state number 4 lever processing, and (B) is a flowchart showing the AT cycle preferential game count lottery processing. The flowchart above shows the flow of the standby animation process in the slot machine described above. This flowchart shows the flow of the game termination process for section type number management in the above slot machine. This flowchart shows the cumulative counter processing flow in the slot machine described above. This flowchart shows the process for completely shutting down the main game state number 0 in the slot machine described above. This flowchart shows the process of ending the AT (Automatic Trigger) mode in the above-mentioned slot machine. This flowchart shows the subsequent flow of the termination process after entering the AT (Automatic Transmission) mode. (A) is a flowchart showing the process of stopping all main game states number 1 in the above slot machine, and (B) is a flowchart showing the process of stopping all main game states number 2 and 5. The flowchart above shows the process for handling the complete shutdown of main game state number 3 in the slot machine described above. This flowchart shows the subsequent steps following the main game state number 3 complete shutdown process described above. This flowchart shows another continuation of the process for the main game state number 3 complete shutdown described above. This flowchart shows the process for handling the complete shutdown of main game state number 4 in the above-mentioned slot machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the process of stopping all main game state number 6 in the slot machine described above, and (B) is a flowchart showing the process of stopping all main game state number 7. The flowchart above shows the flow of the advantageous period clear counter management process for the slot machine described above. This flowchart shows the flow of timer interrupt processing in the slot machine described above. This diagram shows the LED circuit boards arranged around the display screen of the slot machine shown above. In the above-mentioned slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing a modified version of the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing another modified version of the LED board. This figure shows the light-emitting components in the slot machine described above. In the slot machine shown above, (A) is a diagram showing a modified version of the light-emitting component, and (B) is a diagram showing another modified version of the light-emitting component. In the slot machine described above, (A) is a diagram showing one example of the installation position of the light-emitting component, (B) is a diagram showing another example of the installation position of the light-emitting component, and (C) is a diagram showing yet another example of the installation position of the light-emitting component. The above diagram illustrates the bias state of the red LED element in the light-emitting component of the slot machine. (A) shows an example of a state where the red LED element is biased to the right, and (B) shows an example of a state where the red LED element is biased downward. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of another color is installed between the red LED elements of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of another color is installed between the red LED elements of two light-emitting components arranged in the up-down direction. In the above-mentioned slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing a state in which no LED element of another color is installed between the red LED elements of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of another color from another light-emitting component is installed between the red LED elements of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction. This is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine to which the above-mentioned light-emitting component can be applied. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the above-mentioned light-emitting component can be applied. This is a rear-view perspective of the circuit board case unit in the above-mentioned pachinko game machine. This figure shows the main control board housed inside the circuit board case unit of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine. This is a view of the circuit board case unit of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine, seen from the front. This is a rear view of the circuit board case unit in the above-mentioned pachinko game machine. In the above-mentioned pachinko game machine, (A) is a diagram showing the case where all LED segments of the LED indicator light constituting the setting value display monitor are not lit, (B) is a diagram showing the case where all LED segments of the LED indicator light are lit, and (C) is a diagram showing the case where some of the LED segments of the LED indicator light are lit. In the above-mentioned pachinko game machine, (A) is a diagram showing the case where all LED segments of the LED indicator light constituting the performance display monitor are not lit, (B) is a diagram showing the case where all LED segments of the LED indicator light are lit, and (C) is a diagram showing the case where some of the LED segments of the LED indicator light are lit. This diagram shows the relationship between the crimping member of the circuit board case unit and the height of the CPU in the above-mentioned pachinko game machine. The above diagram shows a stepped portion formed on the circuit board case of the pachinko game machine, where (A) shows the shape of the stepped portion, (B) shows the stepped portion viewed from the direction of the right edge of the circuit board case, and (C) shows the stepped portion with a colored sealing material attached. This diagram shows the relationship between screws and connectors on the main control board of the pachinko game machine described above. This figure shows the arrangement of symbols on each reel in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This is a diagram showing the symbol combinations in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This is a diagram showing the symbol combinations in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This is a diagram showing the symbol combinations in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This is a diagram showing the symbol combinations in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This figure shows the types of condition devices in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This figure shows the types of condition devices in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This figure shows the types of condition devices in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This figure shows the types of condition devices in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This figure shows the types of condition devices in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This figure shows the types of condition devices in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This figure shows the types of condition devices in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This figure shows a table of placements corresponding to the probability of winning a prize in the game machine of the second embodiment. This figure shows a table of placements corresponding to the probability of winning a prize in the game machine of the second embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the transitions in the game state in the second embodiment of the gaming machine. This is an explanatory diagram for illustrating the content displayed on the image display device during AT gameplay in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the contents of the game progress control process that controls the progress of the game in the game machine of the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the contents of the normal lever processing that is executed when the start lever is operated during normal operation of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the contents of the normal-time full stop process that is executed when all reels stop during normal operation of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the contents of the sub-bonus lever processing that is executed when the start lever is operated during a sub-bonus in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the details of the sub-bonus stop process that is executed when all reels stop during a sub-bonus in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the contents of the lever processing during AT gameplay, which is executed when the start lever is operated, in the AT gameplay of the second embodiment of the gaming machine. This flowchart shows the contents of the AT game stop process that is executed when all reels stop during AT gameplay of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the contents of the lever processing during a continuation chance in the second embodiment of the gaming machine, which is executed when the start lever is operated. This flowchart shows the details of the continuation chance all-reels stop process that is executed when all reels stop during a continuation chance of the gaming machine in the second embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram for illustrating the content of a push-button navigation display image that shows the order in which to press the stop switch to obtain a favorable game result in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram for illustrating the content of a successful action performed when the stop switch is operated in accordance with the button press sequence shown in the button press sequence navigation image in the third embodiment of the gaming machine. This is an explanatory diagram for illustrating the content of a failure action that is performed when the stop switch is operated in a different order than the order shown in the push-order navigation image of the third embodiment of the gaming machine. This is an explanatory diagram for illustrating the display content when the power is restored after an interruption in a gaming machine of the third embodiment, by operating the stop switch according to the button press sequence shown in the button press sequence navigation image. This is an explanatory diagram for illustrating the display content when the power is restored after an interruption in a gaming machine according to the third embodiment, when the stop switch is operated in a different order than the order shown in the push-order navigation display image. This is an explanatory diagram for illustrating the display content when the power is restored after an interruption in a gaming machine of the third embodiment, by operating the stop switch according to the button press sequence shown in the button press sequence navigation image. This is an explanatory diagram for illustrating the display content when the power is restored after an interruption in a gaming machine of the third embodiment, by operating the stop switch according to the button press sequence shown in the button press sequence navigation image. This is an explanatory diagram for illustrating the display content when the power is restored after an interruption in a gaming machine according to the third embodiment, when the stop switch is operated in a different order than the order shown in the push-order navigation display image. This is an explanatory diagram for illustrating the display content when an error that occurred during the display of a push-button navigation image in the gaming machine of the third embodiment is cleared. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content when the power is interrupted and restored in a gaming machine of the third embodiment while the machine is notifying the winner of a rare role using a push-order navigation image. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the situation when, in the gaming machine of the third embodiment, the power is turned on while pressing one of the MAX-BET switch and the 1-BET switch, and then the other BET switch is operated. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the situation when the MAX-BET switch is operated after the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed, in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the situation in the third embodiment of the gaming machine when the power is turned on while one stop switch is pressed, and then another stop switch is operated. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the situation when one stop switch is pressed while another stop switch is operated in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating a switch that is deactivated when the reset switch is pressed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the content of the stage change animation that is performed when the stage changes in the stage animation of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the timing of the end of the stage change animation and the change in volume when the game is played for the minimum playing time in the third embodiment of the gaming machine. This is a front view of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is a perspective view of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is a front view showing the internal structure of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is a front view showing the main control unit installed inside the housing of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is a front view of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment, showing the front door in an open state. This is a perspective view of the main control device of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an exploded perspective view of the main control device of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is a cross-sectional view of the main control device of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is a perspective view of the case body of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is a front view of the circuit board case mounting mechanism in a slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is a perspective view of the circuit board case mounting mechanism in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. This is a front view of the main control board in a slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is a front view showing a modified example of the main control board in a slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. This diagram shows multiple types of electrical elements mounted on a predetermined area of the surface of another main control board in a slot machine of the fourth embodiment, as viewed from the surface side of the board. This diagram shows the lead wires of multiple types of electrical elements mounted in the predetermined area of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment, as viewed from the back side of the board. This diagram shows multiple types of electrical elements mounted on a different predetermined area on the surface of another main control board in the fourth embodiment, as viewed from the surface side of the board. This diagram shows the lead wires of multiple types of electrical elements mounted in a separate predetermined area on the back surface of the separate main control board in the fourth embodiment, as viewed from the back surface of the board. This figure shows the relationship between the interconducting distance of the other main control board and the thickness of the game token in the fourth embodiment. This figure shows the state in which a game token is in contact with the edge of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment. This figure shows the state in which a pachinko ball is in contact with the edge of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment. This figure shows the relationship between the protruding heights of the lead wires of multiple types of electronic components mounted on the above-mentioned main control board in the fourth embodiment. This figure shows how the other predetermined area of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment looks when viewed from the front. This figure shows how the other predetermined area of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment looks when viewed with the head tilted to the side. This figure shows an example of the configuration of the component name printed on the surface of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment. This figure shows an example of the configuration of component border lines printed on the surface of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment. This figure shows the relationship between the height of the information display lamp and the LED element mounted on the surface of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment. This figure shows a table of placements corresponding to the probability of winning a prize in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the aerial combat sequence performed in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. This flowchart shows the contents of the aerial combat sequence processing required to execute the above-mentioned aerial combat sequence. This flowchart shows the contents of the combat animation process that is executed in the aerial combat animation process described above. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the transition control to the ending section performed in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. This flowchart shows an example of the process for controlling the transition to the ending section described above. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the correct button press sequence notification control during the advantageous period, which is implemented in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. This flowchart shows an example of the process for executing the correct button press order notification control during the advantageous period described above.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the above drawings.
In the following explanation, "role determination process" refers to a selection process, such as a lottery, performed using electronic devices, to randomly select one or more role determination result numbers (winning items) from a set of predetermined role determination result numbers (consisting of one or more winning roles or losing outcomes (except when no losing outcomes are set)). Here, a role determination result number defines one or more winning roles (also called "permitted roles" or "winning roles") or losing outcomes that are permitted to occur in the game in which the role determination result number is determined (selected). Role determination is also referred to as "internal lottery" or "role lottery," and the "selection" in lottery and winning is also referred to as "lottery" or "selection."

Furthermore, when stating "a winning combination is formed" or "a winning combination is established," the term "established" refers to the concept that the combination of symbols (corresponding symbols) constituting the winning combination (whether it is a winning combination that pays out game tokens (a minor win) or a winning combination that does not pay out (a replay winning combination or a special win)) corresponding to the determined winning combination result number is displayed in a predetermined stopping pattern (for example, the pattern in which they are lined up on the active line, as described below). However, the timing of establishment can be any appropriate timing, such as the time when the reel stop operation is performed at a timing that makes it possible to stop and display the corresponding symbols of the winning combination on the active line, the time when the corresponding symbols of the winning combination are stopped and displayed on the active line, the time when the slot machine identifies that the corresponding symbols of the winning combination have been stopped and displayed on the active line, or the time when the identification result is stored in the memory area.

Furthermore, in the following explanation, the operation by the player of inserting game tokens into the token slot 21 (described later) and the operation of pressing the 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23 to make the required number of game tokens available for gameplay from the credited (stored) game tokens will be collectively referred to as the "betting operation." Also, this betting operation, along with the operation by the player of pressing the settlement switch 24 (described later), the tilting operation of the start lever (also referred to as the "start switch") 25, and the pressing operations of the stop switches (also referred to as the "stop buttons") 26a, 26b, and 26c will be collectively referred to as the "gameplay operation."

In general, the term "inserting" in the context of slot machines can refer to either "placing game tokens into the slot machine" or "using game tokens for gameplay." In the following explanation, "inserting" will primarily be used in the former sense, while "betting" will be used in the latter. Furthermore, "the object used for gameplay" is also referred to as the "game medium." This game medium may include not only game tokens, but also objects such as pachinko balls, or it may be a value (game value) electromagnetically recorded on a recording medium such as a magnetic card or contact/contactless IC card, or on a storage device such as a server accessible via personal authentication. This game value may be represented by a conceptual game token with equivalent value to a real game token, or by a fictional or real currency unit, or by points without specific meaning.

Furthermore, pressing any one stop switch while all reels are rotating is called the first stop operation. Pressing any one of the two stop switches corresponding to the rotating reel while the remaining two reels are rotating is called the second stop operation. Finally, pressing the stop switch corresponding to the remaining reel while that reel is rotating is called the third stop operation.

Furthermore, the "number of game tokens dispensed" (also referred to as "number of tokens dispensed") refers to the number of game tokens awarded to a player in a single game. The act of dispensing game tokens includes both the act of actually dispensing the tokens from the slot machine to an external location (also referred to as "actual payout") and the act of increasing the number of game tokens stored electromagnetically within the slot machine (also referred to as "stored token addition payout").

Furthermore, the "number of game tokens acquired" (also referred to as "number of tokens acquired") refers to the total number of game tokens acquired (paid out to the player) during a predetermined period (which can be set arbitrarily, for example, during the AT period or bonus period).
Furthermore, the "difference in tokens" (also called "difference") refers to the value obtained by subtracting the total number of tokens bet from the total number of tokens dispensed during a specified period (this can sometimes be a negative value). While the "number of tokens acquired" and the "difference in tokens" can be used as different concepts, they will be treated as synonymous below.

Furthermore, "freeze" (also referred to as "freeze effect") refers to a delay in the execution of predetermined control processes related to the progress of the game for a certain period of time. As appropriate, freezes can be set as needed: a freeze set when the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted (also referred to as "reel rotation start freeze") and a freeze set after all reels have stopped rotating (also referred to as "reel rotation stop freeze"). During the freeze period, the game cannot be effectively accepted by the player. Also, during the freeze period, a reel effect (also referred to as "reel effect") may be performed. A reel effect is an effect that rotates the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c (described later) and displays a arbitrary combination of symbols, independently of the player's game operation.

In the following explanation, "push navigation" refers to the process (action) of notifying the player of the order and position of pressing buttons in order to assist in the establishment of a winning combination selected by the role determination. Among push navigations, those that assist in the establishment of a replay combination are called "RP navigation" (RP is an abbreviation for replay), those that assist in the establishment of a winning combination (minor combination) are called "winning navigation," and those that assist in the position of pressing buttons that can stop a specific symbol on the active line are called "eye-press navigation" (mainly performed by the sub-control means). From another perspective, assisting in the position of pressing buttons can also be said to be assisting the player in determining the timing when they should operate the stop switch. Furthermore, when distinguishing between push navigation performed on the main control means and push navigation performed on the sub-control means, the former may be called "main-side push navigation" ("main-side RP navigation," "main-side prize navigation," "main-side timing navigation"), and the latter may be called "sub-side push navigation" ("sub-side RP navigation," "sub-side prize navigation," "sub-side timing navigation"), or "push navigation effect" ("RP navigation effect," "prize navigation effect," "timing navigation effect"). The former and the latter may also be collectively referred to as stop switch operation pattern notification effects.

Furthermore, in the following explanations and diagrams, numerical values may be expressed in binary or hexadecimal in addition to decimal. To distinguish between these, a "B" will be appended to the end of the binary representation, and an "H" will be appended to the end of the hexadecimal representation. No appending will be used at the end of the decimal representation.

[First Embodiment]
Figure 1 shows a slot machine (referred to as "Slot Machine 1") as a first embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention. The basic configuration of this Slot Machine 1 will be described below with reference to Figures 1 to 8.
≪Appearance of a slot machine≫
The slot machine 1 comprises a box-shaped casing 5 (main body member) with an open front, and a front door 2 that is attached to the front opening of the casing 5 so as to be openable and closable. In a front view, the front door 2 is attached to the front opening of the casing 5 so as to be able to open and close sideways using hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c located on the front of the left side panel 5a of the casing 5. As shown in Figure 1(A), the front of the front door 2 is fitted with, from top to bottom, an upper panel assembly 10, a middle panel assembly 20, a lower panel assembly 30, and a tray assembly 40.

In the center of the upper panel assembly 10, the display screen 11a (also referred to as the "image display unit DP") of the image display device (also referred to as the "liquid crystal display device") 11 (see Figure 2), which is located on its back side, is positioned facing forward. Around its periphery are the first effect lamp 12, the second effect lamps 13a and 13b, and the third effect lamps 14a and 14b. A pair of fourth effect lamps 16a and 16b are positioned to the left and right of the display screen 11a, and an upper speaker 15a is positioned between the third effect lamp 14a and the fourth effect lamp 16a, and an upper speaker 15b is positioned between the third effect lamp 14b and the fourth effect lamp 16b.

In the center of the middle panel assembly 20 is a display window W that faces the surfaces of three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c arranged horizontally inside the main casing. Below this display window W are a coin slot 21 for inserting game tokens (game media), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game token within the credited range, a MAX-BET switch 23 for betting the maximum number of game tokens allowed (also called the "specified number," for example, 3 tokens) at once, and a dispenser for paying out the bet and/or credited game tokens. The machine is equipped with a calculation switch 24, a start lever 25 operated to start the rotation of all reels 3a, 3b, and 3c (reels are also called "spinning bodies"), three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c for individually stopping the rotation of each reel 3a, 3b, and 3c (the stop switch 26a on the left in the diagram corresponds to reel 3a, the stop switch 26b in the center corresponds to reel 3b, and the stop switch 26c on the right corresponds to reel 3c), and a reject switch 27 for returning game tokens that have been inserted and remain in the token slot 21.

Each stop switch has a button-like input area that retracts when pressed by the player and returns to its original position due to spring force when released. When this input area is pressed (pressed by hand), the contacts in the electrical circuit close, switching from the OFF state to the ON state. When the pressure is released (the hand is released), the contacts open, switching from the ON state back to the OFF state.

Between the medal slot 21 and the MAX-BET switch 23, there are selection buttons (also called "direction buttons" or "cross keys") 54 and a confirmation button (also called "menu buttons" or "PUSH buttons") 55 for the player to input information to the slot machine 1. Hereafter, the selection buttons 54 and confirmation button 55 will be collectively referred to as "sub-buttons." As shown in Figure 1(B), the selection buttons 54 consist of four buttons: an upward button 54U, a downward button 54D, a leftward button 54L, and a rightward button 54R, which specify the directions up, down, left, and right. Depending on the button operated by the player, one of the following directions—up, down, left, or right—is specified. The confirmation button 55 is made of a light-transmitting material and has a light source such as an LED inside. When the operation of the confirmation button 55 is disabled, the light source inside the switch turns off, and when it is enabled, it blinks (or stays lit).

The sub-button is designed so that when pressed (by hand), the contacts in its electrical circuit close, switching it from the off state to the on state. When the press is released (the hand is removed), the contacts open, switching it back from the on state to the off state. When the sub-button is effectively operated, the sub-control means 200, described later, may execute a predetermined performance process corresponding to that operation. Furthermore, a performance process may be performed to prompt the player to operate the sub-button. Additionally, by operating the sub-button in a predetermined procedure, it is possible to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the brightness of the image display device 11 screen and the volume of the speaker.

Here, the upper button 54U, lower button 54D, left button 54L, and right button 54R that constitute the selection button 54 may be individually turned on/off, or a cross-shaped key top (directional pad) may be provided so that the button corresponding to the direction in which the directional pad is tilted is turned on. The upper button 54U, lower button 54D, left button 54
If the L and right button 54R can be turned on/off, two adjacent buttons (up and right, right and down, down and left, left and up) can be turned on simultaneously, but opposing buttons (up and down, right and left) may not be able to be turned on simultaneously.

The inside of the medal slot 21 is branched into a receiving passage (leading to the hopper 50 described later) through which inserted game medals pass when they are effectively accepted, and a return passage (leading to the game medal payout 41 described later) through which inserted game medals pass when they are not accepted. A blocker 48 (see Figure 2) is provided at this branching point. This blocker 48 is configured to selectively open one of the receiving passage and close the other, so that during periods when inserted game medals are effectively accepted, it guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 to the receiving passage, and during other periods, it guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 to the return passage. In the following description, the "ON" state of the blocker 48 indicates a state in which game tokens inserted into the token slot 21 are guided to the receiving passage (game token acceptance enabled), and the "OFF" state of the blocker 48 indicates a state in which game tokens inserted into the token slot 21 are guided to the return passage (game token acceptance disabled).

Furthermore, three coin insertion sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c (see Figure 2) are provided inside the coin insertion slot 21 to detect game tokens. Coin insertion sensor 28a detects when game tokens are inserted into the coin insertion slot 21 and is located upstream of the blocker 48 on the passage through which the inserted game tokens flow. Coin insertion sensor 28b detects when game tokens inserted into the coin insertion slot 21 are guided into the receiving passage and successfully received and is located downstream of the blocker 48 (closer to the hopper 50, described later). Coin insertion sensor 28c detects when game tokens inserted into the coin insertion slot 21 have passed the branching point between the receiving passage and the return passage and is located near this branching point (slightly closer to coin insertion sensor 28b than the blocker 48).

If both the coin insertion sensor 28a and the coin insertion sensor 28b detect a game token, it means that a game token was inserted into the token slot 21 and that the inserted game token was validly accepted. On the other hand, if coin insertion sensor 28a detects a game token but coin insertion sensor 28b does not, it means that a game token was inserted into the token slot 21, but that the inserted game token was not validly accepted and was returned. Furthermore, if the three coin insertion sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c detect the passage of game tokens in an order different from the predetermined order (28a, 28c, 28b), or if some of the coin insertion sensors fail to detect the passage of game tokens, it means that an abnormal passage occurred, such as a reverse flow of game tokens.

The display window W is configured so that when all three reels 3a to 3c have stopped, three symbols for each reel, a total of nine symbols, are displayed in a way that is visible to the player. The winning lines 29, which horizontally connect the middle symbol display areas of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, are winning lines that are activated when a specified number of game tokens are bet. The system is configured so that whether or not a winning combination has been achieved can be determined by the combination of symbols that have stopped and displayed on the activated winning lines. The activated winning lines are also called "effective lines". Separately from the winning lines 29, the lines that horizontally connect the upper symbol display areas of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are called upper lines, and the lines that horizontally connect the lower symbol display areas of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are called lower lines. Furthermore, the line connecting the symbol display areas of the upper section of reel 3a, the middle section of reel 3b, and the lower section of reel 3c is referred to as the downward-sloping line, and the line connecting the symbol display areas of the lower section of reel 3a, the middle section of reel 3b, and the upper section of reel 3c is referred to as the upward-sloping line.

Furthermore, the slot machine 1 is equipped with various indicator lamps, such as LED lamps. In this embodiment, the indicator lamps include a MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a, a BET number indicator lamp 46b, a payout indicator lamp 46c, a game start indicator lamp 46d, a re-game indicator lamp 46e, a status indicator lamp 46f, a spin count indicator lamp 46g, a stored coin count indicator lamp 46h, a payout number indicator lamp 46j, and stop operation acceptance lamps 46ka, 46kb, and 46kc. These indicator lamps are configured to be controlled by the main control board 60 (main control means 100), which will be described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a illuminates when it is possible to bet game tokens. It is located inside the MAX-BET switch 23 and, when illuminated, partially or entirely illuminates the MAX-BET switch 23. The left stop operation reception lamp 46ka is located inside the left stop switch 26a, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb is located inside the middle stop switch 26b, and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc is located inside the right stop switch 26c. Each of these lamps, when illuminated, partially or entirely illuminates the MAX-BET switch 23. Other indicator lamps are located to the side or below the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

The BET number indicator lamp 46b (hereinafter also referred to as "BET lamp 46b") displays the number of game tokens bet. It consists of a 1-BET indicator lamp 46bC, which lights up when one or more game tokens are bet; a 2-BET indicator lamp 46bB, which lights up when two or more tokens are bet; and a MAX-BET indicator lamp 46bA, which lights up when three tokens are bet. The insertable indicator lamp 46c lights up when game tokens can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 46d lights up when the game can be started by operating the start lever 25. The re-play indicator lamp 46e lights up when a re-play combination (described later) is achieved in any game, and game tokens are automatically bet by the automatic betting process described later.

The status indicator lamp 46f lights up when the stored (credited) game tokens are settled. The count indicator lamp 46g displays, for example, the number of times push navigations can be performed when AT is set (this number is deducted by 1 each time a push navigation is performed, and may also increase due to a lottery, etc.). The stored token count indicator lamp 46h (hereinafter also referred to as "CRE lamp 46h") displays the number of stored game tokens, incrementing by 1 each time. The payout indicator lamp 46j displays the number of game tokens paid out when a minor role (described later) is achieved, incrementing by 1 each time. The stored token count indicator lamp 46h and the payout indicator lamp 46j each consist of two 7-segment displays (consisting of seven segment lamps for representing numbers and one segment lamp for representing the decimal point (dot)) to display the higher and lower digits of the number.

Furthermore, the payout indicator lamp 46j is configured to display letters (alphabetical characters) or numbers (hereinafter also referred to as "error codes") indicating the type of error that occurs when some kind of abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. Errors that can be set in this embodiment include HP errors, HE errors, H0 errors, CE errors, CP errors, CH errors, C0 errors, C1 errors, FE errors, E1 errors, E5 errors, E6 errors, E7 errors, etc. An HP error occurs when it is determined that game tokens have accumulated at the token payout port of the hopper 50, which will be described later. An HE error occurs when it is determined that the hopper 50 is empty of game tokens (hopper empty error). An H0 error occurs when it is determined that game tokens have passed the payout sensor abnormally. CE error is an error that occurs when the coin insertion sensor determines that game tokens have become stuck (game token stuck error), CP error is an error that occurs when the inserted game tokens are determined to have passed through illegally, C0 error is an error that occurs when the coin insertion sensor is determined to have received an abnormal input, and C1 error is an error that occurs when the coin insertion sensor is determined to have received an abnormal pass. FE error is an error that occurs when the auxiliary storage compartment 85, described later, is determined to be full (full error), E1 error is an error that occurs when the contents of the memory device (RAM) are not normal when the power is turned on (RAM error), and E5 error is an error that occurs when the combination of symbols at the time of all reel stops is abnormal (corresponding symbols that make up a role other than the allowed role are displayed as stopped) (reel stop error). The E6 error occurs when the value of the setting value (setting value) used to determine the probability of determining the winning combination falls outside the specified range (setting value error), and the E7 error occurs when an abnormality in the update state of the built-in random number used in each lottery is detected (built-in random number error). Errors E1, E5, E6, and E7 (collectively referred to as "E-series errors") can be cleared by changing the settings as described below, and other errors can be cleared by operating the reset switch 82 as described below.

Furthermore, this payout indicator lamp 46j also has the function of displaying the navigation number, which indicates the operation order (press order) of stop switches 26a to 26c, as described later. When displaying the navigation number, the payout indicator lamp 46j is also referred to as the "main side press order indicator." This payout indicator lamp 46j also has the function of displaying the setting value, as described later, during setting confirmation and setting change. When displaying the setting value, the payout indicator lamp 46j is also referred to as the "setting value indicator." The stop operation reception lamps 46ka, 46kb, and 46kc light up when the stop operation of the corresponding stop switch is valid, and turn off when the stop operation is invalid.

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32a and 32b are positioned at both the left and right ends. A translucent lower panel base and a lower panel light (neither shown) with a predetermined design are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 31. By illuminating this lower panel light, the design on the lower panel base is illuminated from the rear.

The tray assembly 40 has a game token dispensing port 41 for dispensing game tokens, and a game token storage tray 42 for storing game tokens is provided facing the game token dispensing port 41. An ashtray 43 is provided to the left of the game token storage tray 42. Furthermore, on either side of the game token dispensing port 41, facing the front of a pair of lower speakers 44a and 44b (see Figure 2) located on the rear side of the tray assembly 40, there are speaker openings 45a and 45b, each consisting of numerous small holes.

Furthermore, the main unit 5 contains a hopper 50 (see Figure 2) for dispensing game tokens acquired when a predetermined winning pattern is achieved as a result of gameplay. This hopper 50 is equipped with a token detection unit 51 (see Figure 2) for detecting game tokens. The hopper 50 also has the function of physically storing the game tokens that are inserted and effectively received. Additionally, an auxiliary storage compartment 85 (see Figure 2) is provided near the hopper 50 for storing game tokens that overflow from the hopper 50. A fullness detection unit 86 (see Figure 2) is provided to detect whether the auxiliary storage compartment 85 is full (a state where game tokens may overflow from the auxiliary storage compartment 85).

<<Connection between the control board and each device>>
In this embodiment, the main control boards for controlling the slot machine 1 are three control boards, as shown in Figure 2: a main control board 60, a sub-main control board 70A, and a sub-sub control board 70B (the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as the sub-control board 70). The main control related to the progress of the game (including drive control of reels 3a to 3c and role determination processing) is performed by a control circuit located on the main control board 60, while lighting control by lamps such as back lamps 38a to 38c is performed by a control circuit located on the sub-main control board 70A. Furthermore, control of the display of performance images by the image display device 11 and control of sound generation from speakers such as upper speakers 15a and 15b are mainly performed by a control circuit located on the sub-sub control board 70B. Furthermore, information transmission between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 is possible only in one direction, from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A, while information transmission between the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub-control board 70B is possible in both directions.

<Configuration of the main control board 60>
The main control board 60 is equipped with a main CPU 61 that performs various calculations related to the game, a ROM 62 which is a read-only memory device that stores control programs and the like, and a RAM 63 (RAM is also referred to as RWM) which is a memory device that can write and read information. The main CPU 61 controls each drive circuit and the like according to the control program stored in the ROM 62, thereby controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. The ROM 62 and RAM 63 are non-volatile memory devices and are configured to retain the information they store even when power is not supplied.

The main CPU 61 is connected to a clock pulse generator 64 for generating clock pulses (clock signals), a frequency divider 65 for dividing the clock pulses generated by the clock pulse generator 64, a random number generator 66 for generating random numbers used for determining roles, etc., based on the clock pulses (or divided clock pulses), and a random number acquisition circuit 67 for acquiring the random numbers generated by the random number generator 66. The clock pulse generator 64 consists of two oscillators (not shown), and each oscillator outputs asynchronous clock signals. Hereinafter, the clock signal of a predetermined frequency output from one oscillator will be called the internal clock, and the clock signal of a predetermined frequency (different from the internal clock, but may be the same) output from the other oscillator will be called the external clock. For example, the internal clock is used as the operating clock of the main CPU 61 and as the update clock for random numbers used in predetermined draws other than determining roles, and the external clock is used as the update clock for random numbers used in determining roles. Alternatively, the main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, random number acquisition circuit 67, interface circuit 68, etc., may be mounted on a single IC chip to form a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the main CPU 61 is configured to transmit signals to the motor drive circuit 36, indicator lamp control circuit 47, hopper drive circuit 52, and sub-control board 70 via the interface circuit 68, and to receive signals from the reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, 37c, payout detection signal circuit 53, and storage status signal circuit 87.

The motor drive circuit 36 is a circuit for controlling the rotation and stopping of stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c that rotate reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively, and the indicator lamp control circuit 47 is a circuit for controlling the various indicator lamps mentioned above. The reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, and 37c are circuits that transmit detection signals from reel sensors (not shown) installed on each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c to the main control board 60 (detection circuit 37a corresponds to reel 3a, detection circuit 37b corresponds to reel 3b, and detection circuit 37c corresponds to reel 3c). The hopper drive circuit 52 is a circuit that drives the hopper 50 to dispense game tokens when a small win occurs, and the payout detection signal circuit 53 is a circuit that transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when the token detection unit 51 detects that game tokens have been dispensed from the hopper 50. The storage status signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage status signal indicating whether or not the auxiliary storage compartment 85 is full to the main control board 60, according to the detection result of the full-capacity detection unit 86.

Furthermore, power is supplied to the slot machine 1 from the power supply unit 80 via the main control board 60. The power supply unit 80 is connected to a power switch 81, a reset switch 82, and a setting key-type switch 83. Signals from each of these switches are transmitted to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. The main CPU 61 is also configured to receive signals from the setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

The power switch 81 is a switch that receives power-on and power-off operations from the power supply unit 80 to the slot machine 1. The reset switch 82 is a switch that is operated by a game store employee or the like when a predetermined error (except for the E-series errors mentioned above) occurs in the slot machine 1 and the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved. When this reset switch 82 is operated, the error occurrence information stored in the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 is cleared, and the error resolution process is executed by the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 accordingly. Furthermore, the setting key type switch 83 is a switch that is operated to confirm and change the setting value that determines the degree (rank) of the probability of determining a winning combination, and the setting change switch 84 is a switch for changing the setting value in multiple stages (six stages in this embodiment).

With the front door 2 open (also referred to as the "door open state") and power supplied to the slot machine 1 (power switch 81 in the ON state), operating the setting key-type switch 83 to the ON state transitions to the setting confirmation mode, allowing setting confirmation. Furthermore, with the door open and power not supplied to the slot machine 1 (power switch 81 in the OFF state), operating the setting key-type switch 83 to the ON state, and then operating the power switch 81 to the ON state while it remains in that state (powering the slot machine 1), transitions to the setting change mode, allowing setting changes. In addition, each time the setting change switch 84 is operated in this state, the setting value can be updated one step at a time. After updating the setting value, tilting the start lever 25 confirms the updated setting value, and after confirmation, operating the setting key-type switch 83 to the OFF state completes the setting change process.

The setting key type switch 83 can be switched between ON and OFF states by inserting a predetermined key component (setting key) into a predetermined lock component provided on the main body and rotating it. Furthermore, setting confirmation and setting changes cannot be performed while the game is in progress (when game tokens are bet (including when automatic betting occurs) or when the reels are spinning), and can only be performed while the game is in standby mode. In the setting confirmation mode and setting change mode, the setting value is displayed on the payout display lamp 46j using six integer values from "1" to "6" (a separate lamp for displaying the setting value may be provided inside the slot machine 1 casing, etc.).

Power from the power supply unit 80 is supplied to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further supplied to the sub-sub-control board 70B via the sub-main control board 70A (power may also be supplied directly from the power supply unit 80 to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub-control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) is provided on the circuit that supplies power from the power supply unit 80 to the main control board 60, and on the circuit that supplies power to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, respectively, to monitor the voltage supply status. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit determines that a power outage has occurred when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage value and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71 described later. Furthermore, each supply voltage monitoring circuit determines that power has been turned on when the supply voltage returns to a predetermined voltage value (a value different from the voltage value used for power outage determination (for example, a higher value), but it may be the same value), and outputs a power-on detection signal to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71. Furthermore, the voltage value at which the main control board 60 detects a power outage is set to a higher value than the voltage value at which the sub-main control board 70A detects a power outage, and the main control board 60 is configured to perform the programmed process (power outage processing) to be executed when the power is lost before the sub-main control board 70A (the same may be applied to power on).

Furthermore, the main CPU 61 receives signals from the reel stop signal circuit 91, start lever 25, coin insertion sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, 1-BET switch 22, MAX-BET switch 23, and settlement switch 24, which are connected to or mounted on the switch board 90, via the interface circuit 68.

Furthermore, a blocker 48 is connected to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68, and the system is configured to control the on/off state of this blocker 48. In the following description, the signal for controlling the on/off state of the blocker 48 will also be referred to as the "blocker signal." Additionally, although not shown in the diagram, the slot machine 1 is equipped with a door sensor that detects the open/closed state of the front door 2. The signal from this door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. The main CPU 61 determines, based on the signal from the door sensor, whether the front door 2 is closed (also referred to as the "door closed state") or open (door open state).

Although not shown in the diagram, the main CPU 61 is configured to output a predetermined signal (also called an "external terminal signal") to a data counter, hall computer, etc., via an external connection terminal board, etc., when a predetermined game state (for example, AT state or bonus state) is reached. This external terminal signal allows for the management of the number of times the predetermined game state has been set, etc., and to display this information to the player.

<Configuration of the sub-control board 70>
The sub-control board 70 is composed of a sub-main control board 70A and a sub-sub-control board 70B. The sub-main control board 70A is equipped with a sub-main CPU 71 that mainly performs various calculations related to the management of effects, a ROM 72 which is a read-only storage device that stores control programs, etc., and a RAM 73 which is a storage device that can write and read information. By operating each drive circuit etc. according to the control program stored in the ROM 72, control related to the management of image and sound effects, control related to lamp effects, etc., in the slot machine 1 is performed. The ROM 72 and RAM 73 are non-volatile storage devices and are configured to retain the stored information even when power is not supplied. In addition, a clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown) are connected to the sub-main CPU 71, and predetermined processing is performed according to the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator and frequency divider.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and transmit signals to the lamp control circuit 18. The lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit that controls the illumination of lamps such as the backlights 38a to 38c. Furthermore, the sub-main CPU 71 receives output signals from the selection button 54 and the confirmation button 55 via the interface circuit 74. Based on the received output signals from each button, the sub-sub-control board 70B displays a menu screen on the image display device 11, providing information corresponding to the player's selections and changing the content of the visual effects displayed on the image display device 11 during gameplay.

The sub-main CPU 71 communicates with the sub-sub control board 70 via the interface circuit 74.
The system is configured to transmit various signals to B and to receive various signals from the sub-sub control board 70B. Hereinafter, the signals (control signals) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A will also be referred to as "control commands," and the signals (notification signals and performance signals) transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B will also be referred to as "performance commands." Furthermore, the signals (status signals) transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A will also be referred to as "status commands."

The sub-sub control board 70B is equipped with a sub-sub CPU 75 that primarily performs various calculations related to the control of image and sound effects, a ROM 76 which is a read-only memory device that stores control programs, and a RAM 77 which is a memory device that can write and read information. The various drive circuits operate according to the control program stored in the ROM 76, thereby controlling image and sound effects. The ROM 76 and RAM 77 are non-volatile memory devices, and are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied.

The sub-sub-CPU 75 is configured to receive notification signals or performance signals from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, transmit signals to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, and transmit status signals to the sub-main control board 70A. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a predetermined performance image, and the speaker control circuit 17 is a circuit that controls the type and volume of sound generated from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. The image display device 11 is also configured to function as a push indicator (also referred to as the "sub-side push order indicator") that displays the operation order (press order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c.

<<Internal Configuration of the Main Unit>>
Next, the internal configuration of the main enclosure 5 will be described with reference to Figure 3. As shown in Figure 3, a hopper 50, an auxiliary storage compartment 85, and a power supply unit 80 are provided in the lower part of the main enclosure 5 (on the bottom plate 5d). In the central part of the main enclosure 5, a middle plate 5f is provided so as to span across the left and right side plates 5a and 5b, and a reel unit RU having three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is provided on this middle plate 5f. In the upper part of the main enclosure 5 (the upper inner surface of the back plate 5e), a main control board case unit 160 having a main control board 60 (see Figure 2) is provided so as to be able to swing in the front-rear direction via a board case holding bracket mechanism 170. In addition, a sub-control board case unit (not shown) having a sub-control board 70 (see Figure 2) is provided on the rear part of the front door 2.

<Reel>
Each reel 3a, 3b, and 3c is configured to rotate by the drive of a stepping motor 35a, 35b, and 35c, respectively. Each reel 3a, 3b, and 3c is made of a translucent cylindrical member, and a translucent reel tape with multiple types of patterns shown in Figure 4 is attached to its outer surface. Backlights 38a, 38b, and 38c are provided on the inner surface of each reel 3a, 3b, and 3c. By illuminating these backlights 38a, 38b, and 38c, the area of each reel 3a, 3b, and 3c facing the display window W is illuminated from the inside, or only a part of each reel 3a, 3b, and 3c is illuminated to highlight a predetermined combination of patterns stopped and displayed on each reel 3a, 3b, and 3c (for example, patterns corresponding to game winning combinations on the active line 29 or in positions different from the active line 29).

<Reel symbol arrangement>
In this embodiment, the symbols displayed on each of the reels 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in Figure 4(a). Here, in Figure 4(a), "left reel" refers to reel 3a, "middle reel" refers to reel 3b, and "right reel" refers to reel 3c. Thus, each of the 10 types of symbols shown in Figure 4(b), "red seven,""goldseven,""blackbar,""bluebar,""blankA,""blankB,""bellA,""bellB,""watermelon," and "replay," are arranged in predetermined numbers on each of the reels 3a to 3c. Each symbol arranged on the reel tape is printed in a symbol area that is divided into 20 equal parts along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. Hereinafter, reels 3a, 3b, and 3c will also be referred to as the left reel (left spinning drum), middle reel (middle spinning drum), and right reel (right spinning drum), respectively. Note that the patterns shown in Figure 4 are for illustrative purposes only, illustrating the pattern arrangement of each reel 3a to 3c, and do not reflect the actual size of the patterns drawn on the reel tape (the relative ratio of the sizes of each pattern). As shown in Figure 4(a), the pattern at the top of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is pattern number 19, the "Bell A" pattern, and the pattern at the bottom is pattern number 0, the "Replay" pattern. Therefore, when the reel tape is attached to the reel, the seam of the reel tape will be between pattern number 19, the "Bell A" pattern, and pattern number 0, the "Replay" pattern.

<Types of winning combinations>
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations that stop and are displayed on each reel 3a to 3c are set as shown in Figures 5 to 8, and these constitute the symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) that make up the game winning combinations. In this embodiment, there are a total of 51 types of game winning combinations, consisting of two types of special combinations, BB combinations 1 and 2 (BB combinations; BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus; also called "Type 1 BB" or "Bonus combination"), five types of replay combinations, BB combinations 1 to 5, and 44 types of winning combinations (minor combinations), BB combinations 1 to 44. The symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) required to make each game winning combination, the number of game tokens paid out when a game winning combination is made, etc., are as shown in Figures 5 to 8.

BB roles 1 and 2 are game roles (bonus roles) that, even if they occur, do not pay out game tokens, but instead trigger a predetermined bonus as a special feature (also referred to as "BB" in this embodiment), allowing the player to start a predetermined bonus game (also referred to as "BB game") that is executed under different conditions than normal gameplay from the next game onward, thus transitioning to a special game state (also referred to as "BB in operation") that is advantageous to the player. BB role 1 is represented by the symbol combination "blue bar, blue bar, red seven," and BB role 2 is represented by the symbol combination "black bar, black bar, red seven" (the names of the symbols constituting the game role are written in the order of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c; the same applies hereinafter). The bonus game, which can be started by achieving BB role 1 or BB role 2, ends when a predetermined number of game tokens (for example, 70 tokens in this embodiment, but the number can be changed as appropriate) are acquired (as an alternative, it may end when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) are played). BB roles 1 and 2 can be achieved in non-RT and RT1 (during BB internally), as described later, but they cannot be achieved in RT2 (during BB operation) (the "-" in Figures 5 to 8 indicates that they cannot be achieved).

In this embodiment, only the BB (Big Bonus) role is provided as a special role, but other special roles such as the RB (Regular Bonus) role (RB stands for Regular Bonus) and the MB (Middle Bonus) role (MB stands for Middle Bonus; also referred to as "Two-Type BB") may be provided. Furthermore, the system may be set so that when the RB role is achieved, the RB game starts as a bonus game from the next game, and when the MB role is achieved, the MB game starts as a bonus game from the next game. In this case, the RB game may end, for example, when a predetermined number of small roles are achieved (e.g., 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 12 times) are played, and the MB game may end, for example, when a predetermined number of game tokens (e.g., more than 200) are paid out. Also, multiple special roles may be provided (e.g., multiple types of BB roles, or both BB and MB roles may be provided).

Replay symbols 1-5 are symbols (replay symbols) that, when they occur, do not result in a payout of game tokens, but allow the player to play the next game without reducing the number of game tokens they possess (without inserting new game tokens). Replay symbol 1 is configured such that when its corresponding symbol "Bell A, Replay, (Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven)" (the "/" in parentheses means "or") stops on the active line 29, the "Replay" symbol is lined up on the downward sloping line in the display window W. For this reason, replay symbol 1 is also called the "downward sloping replay" (replay is also written as "RP"). For similar reasons, replay symbols 2-4 are also called the upward RP, upper RP, and middle RP, respectively. Furthermore, when the corresponding symbols "Bell A, (Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven), Bell B" stop on the active line 29, the "Watermelon" symbol is arranged on the upper line in the display window W. For this reason, the re-spinning symbol 1 is also called "Upper Watermelon RP".

As shown in Figure 4 (Reel Symbols), the "Replay" symbols on the left reel 3a, middle reel 3b, and right reel 3c, which constitute the Replay 4, are arranged in groups of no more than five symbols on each reel. This allows the corresponding "Replay-Replay-Replay" symbols to stop on the active line 29 (also referred to as "pulling in") when the Replay 4 is won, regardless of the order or position of the button presses (see the explanation of reel rotation stop control by the reel control means 134 below). A Replay 4, like the one described above, that allows the corresponding symbols (or any of the multiple sets) to be pulled onto the active line 29 regardless of the timing of the stop switch operation, is also called a "100% pull-in" or "no-miss" Replay 4. Replay 1-3 and 5 are also 100% pull-in replays, similar to Replay 4. Furthermore, the re-spin winning combinations 1 through 5 can occur in non-RT and RT1 modes (described later), but they cannot occur in RT2.

Small wins 1 through 44 are game wins (winning wins) designed to pay out a predetermined number of game tokens when they occur. Of these, small wins 1 through 36 can occur in any of the following modes: non-RT, RT1, and RT2 (described later), while small wins 37 through 39 can only occur in RT2 (during Big Bonus activation). Furthermore, small wins 1 through 23 and 40 through 43 are also called "1-coin wins" because they pay out 1 token when they occur. Similarly, small wins 24 through 37 are called "15-coin wins," and small wins 38 and 39 are called "3-coin wins." The 15-coin wins are also sometimes called "bell wins."

Small win 37 is designed so that when its corresponding symbols "Bell A, Watermelon, (Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven)" stop on the active line 29, the "Watermelon" symbol aligns on the downward sloping line in the display window W. For this reason, small win 37 is also called the "Watermelon small win." Small win 40 is a single-coin win with the corresponding symbols "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven." For this reason, small win 40 is also called the "Red Seven Alignment Single Coin Win." Note that small wins 1-7 and 24-37 are 100% guaranteed to occur.

<Basic operations for playing the game>
To play slot machine 1, the player first places a bet by actually inserting game tokens into the token slot 21, or by operating either the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to bet a specified number of game tokens within the credit limit, thereby activating the winning lines 29. In this embodiment, the specified number of game tokens required to activate the winning lines 29 is set to 3 in all of the RT states described later: non-RT, RT1, and RT2. However, the specified number is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as by setting a different value depending on the RT state. In addition, multiple winning lines may be provided, and the number of winning lines activated may be changed according to the number of game tokens bet.

Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is determined (the bet tokens are put into use for the game), and the role determination process described later is performed. After it is confirmed that the minimum game time has elapsed, each reel 3a to 3c starts to rotate. Here, the minimum game time refers to the minimum time that must be ensured from when all reels start to rotate in one game until all reels start to rotate in the next game, and in this embodiment it is set to 4.1 seconds. When each reel 3a to 3c starts to rotate, multiple types of symbols displayed on the outer surface of the reels 3a to 3c move up and down (usually from top to bottom) within the display window W. Then, when the rotation of reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and becomes constant speed rotation, each stop switch 26a to 26c is activated (making it possible to effectively accept operation of the stop switches). When the player operates stop switch 26a, the rotation of reel 3a stops; when the player operates stop switch 26b, the rotation of reel 3b stops; and when the player operates stop switch 26c, the rotation of reel 3c stops.

If the combination of symbols displayed on the active line 29 is determined to be a predetermined winning combination (a symbol corresponding to a game that awards game tokens), then the number of game tokens corresponding to each winning combination are dispensed by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with additional reference to Figures 9 to 29.
≪Functional Blocks≫
As shown in Figure 9, the slot machine according to this embodiment, from a functional standpoint, mainly consists of betting operations for placing game tokens (for example, inserting game tokens into the token slot 21, pressing the 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23), reel rotation start operations for rotating each of the stopped reels 3a to 3c (for example, tilting the start lever 25), and reel rotation stop operations for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c that variably display multiple types of symbols (for example, The system comprises an operation signal output means 95 that outputs signals (also referred to as "game operation signals") corresponding to each game operation performed by the player, such as pressing the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and settlement operations for paying out bets or stored (credited) game tokens (for example, pressing the settlement switch 24); a main control means 100 (corresponding to the main control board 60) that performs the main control related to the progress of the game; and a sub-control means 200 (corresponding to the sub-control board 70) that performs predetermined performance control according to the state of the game.

(1) Functional Blocks of the Main Control Means 100 The main control means 100 is broadly composed of a game state management means 110 that mainly manages the game state, a game progress management means 130 that mainly manages the game progress, and a main communication control means 150 that controls communication in the main control means 100. Of these, the game state management means 110 includes a setting value control means 111, an RT state control means 112, a re-play operation control means 113, a bonus operation control means 114, a freeze control means 115, a game mode control means 116, and a random number generation/intake means 117.

Furthermore, the game progress management means 130 includes a receiving medal management means 131, a role determination means 132, a performance group number determination means 133, a reel control means 134, a stop display symbol determination means 135, a payout medal management means 136, a blocker control means 137, a display lamp control means 138, a push order management means 139, and a condition device group number determination means 140, and the main communication control means 150 includes a control command transmission means 151 and an external signal transmission means 152. Note that each of the above means in the main control means 100 is hardware such as a main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, electronic circuits and RO arranged on the main control board 60 shown in Figure 2.
This represents a functional representation of a system composed of software such as control programs stored in an M62 or similar module.

(1-1) Means constituting the game state management means 110 The setting value control means 111 is configured to control a numerical value (also called the "management setting value") for internally managing the setting value of the probability of determining a winning combination (a six-stage configuration from setting 1 to setting 6). In this embodiment, consecutive integer values from 1 to 6 (the integer values from 1 to 6 correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively) are used as the management setting value. The data for the management setting value is stored in a predetermined memory area of the RAM 63 and is referenced when confirming the setting value in the winning combination determination process, and is also referenced when displaying the setting value on the setting value indicator (payout number indicator lamp 46j) when confirming or changing the setting. In addition, the management setting value is changed in accordance with the setting change operation by the game store staff. Specifically, each time the setting key type switch 83 is operated to the ON state and the setting change switch 84 is operated in that state, the setting value is updated by 1.

The RT state control means 112 is configured to control the setting of three RT states: Non-RT, RT1, and RT2. Non-RT is the RT state set when the RAM (RAM 63) is initialized. RT1 is the RT state set when the selection of either the Type 1 BB-A condition device or the Type 1 BB-B condition device (winning BB role 1 or BB role 2) is carried over (also referred to as "BB internal"). RT2 is the RT state set from the next game after BB role 1 or BB role 2 has been achieved (also referred to as "BB active"), and bonus games can be played during RT2. In RT2, no re-play role is won, and one of the winning J-Q condition devices is selected (no misses). The transition control for each of the above RT states will be explained in detail later.

The re-play activation control means 113 is configured to set the game to a state (also referred to as the "re-play activation state") in which the player is permitted to play the next game without betting any of their game tokens, triggered by the occurrence of a re-play winning combination. When the game is set to the re-play activation state, information indicating the re-play activation state (also referred to as the "re-play activation state flag") is set in a predetermined memory area of the RAM 63 (for example, a value of "1" is stored). The set re-play activation state flag is cleared (for example, a value of "0" is stored) at a predetermined point in time until the re-play activation state is resolved.

The bonus operation control means 114 starts from the time a bonus role (in this embodiment, BB role 1 or BB role 2) is won (when the type 1 BB-A condition device or type 1 BB-B condition device is selected), B
The system is configured to execute predetermined processes during the period from when a B role 1 or BB role 2 is achieved until the end of the bonus game. Specifically, when a BB role 1 or BB role 2 is won, information indicating that a BB role 1 or BB role 2 has been won (also referred to as the "Type 1 BB Winning Flag") is set in a predetermined memory area of the RAM 63 (for example, the value "1" is stored). Also, when a BB role 1 or BB role 2 is achieved, information indicating that the BB is in operation (also referred to as the "Type 1 BB Operation Flag") is set in a predetermined memory area of the RAM 63 (for example, the value "1" is stored).

The freeze control means 115 is configured to set a freeze that delays the execution of control processes related to the progress of the game (for example, processes that accept betting operations, reel rotation start operations, reel rotation stop operations, etc.) for a predetermined time when a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, four types of freezes can be executed: winning wait (freeze time 2 seconds), fake wait (freeze time 5 seconds), notification wait (freeze time 2 seconds), and full stop end wait (freeze time 5 seconds).

The game mode control means 116 is configured to control the settings of eight game modes, from game mode 0 to game mode 7. A game mode refers to a game state (also called the "main game state") that is controlled by the main control means separately from the RT state and is primarily related to the AT setting state. Furthermore, the game mode control means 116 manages whether the player is in a normal section or an advantageous section, as described later, based on the section type number (which takes a value of 0 or 1). Here, section type number = 0 indicates being in a normal section, and section type number = 1 indicates being in an advantageous section. In addition, the game mode control means 116 manages whether an AT has been won using an AT winning flag (which takes a value of 0 or 1). Here, AT winning flag = 0 indicates that an AT has not been won, and AT winning flag = 1 indicates that an AT has been won.

Game Mode 0 is the normal (unfavorable) game state. Game Mode 0 is the mode where the player remains in the normal section, and no lotteries related to AT gameplay (assisted gameplay) are performed. Game Mode 1 is a game state, also called "Chance," where the player remains when the section type number is 1, but AT has not been won. Game Mode 2 is a game state, also called "After AT Win 1," where the player remains when the section type number is 1, AT has been won, but BB has not been won. Game Mode 3 is an AT game state where the player has been won, and transitions to this mode after winning BB. During Game Mode 3, the push navigation described later is executed, making it a very advantageous game state for the player.

Game Mode 4 is a game state, also known as "After AT," that the player remains in after a Big Bonus (BB) is established in Game Mode 7, which will be described later. Game Mode 5 is a game state, also known as "After AT Win 2," that the player remains in after an AT is won in Game Mode 4. Game Mode 6 is a game state, also known as "Chance Time Internal," that the player remains in during a Big Bonus when the section type number is 1 and an AT has not been won. Game Mode 7 is a game state, also known as "After AT Internal," that the player remains in after one AT has ended and the arrival flag is 0.

The eight game modes 0-7 mentioned above are divided into game modes belonging to the normal section (game mode 0) and game modes belonging to the advantageous section (game modes 1-7). The normal section is a period during which no button press navigation (winning navigation, RP navigation, and button press navigation) is performed, and information that allows for the determination of the button press order (such as condition device numbers and instruction numbers) is not transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. Furthermore, the normal section is also a period during which a lottery (for example, an advantageous section transition lottery) can be held to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous section.

The advantageous section is a period during which button press navigation can be performed, and during which information that can determine the button press order may be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means. Furthermore, the advantageous section is also a period during which lotteries that change the performance of the advantageous section (e.g., AT mode lottery) and processes that increase the number of AT games during the advantageous section (e.g., Seven Stock 1 lottery, Seven Stock 2 lottery) can be performed. In addition, during the advantageous section, a section indicator (e.g., a DP segment lamp other than the 7-segment lamp among the payout display lamps 46j, also called the "advantageous section lamp") is lit to inform the player that they are in the advantageous section. While in the advantageous section, at least one prize entry navigation may be performed (in this case, if no prize entry navigation has been performed, it may be prevented from returning to the normal section).

Furthermore, there is an upper limit (1500 games) on the period during which a player can stay continuously in the advantageous section. In addition, when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous section ends, all information related to the advantageous section (for example, information such as the AT winning flag and the value of the seven stock counter) is cleared. Note that when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous section ends, it is not necessary for any winning navigation to occur during the stay in the advantageous section. Also, when the lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous section, and the lottery to change the performance of the advantageous section, are performed based on the result of the role determination (condition device), it is possible to limit them to the result of the role determination that does not have a setting difference, and in particular, the lottery to change the performance of the advantageous section may be performed based on conditions other than the result of the role determination. In that case, it is also possible to perform the lottery without referring to the setting value.

The random number generation and acquisition means 117 consists of the CPU 61, clock pulse generator 64, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, and random number acquisition circuit 67 described above, and generates and acquires random numbers used in various lotteries. In this embodiment, there are four (4ch: ch is an abbreviation for "channel") 16-bit random number means capable of generating random number sequences in a numerical range of up to "0 to 65535", and four (4ch) 8-bit random number means capable of generating random number sequences in a numerical range of up to "0 to 255", and each can generate random number sequences independently. The random numbers generated by these 16-bit random number means or 8-bit random number means are updated based on the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator 64, and are therefore also called hardware random numbers (hardware random numbers). Although not shown in the figures, this embodiment also includes a random number generation means separate from the random number generation and acquisition means 117. This random number generation mechanism consists of the CPU 61 and RAM 63 described above, and has a random number generation mechanism capable of generating a sequence of random numbers within a predetermined numerical range, which is used for determining roles and other purposes. Since this random number is updated based on a program, it is also called a software random number (software random number).

(Regarding the control of transitions to the RT state)
The RT state transition control by the aforementioned RT state control means 112 will be explained with reference to Figure 10. As shown in this figure, when a Type 1 BB-A condition device or a Type 1 BB-B condition device is selected while in non-RT state, condition P1 is satisfied, and the RT state control means 112 transitions the RT state from non-RT to RT1. Furthermore, when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established while in RT1 (also referred to as "BB established" or "BB activated"), condition P2 is satisfied, and the RT state control means 112 transitions the RT state from RT1 to RT2.

RT2 is an RT state (also referred to as "BB in operation") that is set from the next game after either BB role 1 or BB role 2 is achieved. Bonus games can be played during RT2. In RT2, no re-play role is awarded, and one of the winning J-Q condition devices is selected (no misses). During RT2, if a predetermined number of game tokens (70 tokens) or more are acquired and the bonus game ends (also referred to as "BB operation ends"), condition P3 is satisfied, and the RT state control means 112 transitions the RT state from RT2 to non-RT.

(Control of transitions between game modes)
The control of game mode transitions by the aforementioned game mode control means 116 will be explained with reference to Figures 11 and 12. As shown in Figure 11, in game mode 0, when condition Q1 is satisfied, the game transitions from game mode 0 to game mode 1; when condition Q2 is satisfied, the game transitions from game mode 0 to game mode 2; when condition Q3 is satisfied, the game transitions from game mode 0 to game mode 3; and when condition Q4 is satisfied, the game transitions from game mode 0 to game mode 6. The contents of each transition condition (conditions Q1 to Q15) are shown in a simplified manner in Figure 11, but more detailed information is provided in the flowchart described later.

In game mode 1, when condition Q5 is met, the game transitions from game mode 1 to game mode 0; when condition Q6 is met, the game transitions from game mode 1 to game mode 6; when condition Q7 is met, the game transitions from game mode 1 to game mode 2; and when condition Q8 is met, the game transitions from game mode 1 to game mode 3. Here, the chance game counter included in condition Q5 is a counter that manages the number of games spent in game mode 1 (it takes values from 0 to 30), and when the game transitions to game mode 1, the value of the chance game counter is set to 30, and thereafter it is deducted by 1 for each game (see also Figure 12). Furthermore, the "Type 1 BB Winning Flag" included in conditions Q6 to Q8 is a flag (which takes the value of 0 or 1) that manages whether or not a BB was won in the draw for the winning combination in that game. A "Type 1 BB Winning Flag" of 0 indicates that a BB was not won in that game, and a "Type 1 BB Winning Flag" of 1 indicates that a BB was won in that game (see also Figure 12).

In game mode 2, the game transitions to game mode 3 when condition Q9 is met. In game mode 3, the game transitions to game mode 0 when condition Q11 is met, and to game mode 7 when condition Q12 is met. Here, the bell count counter included in conditions Q11 and Q12 is a counter (taking values from 0 to 134) that manages the number of times push navigation (winning navigation) can be executed during AT (also called "bell count"). Winning navigation becomes possible when the bell count counter value is 1 or greater (see also Figure 12).

Furthermore, the Seven Number included in conditions Q11 and Q12 is a number that manages the type of AT (Red Seven or Gold Seven), where Seven Number = 1 indicates a Red Seven, and Seven Number = 2 indicates a Gold Seven (see also Figure 12). The Seven Counter is a counter that manages the number of Red Seven stocks (takes values from 0 to 26), the Cumulative Counter is a counter that manages the number of game tokens acquired (difference) in one advantageous period (takes values from 0 to 2412), and the Reach Flag is a flag that adjusts when the upper limit of the number of game tokens acquired (difference) is reached (takes values from 0 or 1) (see also Figure 12).

In game mode 6, the game transitions to game mode 1 when condition Q10 is met. In game mode 7, the game transitions to game mode 4 when condition Q10 is met. In game mode 4, the game transitions from game mode 4 to game mode 3 when condition Q8 is met, from game mode 4 to game mode 0 when condition Q13 is met, and from game mode 4 to game mode 7 when condition Q14 is met. Here, the AT cycle counter included in conditions Q13 and Q14 is a counter (taking values from 0 to 3) that manages the duration of stay during AT.

Furthermore, during game mode 4, the game transitions to game mode 5 when condition Q7 is met, and during game mode 5, the game transitions to game mode 3 when condition Q9 is met.

Furthermore, when the player is in one of the game modes 1 through 7 (i.e., the advantageous section), the game mode transitions to mode 0 upon fulfillment of condition Q15. The advantageous section clear counter included in condition Q15 is a counter (taking values from 0 to 1500) that manages the number of consecutive games played in the advantageous section. It is set to 1500 when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, and is deducted by 1 each time a game is played in the advantageous section (see also Figure 12). The net increase counter is a counter (taking values from 0 to 2412) that manages the number of tokens acquired (difference in tokens) during the advantageous section. It is set to 0 when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, and is subsequently updated according to the number of tokens acquired (see also Figure 12).

In this way, when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500," and the value of the advantageous section clear counter is deducted by 1 each time a game is played in the advantageous section. When the value of the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0," the game is forcibly returned to the normal section. Also, if transitioning from the advantageous section to the normal section occurs before the value of the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0," the value of the advantageous section clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section again, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is reset to "1500."

Furthermore, this embodiment also includes a net increase counter that counts the number of game tokens acquired (difference in tokens) during the advantageous period. This net increase counter is set to "0" at the start of the advantageous period (it may also be set to "0" at the end of the advantageous period), and thereafter, the counter value is updated after each game according to the game's result. When updating, if the difference in tokens falls below 0, the counter value is corrected to "0," and if the difference in tokens is a positive value, it is simply accumulated and updated (such correction may be omitted). When the accumulated difference in tokens exceeds 2400, the advantageous period ends and the system transitions to the normal period. Functionally, the cumulative counter performs the same counting as the net increase counter. When checking the number of game tokens acquired (difference in tokens) during control processing, the value of the cumulative counter or the value of the net increase counter may be referenced depending on the processing content.

Furthermore, it is equipped with a correction counter, which is a counter that counts the number of game tokens acquired (difference in tokens) during the advantageous period. This correction counter is a counter (taking values from 0 to 2101) that counts the number of game tokens that can be expected to be acquired during one advantageous period (also called "expected acquisition number" or "expected possible acquisition number"), calculated by adding the values of the AT stock number (such as red sevens and gold sevens) and the bell count counter to the net increase counter (cumulative counter). When the value of the correction counter (expected acquisition number) exceeds a predetermined value (2100), it may trigger the end of the advantageous period and a transition to the normal period at a predetermined timing.

This configuration makes it difficult for players to determine when the advantageous period ends. For example, if the end of the advantageous period is determined solely by the value of the advantageous period clear counter or the net increase counter, displaying these values to the player allows them to easily understand when the advantageous period ends by checking them. However, if a correction counter is included, the advantageous period may end even if the values of the advantageous period clear counter or net increase counter have not reached their upper limits, because the correction counter value has reached a predetermined value. Therefore, it becomes difficult to determine when the advantageous period ends, which can enhance the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by setting the predetermined value (2100) in the correction counter to a value smaller than the upper limit (2400) in the net increase counter, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the advantageous period ending during the AT (Attack Time). For example, if the value of the correction counter (expected number of wins) exceeds the predetermined value (2100) during the AT, and the next AT can be run after the end of that AT, there is a high possibility that the net increase counter will exceed its upper limit (2400) during the execution of the next AT, causing the advantageous period to end. If the advantageous period ends during the AT (Automatic Trigger) mode, players may become disappointed. However, this situation can be avoided by setting the advantageous period to end when the correction counter value (estimated number of wins) exceeds a predetermined value (2100).

(A lottery is conducted in each game mode)
Next, the various lotteries performed by the game mode control means 116 in the aforementioned game modes 0 to 7 will be explained with reference to Figures 13 to 20. The advantageous section transition lottery shown in Figure 13(A) is a lottery that determines whether or not to transition to the advantageous section, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group A number (the condition device group number will be described later). The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group A number is as shown in the figure.

The Chance Mode 1 lottery shown in Figure 13(B) is a lottery to determine the Chance Mode number (a number that manages the likelihood of winning in the lottery during Chance (Game Mode 1)). Based on the condition device group H number, one of Chance Mode numbers 0 to 4 is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group H number is as shown in the figure.

The Chance Mode 2 lottery-1 shown in Figure 13(C) is a lottery to determine the Chance Mode number during BB (Big Bonus) activation in Chance Mode (Game Mode 1). Based on the condition device group D number, one of Chance Mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group D number is as shown in the figure.

The Chance Mode 2 lottery-2 shown in Figure 13(D) is a lottery to determine the Chance Mode number when the Big Bonus (BB) is not activated during Chance Mode (Game Mode 1). Based on the condition device group B number, one of Chance Mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group B number is as shown in the figure.

The Chance Mode 3 lottery shown in Figure 13(E) is a lottery to determine a new Chance Mode number at the end of the stay cycle during Chance (Game Mode 1). Based on the current Chance Mode numbers 1 to 3 (no lottery if 0 is selected), one of the new Chance Mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected. The winning values corresponding to each Chance Mode number are as shown in the figure. Note that Chance Mode number 4 indicates an AT win. The Chance Mode lotteries in Figures 13(B) to (E) are collectively referred to as the AT lottery.

The Chance Game Count Lottery shown in Figure 14(A) is a lottery that determines the number of games spent in Chance (Game Mode 1) when one of Chance Mode numbers 1 to 3 is selected in the Chance Mode 1 lottery (also referred to as "Chance Mode Win"). Based on the selected Chance Mode number 1 to 3, one of 0, 10, 20, or 30 games is selected. The winning numbers corresponding to each Chance Mode number are as shown in the figure.

The chance cycle lottery shown in Figure 14(B) is a lottery that determines the number of cycles when a chance mode is won. Based on the chance mode numbers 1 to 3 selected in the chance mode 1 lottery, one of cycle numbers 0 to 4 is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure.

The EX1 mode lottery shown in Figure 14(C) is a lottery to determine the bonus mode number (a number that manages the stock bonus state during AT) after winning the AT. Based on the condition device group F number, one of bonus mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2) is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The EX2 mode lottery shown in Figure 14(D), like the EX1 mode lottery, determines the bonus mode number after winning an AT (Automatic Trigger). Specifically, it is a lottery conducted while in game mode 2 or 5, and selects one of the bonus mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 0 or 2) based on the condition device group F number. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-1 shown in Figure 14(E) determines the next AT mode number (a number that manages the likelihood of winning in the lottery during AT) when an AT is won. This lottery is particularly conducted while in game modes 0 to 2, and selects one of AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the condition device group J number. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-2 shown in Figure 14(F), like the AT mode lottery-1, determines the next AT mode number (a number that manages the likelihood of winning in the lottery during AT) when an AT is won. Specifically, this lottery is conducted while in game modes 3 to 5, and one of AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-3 shown in Figure 14(G), like AT mode lotteries-1 and 2, determines the next AT mode number (a number that manages the likelihood of winning in the lottery during AT) when an AT is won. Specifically, this lottery is conducted after all reels have stopped (also referred to as "after all stops"), and selects one of AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the condition device group J number. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 1 lottery shown in Figure 15(A) is a lottery conducted specifically during game modes 1 or 4 and after a full stop to determine the type of AT (Red Seven or Gold Seven). Based on the condition device group F number, one of Seven numbers 0 to 2 is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 2 lottery shown in Figure 15(B), like the Seven 1 lottery, is a lottery conducted specifically during game modes 2 or 5 to determine the type of AT (Automatic Trigger). Based on the condition device group F number, one of the Seven numbers 0 to 2 is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode rewrite lottery shown in Figure 15(C) is a lottery to rewrite the AT mode number after the AT ends. Based on the value of the advantageous section clear counter (whether it is less than 300 or 300 or more), one of AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each advantageous section clear counter value is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Loop lottery shown in Figure 15(D) is a lottery to determine whether or not to continue with the Red Seven. Based on the loop number (a number that manages the continuation rate of the Red Seven), either a win (1) or a loss (0) is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each loop number is as shown in the figure.

The Gold Seven Loop lottery shown in Figure 15(E) is a draw to determine whether or not to continue the Gold Seven, selecting either a winner (1) or a loser (0). The number of winning positions assigned to the winner (1) and loser (0) are as shown in the figure.

The Gold Seven Loop Rewriting Lottery shown in Figure 15(F) is a lottery to rewrite the continuation rate of Gold Seven. Based on the condition device group E number, it selects either a win (1) or a loss (0). The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown in the figure.

The bonus mode lottery shown in Figure 15(G) is a lottery that determines the bonus mode number during AT (Attack Time), selecting one of bonus mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2). The number of winning positions assigned to each bonus mode number is as shown in the figure.

The bell count switching lottery shown in Figure 16(A) is a lottery to rewrite the bell count, selecting either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the value of the bell count counter. The number of winning positions corresponding to each value of the bell count counter are as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 1 lottery shown in Figure 16(B) is a lottery that determines whether or not to add to the AT stock count, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 2 lottery shown in Figure 16(C) is, like the Seven Stock 1 lottery, a draw to determine whether or not to add to the AT stock count. Based on the condition device group E number, it selects either a win (1) or a loss (0). The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown in the figure.

The performance lever weight lottery shown in Figure 16(D) is a lottery that determines whether or not to perform a fake weight as a freeze. Based on the condition device group J number, it selects either a win (1) or a loss (0). The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT cycle lottery-1 shown in Figure 17(A) is a lottery performed at the end of the AT to determine the number of stay cycles during the AT (the number of BB activations required to return to game mode 3 from game mode 3 via game modes 7 and 4). It is particularly performed when the AT mode number is 1 or 2, and selects one of 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) stay cycles based on the value of the bell count counter. The number of winning positions corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The AT cycle lottery-2 shown in Figure 17(B), like the AT cycle lottery-1, is a lottery conducted at the end of the AT to determine the number of cycles spent during the AT. It is particularly performed when the AT mode number is 3 or 4, and selects one of 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) cycles based on the value of the bell count counter. The number of winning positions corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The pullback lottery-1 shown in Figure 17(C) is a lottery conducted after the AT (Automatic Trigger) ends to determine whether or not to win another AT. It is particularly performed when the AT mode number is 1 to 3, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The pullback lottery 1-2 shown in Figure 17(D) is, like the pullback lottery 1-1, a lottery held after the AT ends to determine whether or not to win the AT again. It is particularly held when the AT mode number is 4, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The pullback lottery 1-3 shown in Figure 18(A), like pullback lotteries 1-1 and 2, determines whether or not to win another AT after the AT ends. It is a lottery specifically conducted when the AT mode number is 5, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The second draw shown in Figure 18(B) is a draw that determines whether or not to win the AT again after the number of stay cycles during AT has reached zero. Based on the AT mode number, it selects either a win (1) or a loss (0). The number of wins corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The AT cycle preferential game count lottery shown in Figure 18(C) is a lottery that determines the number of games set to a predetermined preferential state after the AT ends (also referred to as the "preferential state game count"). Based on the AT mode number, one of 0, 10, 20, or 30 preferential state game counts is selected. The winning numbers corresponding to each AT mode number are as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 1 lottery shown in Figure 19(A) is a lottery to determine the Seven Table number (the number that manages the table that determines the continuation rate during the Red Seven mode). Based on the AT mode number, one of Seven Table numbers 0 to 15 is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 2 lottery shown in Figure 19(B) is a lottery to determine the Seven Table number, similar to the Seven Table 1 lottery. Based on the condition device group G number, one of the Seven Table numbers 0 through 15 is selected. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group G number is as shown in the figure.

The bell count lottery-1 shown in Figure 20(A) is the first lottery conducted to determine the number of bells, especially when the game mode is 0 to 2. Based on the CU rank number (a number that manages the ease of counting up), one of the following bell counts is selected: 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20. The number of winning positions corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The Bell Count 1 Lottery-2 shown in Figure 20(B) is, like the Bell Count 1 Lottery-1, a lottery for determining the number of bells, specifically for the first draw performed when the game mode is 4 or 5. Based on the CU rank number, it selects one of the following bell counts: 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20. The number of winning positions corresponding to each CU rank number are as shown in the figure.

The second bell count lottery shown in Figure 20(C) is a lottery conducted for the second and subsequent draws to determine the number of bell counts. Based on the CU rank number, one of the following bell counts is selected: 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20. The number of winning positions corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The bell count 3 lottery shown in Figure 20(D) is, like the bell count 2 lottery, a lottery conducted for the second and subsequent draws to determine the number of bells, selecting one of the following bell counts: 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20. The number of winning positions assigned to each bell count is as shown in the figure.

(1-2) Each means constituting the game progress management means 130 Returning to Figure 9, the received medal management means 131 is configured to control whether the game medals that are actually accepted (game medals that are guided to the acceptance passage and detected by the inserted medal sensor 28b, also referred to as "received game medals") from the game medals inserted from the medal slot 21 (also referred to as "inserted game medals") are to be directly bet or to be credited game medals. In this embodiment, if the number of bets has not reached the maximum bet allowance (the number of bets required to play the game (specified number "3")), the received game medals are to be directly bet, and if the number of bets has reached the maximum bet allowance and the number of credits has not reached the maximum credit allowance (for example, "50"), the received game medals are to be credited game medals.

Furthermore, the received medal management means 131 is configured to perform automatic betting (a process that sets the state in which the same number of game medals as the number bet in the previous game are bet without reducing the number of game medals held by the player) in a game that has been set to the re-play activation state. Even in the re-play activation state, if the number of credits has not reached the maximum credit allowance, the inserted game medals are accepted as game medals to be credited (or they may not be accepted). If the number of bets has reached the maximum bet allowance and the number of credits has reached the maximum credit allowance, the inserted game medals are not accepted and are returned.

The role determination means 132 is configured to perform a role determination process (internal draw) to select at least one role determination result from among multiple role determination results (condition devices) based on a preset role determination probability (number of draws) when the start lever 25 is operated (when the operation of the start lever 25 is validly received). This role determination process is performed using random numbers generated by the aforementioned 16-bit random number means. Specifically, when the start lever 25 is operated, the random numbers generated by the 16-bit random number means are captured. Then, when performing the role determination process, the captured random numbers are read, a predetermined software random number is added to the read random numbers, and the condition device is selected using the resulting random number. Alternatively, the condition device may be selected using the read random numbers without adding the predetermined software random number.

The role determination process is performed by referring to a predetermined role determination table (not shown in the diagram). The role determination table is configured such that the number of draws data corresponding to each condition device is stored in predetermined memory areas (multiple addresses) within the ROM 62, according to set values. When one or more condition devices are selected during the role determination process, the game role corresponding to the selected condition devices becomes the playable role for that game. Information about the selected condition device (winning role) is stored in a predetermined memory area of the RAM 63. However, if the information about the winning items stored in a game concerns the winning of a minor role or a re-play role, it is cleared (reset to "0") after the end of the game, regardless of whether these minor roles or re-play roles were achieved. On the other hand, information regarding the winning of a Big Bonus (BB) role is retained and not cleared until the BB role is achieved, even if it was selected but not achieved.

The performance group number determination means 133 is configured to associate a performance group number with the condition device selected by the role determination process. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 21, the bonus condition device is associated with the performance group A group number (0 or 1), and the prize-winning re-play condition device is associated with the performance group B group number (0 to 29). For example, as shown in Figure 21(A), the 1st type BB-A condition device and the 1st type BB-B condition device are both associated with the performance group A group number 1. Also, as shown in Figure 21(B), the prize-winning-A1 to A12 condition devices, which may result in advantages or disadvantages in gameplay (impact on payouts) or differences in the number of game tokens paid out (acquired) depending on the order of pressing the buttons, are both associated with the performance group B group number 13, and the prize-winning-B1 to B12 condition devices are both associated with the performance group B group number 14.

In contrast, for re-play condition devices A through L that correspond to the winning of re-play roles where the order of button presses does not affect the advantage or disadvantage of the game (i.e., the payout), and for winning minor roles (winning roles) where the number of game tokens paid out (acquired) does not differ depending on the order of button presses, or the number of game tokens that can be acquired is small (for example, less than the specified number of bets), a different performance group B number is assigned to each individual condition device.

Returning to Figure 9, the reel control means 134 is configured to start the rotation of reels 3a to 3c after confirming that the minimum play time has elapsed, triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 (i.e., the operation of the start lever 25 has been successfully received). After all the reels that have started rotating are rotating at a constant speed, the corresponding reels 3a to 3c are sequentially stopped from rotating when the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated sequentially (i.e., each operation of the stop switches 26a to 26c has been successfully received).

The rotation stop control of each reel 3a to 3c is based on each stop table (not shown) which is set according to the winning combination result selected by the winning combination determination process, and is controlled by stop switches 26a to
The operation of 26c is performed according to the operation method (press order, operation timing, etc.). Each reel 3a to 3c is operated so that each reel 3a to 3c stops within a predetermined stop allowance time (for example, 190 milliseconds) from the timing when the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated (in this embodiment, within a range of a maximum of 5 slide frames).

In other words, if a predetermined game combination is selected as an acceptable combination as a result of the combination determination process, the reels 3a to 3c are controlled to stop and display the corresponding symbols of the selected game combination on the active line 29 as much as possible within the allowable stop time. If the result is a miss, the reels are controlled to stop and display the corresponding symbols of any game combination on the active line 29. Furthermore, if a re-play combination or minor combination is to be won while a special combination is being carried over, or if a special combination and a re-play combination or minor combination are to be won simultaneously, the reel rotation stop control may be configured to prioritize the re-play combination (minor combinations may have a higher priority than special combinations), with the re-play combination being prioritized first, followed by the special combination, and then the minor combination.

The stop display symbol determination means 135 is configured to determine which symbol was stopped and displayed by the reels 3a to 3c based on the timing when the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated, and to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved based on the combination of symbols determined to have stopped and displayed on the active line 29 (which may differ from the combination of symbols that were actually stopped and displayed).

The payout medal management means 136 dispenses a number of game medals corresponding to the winning combination when a winning combination is achieved. If the number of credits has not reached the maximum credit allowance, the dispensed medals are added to the credit count via a storage-addition payout. If the number of credits has reached the maximum credit allowance, the dispensed medals are driven by the hopper 50 via the hopper drive circuit 52. Furthermore, when a settlement operation (pressing the settlement switch 24) is successfully received, the payout medal management means 136 drives the hopper 50 to dispense the number of game medals that were bet or the number of credits.

The blocker control means 137 is configured to output a blocker signal to control the blocker 48, switching the blocker 48 between an ON state (game token acceptance enabled) and an OFF state (game token acceptance disabled). When the blocker 48 is in the OFF state, game tokens inserted into the token slot 21 are guided to the return passage and returned. However, the insertion of game tokens is detected by the token insertion sensor 28a.

The indicator lamp control means 138 is configured to control the lighting and extinguishing of the various indicator lamps (MAX-BET indicator lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, payout indicator lamp 46c, game start indicator lamp 46d, re-play indicator lamp 46e, status indicator lamp 46f, count indicator lamp 46g, CRE lamp 46h, payout indicator lamp 46j) via the indicator lamp control circuit 47. When the payout indicator lamp 46j is to function as the main-side button-press order notification device, the button-press order management means 139 controls the payout indicator lamp 46j.

The button-press order management means 139 selects an instruction number (one of 0 to 6) corresponding to the button-press order to be announced, according to the winning combination result (condition device) selected by the winning combination determination process. Instruction number 0 is selected when the button-press order is not to be announced, while instruction numbers 1 to 6 are selected when the button-press order is to be announced. In this embodiment, instruction number 1 is associated with the button-press order "left, middle, right," instruction number 2 with "left, right, middle," instruction number 3 with "middle, left, right," instruction number 4 with "middle, right, left," instruction number 5 with "right, left, middle," and instruction number 6 with "right, middle, left."

Furthermore, the button-press order management means 139 is configured to perform button-press navigation (main-side button-press navigation) by having the payout number indicator lamp 46j function as a main-side button-press order notification device and notify the selected instruction number. This button-press navigation uses two 7-segment lamps (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "7-segments") provided on the payout number indicator lamp 46j to notify the navigation number. For example, "=" is displayed on the left 7-segment, and the numerical value of the instruction number (for example, "2" if the instruction number is 2) is displayed on the right 7-segment. The "=" displayed on the left 7-segment is to distinguish it from when the payout number indicator lamp 46j is displaying the payout number. When navigation number 0 is selected, the payout indicator lamp 46j is not displayed. However, as an alternative, "=" may be displayed on the left 7-segment display and "0" on the right 7-segment display, or "0" may be displayed on both the left and right 7-segment displays, or "0" may be displayed on only one of the left or right 7-segment displays.

The condition device group number determination means 140 is configured to determine the condition device group number used to select winning values in various lotteries, according to the performance group A group number and performance group B group number determined by the performance group number determination means 133. Specifically, the condition device group numbers are divided into 10 types, from condition device group A number to condition device group J number, and each combination of performance group A group number and performance group B group number is pre-associated with each number value from condition device group A number to condition device group J number. The specific association is as shown in Figure 22. For example, for the combination of performance group A group number 1 and performance group B group number 0, the following are associated: condition device group A number 1, condition device group B number 2, condition device group C number 2, condition device group D number 0, condition device group E number 0, condition device group F number 1, condition device group G number 0, condition device group H number 1, condition device group I number 0, and condition device group J number 1. In addition, the "Remarks" column in the table in Figure 22 contains abbreviations representing the content of each combination of production group A group number and production group B group number.

(Detailed explanation regarding the process of determining roles)
The role determination process performed by the role determination means 132 is a series of processes that, once per game, perform a role draw based on a predetermined probability (role determination probability), and then determine the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the active lines based on the winning number determined by that role draw. More specifically, first, a role draw is performed based on the role determination probability, and this role draw determines one winning number from among multiple winning numbers (including losing numbers). Each winning number is pre-associated with a bonus condition device number or a prize re-play condition device number, and once a winning number is determined, the bonus condition device number or prize re-play condition device number associated with that winning number is stored in a predetermined memory area of the RAM. Here, the bonus condition device number and the prize re-play condition device number are stored in different memory areas. This makes it possible to align the combination of symbols associated with the condition devices of the various condition device numbers stored in the RAM onto the active lines.

In the example above, one winning number was associated with either the bonus condition device number or the prize re-play condition device number. However, it is also possible to associate both the bonus condition device number and the prize re-play condition device number with a single winning number.

The above-mentioned probability of determining a winning combination can be set arbitrarily. Furthermore, the probability of determining a winning combination can be configured to change according to the above-mentioned setting value set by the amusement parlor staff, etc. In this embodiment, there are six setting value settings, from setting 1 to 6, and there are winning numbers for which the probability of determining a winning combination differs depending on the setting value, and winning numbers for which the probability of determining a winning combination remains unchanged even if the setting value changes. Hereinafter, setting the probability of determining a winning combination to change according to the setting value will be referred to as "setting a difference." Whether or not to set a difference for each winning number can be arbitrarily determined. As an example, a difference in setting may be set for winning numbers associated with the condition device number of a condition device that acts as a trigger for a lottery that affects the payout rate (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game tokens used for gameplay) in slot machine 1, while a difference in setting may or may not be set for winning numbers associated with the condition device number of a condition device that does not act as a trigger for a lottery.

Figure 23 shows an example of the probability of determining a winning combination in slot machine 1, illustrating the number of winning slots assigned to each winning number (total number of slots: 65,536). Figure 23 does not show the winning numbers themselves, but rather the condition devices associated with each winning number. Furthermore, this example shows the number of winning slots in each RT state (non-RT, RT1, and RT2) for three different settings: setting 1, setting 3, and setting 6. According to this example, during non-RT, the probability of selecting a winning number associated with either a Type 1 BB-A condition device number or a Type 1 BB-B condition device number is set relatively high, at approximately 7/100. Also, during non-RT or RT1, the probability of selecting any of the winning numbers corresponding to the winning-A1 to A12 condition device numbers is set considerably high, at approximately 7/10.

The table in Figure 24(A) shows the types of bonus condition devices, the bonus condition device numbers assigned to them, and the symbol combinations associated with each condition device (labeled "winning combination" in Figure 24(A)). The tables in Figures 24(B) and 25-29 show the types of prize-winning re-play condition devices, the prize-winning re-play condition device numbers assigned to them, and the symbol combinations associated with each condition device (labeled "winning combination" in Figures 24(B) and 25-29). The contents of several condition devices will be explained in detail below.

In the bonus condition device shown in Figure 24(A), the Type 1 BB-A condition device is assigned bonus condition device number 1, and the Type 1 BB-B condition device is assigned bonus condition device number 2. Bonus condition device number 0 indicates that it does not correspond to either bonus condition device. The Type 1 BB-A condition device is associated with the symbol combination of BB role 1, and this symbol combination can be displayed during non-RT (Replay Time) as described later. If the symbol combination of BB role 1 cannot be aligned on an active line, the game transitions to RT1, described later, and the state in which the symbol combination can be aligned is carried over. On the other hand, in RT2, the state in which the symbol combination of BB role 1 can be aligned on an active line cannot be reached, and therefore, that state is not carried over (in Figure 24(A), the "-" in the "RT2 (BB in operation)" column indicates that the state in which the symbol combination can be aligned cannot be reached, and that state is not carried over). The Type 1 BB-B condition device is associated with the symbol combinations for BB role 2, and these symbol combinations can be displayed during non-RT (Replay Time) modes. Furthermore, if the BB role 2 symbol combination cannot be aligned on an active line, the game transitions to RT1, and the state in which the symbol combination can be aligned is carried over. In RT2, however, the state in which the BB role 2 symbol combination can be aligned on an active line is not possible, and therefore, that state is not carried over.

The replay-A to L condition devices shown in Figure 24(B) are each assigned a corresponding replay-awarding condition device number from 1 to 12. These condition devices are associated with replay symbol combinations, and while it may be possible to align replay symbol combinations during non-RT and RT1, this state is not possible during RT2. Furthermore, if a winning number determined by the role lottery is associated with one of the replay-awarding condition device numbers 1 to 12 in Figure 24(B), it becomes possible to align the symbol combination shown in the "Winning Role" column corresponding to the condition device of that number on an active line. For example, if winning number 1 is determined by the role lottery, it becomes possible to align any one of the replay role symbol combinations 1 to 4 associated with replay-A condition device of replay-awarding condition device number 1. Furthermore, if the winning number 12 is determined in the draw, the game enters a state where any one of the symbol combinations of replay symbols 2 to 5 associated with the replay-L condition device of the winning replay condition device number 12 can be matched. The number 0 shown in Figure 24(B) indicates that a winning number has been determined that makes it impossible to match any winning or replay symbol combination, i.e., a loss. In this embodiment, a loss can only occur during non-RT, but it may also occur during RT1 or RT2.

The winning condition devices A1 to A12 shown in Figures 24(B), 25, and 26 are each assigned a corresponding winning re-play condition device number from 13 to 24. These condition devices are associated with combinations of winning symbols. In addition, during non-RT and RT1, it may be possible to align the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning condition devices A1 to A12, but in RT2, the system is configured so that such a state does not occur. The winning condition devices B1 to B12 shown in Figures 26 to 28 are each assigned a corresponding winning re-play condition device number from 25 to 36. These condition devices are associated with combinations of winning symbols, and in non-RT and RT1, it may be possible to align the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning condition devices B1 to B12, but in RT2, the system is configured so that such a state does not occur. The prize-winning condition devices C through E shown in Figure 29 are each assigned a corresponding prize-winning re-play condition device number from 37 through 39. These condition devices are associated with combinations of winning symbols. During non-RT (Replay Time) and RT1, it may be possible to align the symbol combinations corresponding to the prize-winning condition devices C through E, but this state is not possible during RT2.

(Detailed explanation regarding reel control based on the results of the role draw)
Next, we will describe the reel control performed by the reel control means 134 when the symbols corresponding to each of the above-mentioned condition devices are ready to be matched.
(a) Reel control for Type 1 BB During a non-RT period when the player is in a state where they can align the symbol combination corresponding to the Type 1 BB-A condition device shown in Figure 24(A), or during RT1 when the state where they can align the symbol combination corresponding to the Type 1 BB-A condition device is carried over, if the player's pressing position allows them to pull the corresponding symbols for BB role 1, "blue bar, blue bar, red seven," onto the active line 29, then BB role 1 is achieved. Similarly, during a non-RT period when the player is in a state where they can align the symbol combination corresponding to the Type 1 BB-B condition device, or during RT1 when the state where they can align the symbol combination corresponding to the Type 1 BB-B condition device is carried over, if the player's pressing position allows them to pull the corresponding symbols for BB role 2, "black bar, black bar, red seven," onto the active line 29, then BB role 2 is achieved.

(b) Reel control for replay When a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay-A to D condition devices shown in Figure 24(B) can be aligned, reel control is performed such that replay win 4 (middle row RP) is always achieved, regardless of the order or position of the buttons pressed, whether in non-RT or RT1. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay-E to G condition devices can be aligned during non-RT or RT, reel control is performed such that replay win 1 or 3 is achieved. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay-H to J condition devices can be aligned during non-RT, replay win 2 (upward right RP) is always achieved, regardless of the order or position of the buttons pressed, whereas when it can be aligned during RT1, reel control is performed such that replay win 4 (middle row RP) is always achieved, regardless of the order or position of the buttons pressed. Furthermore, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay-K and L condition devices can be aligned during a non-RT (Replay Time) state, replay bonus 5 (upper watermelon RP) will always be achieved regardless of the order or position of the buttons pressed. On the other hand, if the combination can be aligned during RT1, replay bonus 4 (middle RP) will always be achieved regardless of the order or position of the buttons pressed.

Furthermore, if the winning numbers that result in a loss are determined during RT1, when the winning numbers that result in a loss are determined, if the button press order is a predetermined order such as reverse pressing (pressing the stop switch 26c first), the combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" (also referred to as the "Red Seven Alignment Symbol") may be displayed in the display window W (for example, above the active line 29) depending on the pressing position. This Red Seven Alignment Symbol is the same as the corresponding symbol for the minor win 40 (Red Seven Alignment minor win), but minor win 40 can only occur during RT2 (see Figure 8). Therefore, the Red Seven Alignment Symbol displayed during RT1 is always a losing symbol.

(c) Reel control for winning prizes When the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices shown in Figures 24(B), 25, and 26 can be aligned during non-RT, a predetermined single-coin win will always be achieved regardless of the order or position of pressing the buttons. When the combinations can be aligned during RT1, reel control is performed such that the win obtained will differ depending on the order and position of pressing the buttons. For example, the winning-A11 condition device shown in Figure 26 corresponds to the symbol combinations of minor wins 6, 10, 15, 16, 21, and 34. When these symbol combinations can be aligned during non-RT, reel control is performed such that a single-coin win, minor win 6, will always be achieved regardless of the order or position of pressing the buttons.

On the other hand, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning condition A11 is aligned during RT1, the reel control is performed such that when the button press order is "middle-right-left", the 15-coin payout of small win 6 occurs with a probability of 1/1; when the button press order is "right-middle-left", the 15-coin payout of small win 34 occurs with a probability of 1/1; and for any other button press order ("left-middle-right", "left-right-center", "middle-left-right", "middle-right-left"), one of the 1-coin payouts of small win 10, 15, or 16 occurs with a probability of 1/8 each. Note that "left", "center", and "right" refer to the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and their order indicates the order in which they are operated. For example, "middle-right-left" represents the button press order in which the stop switches are operated in the order of 26b → 26c → 26a. In Figures 25 to 28, each button press order is shown in the order of the numbers "1", "2", and "3". In the diagram, "123," "132," "213," "231," "312," and "321" correspond to the following button press sequences: "Left-Center-Right," "Left-Right-Center," "Center-Left-Right," "Center-Right-Left," "Center-Right-Left," and "Right-Center-Left," respectively.

During RT1, the state in which you can align the symbol combinations corresponding to the bonus condition device is carried over. Therefore, depending on the order and position of the button presses, BB combination 1 or BB combination 2 may be achieved. For example, in RT1, while the state in which you can align the symbol combination corresponding to the 1-type BB-B condition device (i.e., the symbol combination for BB combination 2) is carried over, if you reach the state in which you can align the symbol combination corresponding to the entry-A11 condition device, when the button press order is "middle-right-left" and "right-middle-left", small win 6 and small win 34 will always be achieved, respectively, so BB combination 2 will not be achieved. On the other hand, with other button press orders ("left-middle-right", "left-right-middle", "middle-left-right", "middle-right-left"), if the corresponding symbols for small win 10, 15, or 16 can be drawn depending on the button position, BB combination 2 will not be achieved. However, if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn, and conversely, the corresponding symbols for BB combination 2, "black bar/black bar/red seven", are drawn, the reel control will be such that BB combination 2 is achieved.

Let's take the "left, middle, right" pressing order as an example. First, let's consider the case where the pressing position on the first left reel is within the range to pull in the "red seven" symbol. In this case, the reel control on the left reel is performed to pull in the "red seven" symbol, so at that stage, there remains a possibility of either small win 16 or small win 21 being achieved. Next, if the pressing position on the second middle reel is within the range to pull in the "blue bar" symbol, the reel control on the middle reel is performed to pull in the "blue bar" symbol, so at that stage, there remains a possibility of small win 16 being achieved. Finally, if the pressing position on the third right reel is within the range to pull in the "blue bar" symbol, the reel control on the right reel is performed to pull in the "blue bar" symbol, so ultimately small win 16 (corresponding symbols "red seven, blue bar, blue bar") is achieved. In contrast, if the second middle reel is pressed within the range where the "Red Seven" symbol can be drawn in, the reel control will be performed on the middle reel to draw in the "Red Seven" symbol, so a miss (no winning combination is formed) is confirmed at that stage (although the possibility of the "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" symbol combination being displayed as the final stop remains). Finally, if the third right reel is pressed within the range where the "Red Seven" symbol can be drawn in, the reel control will be performed on the right reel to draw in the "Red Seven" symbol, so the "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" symbol combination will be displayed as the final stop.

Next, let's explain the case where the first press position on the left reel is within the range to pull in the "black bar" symbol. In this case, the reel control on the left reel is performed to pull in the "black bar" symbol, so at that stage, there remains a possibility that either BB 2, minor role 10, or minor role 15 will be achieved. Next, if the second press position on the middle reel is within the range to pull in the "black bar" symbol, the reel control on the middle reel is performed to pull in the "black bar" symbol, so at that stage, there remains a possibility that BB 2 will be achieved. Finally, if the third press position on the right reel is within the range to pull in the "red seven" symbol, the reel control on the right reel is performed to pull in the "red seven" symbol, so ultimately BB 2 (corresponding symbols "black bar, black bar, red seven") will be achieved. In contrast, if the second press position on the middle reel falls within the range where the "Gold Seven" symbol can be drawn in, the reel control will be performed to draw in the "Gold Seven" symbol on the middle reel. Therefore, there remains a possibility of achieving a small win of 10 at that stage. Finally, if the third press position on the right reel falls within the range where the "Gold Seven" symbol can be drawn in, the reel control will be performed to draw in the "Gold Seven" symbol on the right reel. Ultimately, a small win of 10 (corresponding symbols: "Black Bar, Gold Seven, Gold Seven") will be achieved.

The reel control is such that the winning combinations for the prize-winning condition devices B1 to B12 shown in Figures 26 to 28 differ depending on the order and position of the button presses, whether the combinations can be aligned during non-RT or RT1. For example, the prize-winning condition device B7 shown in Figure 27 is a condition device associated with the symbol combinations of minor winning combinations 4, 5, 8, 13, 18, 23, and 30. If these symbol combinations can be aligned during non-RT, the reel control is such that if the button press order is "middle first", the 15-coin winning combination 30 is achieved with a probability of 1/1, and if the button press order is "left first" or "right first", the 1-coin winning combination 5 is achieved with a probability of 1/1. Note that "left first" refers to the button press order in which stop switch 26a is operated first, "middle first" refers to the button press order in which stop switch 26b is operated first, and "right first" refers to the button press order in which stop switch 26c is operated first. In Figures 26 to 29, the button press sequences for "Left First," "Center First," and "Right First" are represented as "1, -, -," "-, 2, -," and "-, -, 3," respectively.

On the other hand, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning B7 condition device can be matched during RT1, when the button press order is "middle left left", the single-coin payout of minor role 4 or minor role 5 will occur with a probability of 1/1; when the button press order is "right left middle", the 15-coin payout of minor role 30 will occur with a probability of 1/1; and for any other button press order ("left middle right", "left left middle", "middle right left", "right middle left"), one of the single-coin payouts of minor role 8, 13, 18, or 23 will occur with a probability of 1/8. Furthermore, during RT1, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the type 1 BB-A condition device (i.e., the symbol combination for BB role 1) can be matched, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning B7 condition device can be matched, when the button press order is "middle left left" and "right left middle", minor roles 4, 5, and minor role 30 will always occur, respectively, so BB role 1 will never occur. On the other hand, when pressing in any other order ("left-center-right", "left-right-center", "center-right-left", "right-center-left"), if the corresponding symbols for the minor roles 8, 13, 18, or 23 can be drawn in depending on the pressing position, BB role 1 will not be achieved. However, if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn in, and conversely, the corresponding symbols for BB role 1, "blue bar/blue bar/red seven", are drawn in, the reel control is performed in such a way that BB role 1 is achieved.

The symbol combinations for the winning condition devices C to E shown in Figure 29 are designed so that, regardless of the order or position of the button presses, a 15-coin payout (minor win 36) is always achieved, whether the symbols are aligned during non-RT (Replay Time) or RT1 (Replay Time 1).

The prize-winning condition devices F to Q shown in Figure 29 are configured so that the associated symbol combinations will not be able to be matched during non-RT or RT1, but will be selected during RT2. Of these, the prize-winning condition devices F, G, L, and M are configured so that when the associated symbol combinations are able to be matched during RT2, the reel control is performed so that the 15-coin watermelon small win (small wins 24 to 37) is always achieved, regardless of the order or position of pressing the buttons. The symbol combinations associated with the prize-winning condition devices I, J, K, O, P, and Q are configured so that when they are able to be matched during RT2, the reel control is performed so that the 1-coin win (small wins 1 to 23, 40 to 44) is achieved depending on the position of pressing the buttons. The symbol combination associated with the prize-winning condition device H is configured so that when they are able to be matched during RT2, the reel control is performed so that the 3-coin win (small wins 38, 39) is achieved depending on the position of pressing the buttons. The symbol combinations associated with the winning condition device, when they can be aligned during RT2, are controlled in such a way that if the button press order is "left first" or "middle first," a single-coin payout may be achieved depending on the button press position. If the button press order is "right first," a single-coin payout of sevens (minor payout of 40) may be achieved depending on the button press position.

(1-3) Each means constituting the main communication control means 150 The control command transmission means 151 is configured to transmit control commands containing various information related to the game at predetermined timings. For example, control commands transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated include a control command containing information indicating which game mode is set (also called a "game mode command"), a control command containing information indicating which RT state is set (also called an "RT command"), and a control command containing information indicating the operation status of replay (also called an "operation status command"). In addition, control commands transmitted when the start lever 25 is operated include, for example, a control command containing information on the instruction number (also called an "instruction number command"), and a control command containing information on the performance group number (performance group A number and performance group B number) (also called a "performance group number command"). In addition, control commands containing information about setting values, control commands containing information about the values of various counters such as the bell count counter, control commands containing information that instructs the content of the performance to be executed by the sub-control means, and control commands containing information to be transmitted during the bonus game described later may be transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated, when the start lever 25 is operated, or for any other reason.

Thus, when the operation of the start lever 25 is successfully received, various control commands (collectively referred to as "lever operation reception commands") corresponding to the instruction number command and performance group number command in the slot machine 1 are transmitted from the control command transmission means 151 to the sub-control means 200 (more specifically, the sub-main control means 200A), which will be described later. By receiving these lever operation reception commands, the sub-control means 200 can identify that the operation of the start lever 25 has been successfully received (that the start lever 25 has been successfully operated).

Furthermore, the control command transmission means 151, upon confirmation that the minimum play time has elapsed, transmits a control command (also referred to as the "all reel rotation start command") containing information indicating that all reels will start rotating, even before all reels begin rotating. In addition, upon receiving the first stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the reels for the first time), it transmits a control command (also referred to as the "first stop reception command") containing information indicating that the first stop operation has been received, and upon the first reel stop (stopping the reels corresponding to the first stop operation), it transmits a control command (also referred to as the "first stop command") containing information about the first reel stop. Similarly, upon receiving the second stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the next reels), it transmits a control command (also referred to as the "second stop reception command") containing information indicating that the second stop operation has been received, and upon the second reel stop (stopping the reels corresponding to the second stop operation), it transmits a control command (also referred to as the "second stop command") containing information about the second reel stop. Similarly, upon receiving a third stop operation (the operation of the stop switch to finally stop the reels), the system sends a control command (also called a "third stop acceptance command") containing information indicating that the third stop operation has been received. Furthermore, upon the third reel stop (the stopping of the reels corresponding to the third stop operation), the system sends a control command (also called a "third stop command") containing information about the third reel stop.

Thus, each time a stop switch successfully receives a stop operation and switches from the off state to the on state, the control command transmission means 151 transmits a control command (first, second, and third stop acceptance commands) containing information indicating that a stop operation has been received to the sub-control means 200 (more specifically, the sub-main control means 200A), which will be described later. The sub-control means 200 can then identify that each stop switch has successfully received a stop operation (first, second, and third stop operation) by receiving these stop acceptance commands.

Furthermore, after each stop switch has effectively received a stop operation, when the stop operation is released and each stop switch switches from the ON state to the OFF state, the control command transmission means 151 transmits a control command (stop operation release command) containing information indicating that the received stop operation has been released. Specifically, a control command containing information indicating that the first stop operation has been released (referred to as the "first stop operation release command"), a control command containing information indicating that the second stop operation has been released (referred to as the "second stop operation release command"), and a control command containing information indicating that the third stop operation has been released (referred to as the "third stop operation release command") are transmitted. By receiving these stop operation release commands, the sub-control means 200 can identify that the stop operation effectively received by each stop switch has been released (that the player's hand has been removed from the stop switch). Note that the first and second stop operation release commands may not be transmitted, and only the third stop operation release command may be transmitted.

Furthermore, the control command transmission means 151 transmits a control command containing information on the complete stop of all reels (also referred to as the "complete stop command") before determining the stop symbols, and a control command containing information on the number of game tokens dispensed (also referred to as the "dispensing quantity command") after determining the stop symbols. It also transmits a control command containing information on the prize winning determination result (also referred to as the "prize determination result command") at a predetermined timing after the complete stop of all reels. Communication between the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 200 (sub-main control means 200A) is only possible in one direction, from the former to the latter.

The external signal transmitting means 152 is configured to transmit an external signal to external devices such as a data counter or hall computer when a predetermined game state is reached. In this embodiment, the external signal is output when, while in game mode 3 of the advantageous section, a combination of symbols associated with the winning-A1 to A12 condition device or the winning-B1 to B12 condition device is matched, and 15 game tokens are dispensed twice (consecutively). Such a situation can occur whether the game is in a Big Bonus (BB) state or not (not in a BB state). If the external signal were to be output only when such a situation occurs during a BB state, it would be possible to determine whether the game is in a BB state based on the output of the external signal. In contrast, in this embodiment, the external signal is output when the above situation occurs, regardless of whether the game is in a BB state or not. Therefore, even if an external signal is output, it is difficult to reliably determine whether the game is in a BB state based on that alone. However, the probability of 15 game tokens being dispensed outside of the Big Bonus (BB) is considerably lower than the probability of it being dispensed inside the BB. Therefore, if an external signal is output, it is more likely that it was output inside the BB. Thus, even if a player checks the number of times the external signal is output using an external device and judges that number to be the number of times the game has transitioned into the BB, this judgment will not deviate significantly from the actual situation (ensuring reliability when the external signal is interpreted as a signal indicating that the game has entered the BB).

(2) Functional block of sub-control means 200 The sub-control means 200 is configured to include a sub-main control means (also called the "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly manages (instructs) lamp effects, image effects and sound effects, and a sub-sub-control means (also called the "second sub-control means") 200B that mainly controls (executes) image effects and sound effects.

(2-1) Means constituting the sub-main control means 200A The sub-main control means 200A is broadly composed of a performance management means 210 and a sub-main communication control means 230. The performance management means 210 includes a game performance management means 211, a notification performance management means 212, and a lamp performance control means 213, while the sub-main communication control means 230 includes a control command receiving means 231, a performance command transmission means 232, and a status command receiving means 233. The above-mentioned means in the sub-main control means 200A are functional representations of the hardware such as the sub-main CPU 71, ROM 72, RAM 73, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-main control board 70A shown in Figure 2, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 72.

(Each of the means constituting the production management means 210)
The game presentation management means 211 is configured to manage the timing of execution of image and sound effects (also referred to as "game effects") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, primarily for the purpose of enhancing the enjoyment and gameplay of the game, based on control commands from the main control means 100. Examples of game effects include continuous effects, single effects, and assist effects.

A continuous performance is a performance that continues over multiple game periods. Examples include using the image display device 11 to display images that form a continuous story over multiple game periods, or displaying performance images that symbolize being in a predetermined game mode (for example, game mode 5). Furthermore, when performing continuous performances or the single performances described below, performances using performance lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b or decorative lamps 32a, 32b, or performances using speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b may be combined.

A single-shot effect is an effect that is executed only once during the game, such as when a specific situation occurs. For example, an effect that displays an image on the image display device 11 during the rotation of each reel, suggesting the probability of winning a specific game combination, is one example. Another example of a single-shot effect is when the AT game count (number of bells) is increased by the main control means 100, and the added value of the AT game count (e.g., "+10") is displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11.

The assist feature is a feature designed to support the player. In this embodiment, the push-button navigation feature is primarily performed according to the navigation number information transmitted via the navigation number command from the main control means 100. This push-button navigation feature (sub-side push-button navigation) is a single feature that uses the image display device 11 as a sub-side push-button sequence display to show the player the correct push-button sequence corresponding to the navigation number on the display screen 11a. In this embodiment, the system is configured to execute the RP navigation feature (sub-side RP navigation) corresponding to the RP navigation, the prize-winning navigation feature (sub-side prize-winning navigation) corresponding to the prize-winning navigation, and the eye-press navigation feature (sub-side eye-press navigation) corresponding to the eye-press navigation.

Specific examples of button-pressing navigation effects (RP navigation effects, prize-winning navigation effects) that notify the player of the button-pressing order include displaying numbers indicating the corresponding button-pressing order (for example, for the "left first" order, "1" is displayed in the lower left of the display screen 11a; for the "middle left left" order, the numbers indicating the button-pressing order are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 11a in the order of "2", "1", and "3" from left to right). When displaying the first through third button-pressing orders, the display of the first button-pressing order may be erased when the player operates the first stop switch according to the displayed first button-pressing order; the display of the second button-pressing order may be erased when the player operates the second stop switch according to the displayed second button-pressing order; and the display of the third button-pressing order may be erased when the player operates the third stop switch according to the displayed third button-pressing order.

Furthermore, if the player operates the stop switch in a different order than the displayed button press sequence, the button press navigation display may be immediately terminated. Additionally, when displaying the button press sequence, the voice prompts "middle," "left," and "right" may be output from speakers 15a, 15b, etc., corresponding to the next operation to be performed. Furthermore, the indicator lamps 13a, 12, and 13b may be associated with "left," "middle," and "right," respectively, and illuminate or flash in accordance with the next operation to be performed. A display for sub-button press navigation may also be provided. For example, a display consisting of three 7-segment lamps arranged horizontally below the display window W may be provided, and in the case of the "right, middle, left" button press sequence, the numbers "3," "2," and "1" could be displayed on the left, center, and right 7-segment lamps, respectively.

The notification and effect management means 212 is configured to manage the execution timing of image and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as "notification effects") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, primarily for the purpose of informing the player of information related to the game, based on control commands from the main control means 100. Examples of notification effects include error notification effects that announce an error with text information such as "Error Occurred," and effects that announce an image is being prepared with text information such as "Image Preparing" when the power is restored. Furthermore, an example of a notification effect is an effect that displays an image containing text information (also referred to as a "warning image") to draw the player's attention and prevent them from becoming excessively engrossed in the game.

The lamp effect control means 213 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, decorative lamps 32a, 32b, and backlights 38a to 38d. It is also configured to perform suggestive effects as described later.

(Each means constituting the sub-main communication control means 230)
The control command receiving means 231 is configured to receive control commands from the main control means 100 and store them in a predetermined storage area such as RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control commands).

The performance command transmission means 232 is configured to transmit performance commands (for example, performance commands including image information) containing various information related to performances (such as performance commands including image information) to the sub-sub control means 200B based on control commands from the main control means 100.

The status command receiving means 233 is configured to receive status commands from the sub-sub control means 200B (for example, status commands containing information that an error has occurred in receiving a performance command) and store them in a predetermined storage area such as RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for received status commands).

(2-2) Means Constituting the Sub-Sub Control Means 200B In contrast to the sub-main control means 200A configured as described above, the sub-sub control means 200B is broadly composed of a performance execution control means 250 and a sub-sub communication control means 270. The performance execution control means 250 comprises a game performance execution control means 251 and a notification performance execution control means 252, and the sub-sub communication control means 270 comprises a performance command receiving means 271 and a status command transmission means 272. The above-mentioned means in the sub-sub control means 200B functionally represent the hardware such as the sub-sub CPU 75, ROM 76, RAM 77, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B shown in Figure 2, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 76.

(Each means constituting the performance execution control means 250)
The game performance execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, speakers 15a, 15b, etc., based on performance commands from the sub-main control means 200A, and to execute the game performance described above.

The notification effect execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, speakers 15a, 15b, etc., based on effect commands from the sub-main control means 200A, and to execute the aforementioned notification effect.

(Each means constituting the sub-sub communication control means 270)
The performance command receiving means 271 is configured to receive performance commands from the sub-main control means 200A and store them in a predetermined storage area such as RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for the received performance commands).

The status command transmission means 272 is configured to transmit the above-mentioned status command to the sub-main control means 200A.

The transmission of control commands from the control command transmission means 151, the transmission of performance commands from the performance command transmission means 232, and the transmission of status commands from the status command transmission means 272 are all performed using a serial communication method (parallel communication may also be used). Furthermore, each transmission means 151, 232, and 272 has a similar configuration, comprising a command buffer (also referred to as "CB") as a storage area for temporarily storing commands to be transmitted, a command processing unit for processing such as writing and reading commands to be transmitted, and a command transmission unit for transmitting commands via serial communication.

The CB (Controller Binder) has multiple memory areas, each distinguished by its own address, and is configured to store one byte of command data in each memory area. The command processing unit is configured to generate the command data to be transmitted, write it to the address area indicated by the CB's write pointer, and simultaneously read previously written command data from the address area indicated by the CB's read pointer, writing it to the TDR (Transmit Data Register) of the command transmission unit. The command transmission unit is configured to transfer the command data written to the TDR to the TSR (Transmit Shift Register), where it is serially converted and transmitted.

In the case of parallel communication, the system is configured to read previously written command data from the address area indicated by the CB's read pointer and transmit it by writing that command data to a predetermined output port (an output port for transmission to the sub-control means). In this embodiment, a single command typically consists of two bytes (the checksum is one byte). Furthermore, the communication method is asynchronous (asynchronous), and it has one stop bit and one parity bit (even parity) (the communication method and command configuration can be changed as appropriate).

<<Main control processes>>
Below, the control processes performed by the main control means 100 of the slot machine 1, particularly the setting change process, the game progress control process, and the timer interrupt process, will be explained with additional reference to Figures 30 to 58. A brief explanation of the variables such as counters and flags used in the following explanation is provided in the variable list table in Figure 12.

<Settings change process>
First, with reference to Figure 30(A), the basic flow of the setting change device processing will be explained. The setting change device processing is performed when a setting change is made, and it involves saving "0" to all memory areas (addresses in RAM 63 that store information related to the advantageous period) that affect the performance related to the instruction function (step K1).

<Game progress control processing>
Next, the basic flow of the game progress control process will be explained with reference to Figures 30(B) to 57. The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during gameplay. As shown in Figure 30(B), first, a game start waiting process is performed (step S1). In this game start waiting process, as shown in Figure 30(C), it is determined whether or not the total stop weight number is 0 (step S11). If the total stop weight number is not 0, the system waits for the waiting time corresponding to the total stop weight number (step S12) and proceeds to step S13. If the total stop weight number is 0, the system proceeds directly to step S13. Then, in step S13, 0 is saved as the total stop weight number, the game start waiting process ends, and the system returns.

After the game start waiting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S2 in Figure 30(B). Here, the system waits in that state until the start lever 25 is operated, and once the operation is received, the internal lottery start process is performed (step S3). In this internal lottery start process, an internal lottery is performed as shown in Figure 31(A) (step S21). This internal lottery determines the bonus condition device number and the prize re-play condition device number. After the internal lottery is executed, the process proceeds to the group number setting process.

In the group number setting process, as shown in Figure 31(B), a value corresponding to the bonus condition device number (see Figure 21(A)) is stored in the performance group A number (step S31), and a value corresponding to the prize-winning re-play condition device number (see Figure 21(B)) is stored in the performance group B number (step S32). Next, values corresponding to performance group A and performance group B numbers (see Figure 22, and so on) are stored in the condition device group A number (step S33), values corresponding to performance group A and performance group B numbers are stored in the condition device group D number (step S34), and values corresponding to performance group A and performance group B numbers are stored in the condition device group G number (step S35).

Similarly, values corresponding to performance group A and performance group B are stored in condition device group B (step S36), values corresponding to performance group A and performance group B are stored in condition device group C (step S37), and values corresponding to performance group A and performance group B are stored in condition device group E (step S38). Furthermore, values corresponding to performance group A and performance group B are stored in condition device group I (step S39), values corresponding to performance group A and performance group B are stored in condition device group F (step S40), and values corresponding to performance group A and performance group B are stored in condition device group H (step S41). Then, values corresponding to performance group A and performance group B are stored in condition device group J (step S42), and the process proceeds to section type number management lever processing.

In the section type number management lever processing, as shown in Figure 32, it is first determined whether the section type number is 0 (normal section) (step S51). If the section type number is 0, the process proceeds to step S52 to determine whether the BB (Bonus Bullet) is not activated. If the BB is not activated, it is determined whether the BB is inside (step S53). If it is not inside, the process proceeds directly to step S55. If it is inside, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 (step S54). If the condition device group A number is 1, the process proceeds to step S51. On the other hand, if the determination in step S52 indicates that the BB is activated, or if the determination in step S54 indicates that the condition device group A number is not 1, the process does not proceed to step S51, but instead proceeds to the standby effect processing described later.

In step S51, the advantageous section transition process is performed. In this advantageous section transition process, as shown in Figure 34(A), it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 0 (step S71). If it is 0, the advantageous section transition process ends and the system returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 0, an advantageous section lottery is performed (step S72), and the lottery result is saved to the section type number (step S73). Next, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 (step S74). If it is 0, the advantageous section transition process ends and the system returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, a chance mode 1 lottery is performed (step S75), and the lottery result is saved to the chance mode number (step S76). Furthermore, a seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S77), and the lottery result is saved to the seven table number (step S78).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 (step S79). If the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S83, where the chance game number lottery is performed. In this chance game number lottery, as shown in Figure 34(B), the chance game number is drawn (step S91), the lottery result is saved in the chance game number counter (step S92), and the process returns. Upon returning from the chance game number lottery, the process proceeds to step S84 in Figure 34(A), where the chance cycle lottery is performed. The lottery result is then saved in the chance cycle counter, the advantageous section transition process ends, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the Chance Mode number is 4 as determined in step S79, the process proceeds to step S80, where the AT win processing is performed. In this AT win processing, as shown in Figure 35, first, 1 is saved to the AT win flag (step S101). Next, an AT mode lottery is performed and the lottery result is saved to the AT mode number (step S102). Furthermore, a Seven 1 lottery is performed and the lottery result is saved to the Seven number (step S103). Then, the Seven number correction processing is performed (step S104).

In this Seven Number Correction Process, as shown in Figure 36(A), first, a correction counter process is performed (step S121). In this correction counter process, as shown in Figure 36(B), the correction counter data (a counter that adds the value of the gold Seven Counter and the value of the Seven Counter) is set to 0 (step S131), and it is determined whether or not the Seven Number is 2 (step S132). If the Seven Number is 2, the value of the gold Seven Counter is set in the correction counter data (step S133), and then 1 is added to the correction counter data (step S134), and the process proceeds to step S135. On the other hand, if the determination in step S132 is that the Seven Number is not 2, the process proceeds directly to step S135. In step S135, the value of the Seven Counter is added to the correction counter data, and the process proceeds to step S136. In step S136, the value calculated based on the cumulative counter, the correction counter data, and the bell count counter is stored in the correction counter data, and the process returns from the correction counter process.

Upon return from the correction counter processing, the process proceeds to step S122 in Figure 36(A), where it is determined whether the correction counter value is 1901 or greater. If the correction counter value is 1901 or greater, 1 is saved to the seventh number (step S123), the seventh number correction processing ends, and the process returns. If the correction counter value is not 1901 or greater, the process returns directly. In the arrival flag processing described later, the processing procedure branches depending on whether the correction counter value is 2101 or greater. In contrast, this process determines whether to save 1 to the seventh number based on whether the correction counter value is 1901 or greater, and the correction counter value used for branching (also called the "discrimination value") is different. This is because saving 1 to the seventh number allows for at least one more AT game, and consequently, the number of game tokens that can be acquired in the future increases. Therefore, the discrimination value is set lower than 2101 in the arrival flag processing. In this way, by changing the discrimination value according to the situation, the number of game tokens that can be acquired in the future can be managed without unnecessarily overcounting.

Upon return from the seven-number correction process, the process proceeds to step S105 in Figure 35, where it is determined whether the seven-number is 1 or not. If the seven-number is not 1, 3 is stored in the gold seven-counter (step S106), and the process proceeds to step S107. If the seven-number is 1, the process proceeds directly to step S107. In step S107, the arrival flag processing is performed.

In this arrival flag processing, as shown in Figure 36(C), first, a correction counter processing is performed (step S141). After the correction counter processing is completed, it is determined whether the correction counter is 2101 or greater (step S142). If it is 2101 or greater, 1 is saved to the arrival flag (step S143), and the arrival flag processing is completed and the system returns. On the other hand, if the correction counter is not 2101 or greater, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 (step S144). If it is 3, the system returns as is; otherwise, 0 is saved to the arrival flag (step S145), and the system returns.

Upon returning from the arrival flag processing, the process proceeds to step S108 in Figure 35, where it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1. If the condition device group A number is 1, the AT winning process ends and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1, an EX mode 1 lottery is performed (step S109), the lottery result is saved to the EX mode number (step S110), and then the AT winning process ends and the process returns.

Upon returning from the AT winning processing, the process proceeds to step S81 in Figure 34(A), where it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1. If the condition device group A number is not 1, the transition to the advantageous section ends and the process returns. If the condition device group A number is 1, the AT entry lever process is performed (step S82).

In this AT entry lever process, as shown in Figure 37, first, a loop CU rank set process is performed (step S151). In the loop CU rank set process, as shown in Figure 38(A), the seven set counter is incremented by 1 (step S171), a value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter is stored in the loop number (step S172), a value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter is stored in the CU rank number (step S173), and then the process returns.

Upon return from the Loop CU rank set processing, the process proceeds to step S152 in Figure 37, where it is determined whether the Seven number is 1. If the Seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S154, where the Seven Loop draw processing is performed. In the Seven Loop draw processing, as shown in Figure 38(B), the Seven Loop draw is performed (step S181), the draw result is saved to the Seven Counter (step S182), and the process returns. Upon return from the Seven Loop draw processing, the process proceeds to step S155 in Figure 37, where the arrival flag processing is executed and the process proceeds to step S156. On the other hand, if the value of the Seven Counter is not 0 as determined in step S153, the process proceeds directly to step S156. Also, if the Seven number is not 1 as determined in step S152, the value of the Gold Seven Counter is deducted by 1 (step S158), and the Gold Seven Loop draw correction processing is performed (step S159).

In this gold seven-loop lottery correction process, as shown in Figure 38(C), it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the gold seven-loop lottery correction process ends and the system returns. On the other hand, if the arrival flag is 0, the correction counter process is performed (step S192), and after its completion, it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is less than 1900 (step S193). Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1900 or greater, the gold seven-loop lottery correction process ends and the system returns. On the other hand, if the value of the correction counter is less than 1900, the gold seven-loop lottery is performed (step S194), and it is determined whether the result is 0 or not (step S195). Here, if the result of the gold seven-loop lottery is 0, the gold seven-loop lottery correction process ends and the system returns. On the other hand, if the result of the gold seven-loop lottery is not 0, 3 is saved in the gold seven-counter (step S196), the arrival flag process is executed (step S197), and the system returns.

Upon returning from the Gold Seven Loop lottery correction process, the process proceeds to step S156 in Figure 37, where an additional mode lottery is performed and the result is saved to the additional mode number (step S157). Next, a correction counter process is performed (step S160), and after its completion, a bell count 1 lottery is performed (step S161), and the result is saved to the bell count counter (step S162). Finally, the bell count counter correction process is performed (step S163).

In this bell count counter correction process, as shown in Figure 39, first, the allowable bell count value (the number of bell counts allowed before the correction counter reaches its upper limit) calculated based on the difference between the upper limit of the correction counter (2100) and the current value is stored in the correction counter (step S201). Next, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not (step S202). If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S203. If it is 0, it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is smaller than the value of the bell count counter (step S206). If it is smaller, the process proceeds to step S203. In step S203, 7 is stored in the bell count counter, and after storage, the bell count counter correction process ends and the system returns. Upon returning from the bell count counter correction process, the process proceeds to step S164 in Figure 37, where the arrival flag process is executed, the AT entry lever process ends, and the system returns. Upon returning from the AT entry lever process, the advantageous section transition process in Figure 34(A) also ends and the system returns, and the process proceeds to step S56 in Figure 32, where the lever wait process is executed.

In this lever-time wait processing, as shown in Figure 40, first, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 or not (step S211). If the condition device group A number is 1, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not (step S212). If the AT winning flag is 0, 2 is stored in the lever weight number (step S213). If it is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever weight number (step S214). After saving, the lever-time wait processing is terminated and the system returns. On the other hand, if the determination in step S211 indicates that the condition device group A number is not 1, the system proceeds to step S215 to determine whether the main game state number is less than 2. If the main game state number is less than 2, the system proceeds directly to step S217. If the main game state number is 2 or greater, it is determined whether the main game state number is 4 or not (step S230). If it is 4, the system proceeds to step S217. On the other hand, if the main game state number is not 4, the lever-time wait processing is terminated and the system returns.

In step S217, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0. If it is 0, the lever wait process ends and the system returns. On the other hand, if the AT winning flag is not 0, a performance lever wait lottery is performed (step S218). Then, it is determined whether the result is 0 (step S219). If it is 0, the lever wait process ends and the system returns. On the other hand, if the result of the performance lever wait lottery is not 0, the system proceeds to step S213, where 2 is saved as the lever wait number. After saving, the lever wait process ends and the system returns. Upon returning from the lever wait process, the system returns to the section type number management lever process shown in Figure 32 and proceeds to the standby performance process described later.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S51 of Figure 32, if the section type number is not 0, 0 is saved in the lever full stop flag (step S57), and it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 or not (step S58). Here, if the condition device group A number is 1, 1 is saved in the Type 1 BB win flag (step S59), and if it is not 1, 0 is saved in the Type 1 BB win flag (step S60). Then, after saving, it is determined whether the prize re-play condition device number is one of 13 to 36 (step S61). Here, if the prize re-play condition device number is one of 13 to 36, a value corresponding to the prize re-play condition device number is saved in the instruction number (step S62), and then the process proceeds to step S63 of Figure 33. If the prize re-play condition device number is not one of 13 to 36, the process proceeds directly to step S63.

In step S63, the main game state number is determined. Depending on the main game state number, if it is 1, the main game state number 1 lever process is performed (step S64). If the main game state number is 2, the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processes are performed (step S65). If the main game state number is 3, the main game state number 3 lever process is performed (step S66). If the main game state number is 4, the main game state number 4 lever process is performed (step S67). If the main game state number is 5, the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processes are performed (step S68). After each lever process is executed, the process proceeds to step S56 in Figure 32. On the other hand, if the main game state number is any other number, no special processing is performed, and the process proceeds directly to step S56.

In the main game state number 1 lever processing, as shown in Figure 41(A), a chance mode 2 lottery is performed (step S241), and then a chance mode number determination process is performed (step S2421). In this chance mode number determination process, as shown in Figure 41(B), it is determined whether the result of the chance mode 2 lottery or the chance mode 3 lottery is 0 or not (step S251). If the lottery result is 0, the chance mode number determination process ends and the system returns. If the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved to the chance mode number (step S252) and then the system returns.

Upon returning from the chance mode number determination process, the process proceeds to step S243 in Figure 41(A) to determine whether the chance mode number is 4 or not. If the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S247 to determine whether the flag for type 1 BB win is 0 or not. If it is 0, the main game state number 1 lever process is terminated and the process returns. If it is not 0, the chance game number lottery process is performed, and after its completion, the main game state number 1 lever process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the determination in step S242 is that the chance mode number is 4, the process proceeds to step S244 to perform the AT win process. After its completion, the process determines whether the flag for type 1 BB win is 0 or not (step S245). If it is 0, the main game state number 1 lever process is terminated and the process returns. If it is not 0, the AT entry lever process is performed, and then the process returns.

In the main game state numbers 2 and 5 lever processing, as shown in Figure 41(C), the AT win lever processing is performed first (step S261). In this AT win lever processing, as shown in Figure 42, it is first determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not (step S271). If the arrival flag is not 0, the AT win lever processing is terminated and the player returns. If the arrival flag is 0, the player proceeds to step S272 to determine whether the EX mode number is 1 or not. If the EX mode number is 1, an EX mode 2 lottery is performed (step S273), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 2 or not (step S274). If the lottery result is 2, the EX mode number is saved as 2 (step S275), and the player proceeds to step S276. On the other hand, if the EX mode number is not 1 as determined in step S272, the player proceeds directly to step S276. If the result of the EX mode 2 lottery is not 2 as determined in step S274, the player proceeds directly to step S276.

In step S276, it is determined whether the seven table number is less than 13. If the seven table number is less than 13, it is determined whether the drawn flag is 0 (step S277). If it is 0, it is further determined whether the condition device group G number is 0 (step S278). If the condition device group G number is not 0, the process proceeds to step S279. In step S279, the seven table 2 draw is performed, and it is determined whether the draw result is 0 (step S280). If the result of the seven table 2 draw is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S282. If the result of the seven table 2 draw is not 0, the draw result is saved in the seven table number (step S281), and then the process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, 1 is saved in the drawn flag, and the process proceeds to step S283. On the other hand, if the Seven Table number is 13 or greater in the determination in step S276, if the drawn flag is not 0 in the determination in step S277, or if the condition device group G number is 0 in the determination in step S278, the process proceeds to step S283, respectively.

In step S283, it is determined whether the Seven number is 1 or not. If the Seven number is 1, a Seven 2 draw is performed (step S284), and it is determined whether the draw result is 2 or not (step S285). If the result of the Seven 2 draw is 2, the draw result is saved in the Seven number (step S286), and the Seven number correction process is performed (step S287). After the Seven number correction process is performed, it is determined whether the Seven number is 2 or not (step S288), and if it is 2, 3 is saved in the Gold Seven Counter (step S289), and the process proceeds to step S290. On the other hand, if the Seven number is not 1 in the determination in step S283, if the result of the Seven 2 draw is not 2 in the determination in step S285, or if the Seven number is not 2 in the determination in step S289, the process proceeds to step S291, respectively. In step S291, a Seven Stock 1 draw is performed, the draw result is added to the Seven Counter, and then the process proceeds to step S290. In step S290, the arrival flag processing is performed, and then the lever processing after AT win is terminated and the system returns.

After winning the AT and returning from the lever operation, the process proceeds to step S262 in Figure 41(C), where it is determined whether the flag for the Type 1 BB win is 0. If the flag for the Type 1 BB win is 0, the main game state number 2 and 5 lever operation is terminated and the player returns. If it is not 0, the AT entry lever operation is performed, and then the game state number 2 and 5 lever operation is terminated and the player returns.

In the main game state number 3 lever processing, as shown in Figure 43(A), first, it is determined whether the instruction number is 0 or not (step S301). If the instruction number is not 0, the value of the bell count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S302), and then the process proceeds to step S303. If the instruction number is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not. If the arrival flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated and the process returns. If the arrival flag is 0, a Seven Stock 2 lottery is performed (step S304), and the result of that lottery is added to the Seven Counter (step S306). Next, the arrival flag processing is performed (step S306), and it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not (step S307). If the arrival flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated and the process returns. If the arrival flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the gold Seven Counter is 1 or 2 (step S308). If the value of the Gold Seven Counter is not 1 or 2, the main game state number 3 lever processing ends and the system returns. If the value of the Gold Seven Counter is 1 or 2, the system proceeds to the Gold Seven Loop rewrite lottery correction process.

In the Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery Correction Process, as shown in Figure 43(B), first, a correction counter process is performed (step S311), and then it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is less than 1900 (step S312). If the value of the correction counter is 1900 or greater, the Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery Correction Process ends and the system returns. If the value of the correction counter is less than 1900, the Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery is performed (step S313), and it is determined whether the result is 0 (step S314). If the result of the Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery is 0, the Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery Correction Process ends and the system returns. If it is not 0, 3 is stored in the Gold Seven Counter (step S316). Then, the arrival flag process is performed (step S316), and then the Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery Correction Process ends and the system returns. Upon returning from the Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery Correction Process, the Main Game State Number 3 Lever Process shown in Figure 43(A) also ends and the system returns.

In the main game state number 4 lever processing, as shown in Figure 44(A), a pull-back 1 lottery is performed, and it is determined whether the result of the lottery is 0 or not (step S321). If the result of the pull-back 1 lottery is not 0, the AT win processing is performed (step S323), and then it is determined whether the Type 1 BB win flag is 0 or not (step S324). If the Type 1 BB win flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever processing is terminated and the player returns. If the Type 1 BB win flag is not 0, the AT entry lever processing is performed (step S325), and then the main game state number 4 lever processing is terminated and the player returns. On the other hand, if the result of the pull-back 1 lottery is 0 in the determination in step S322, the player proceeds to step S326, where it is determined whether the Type 1 BB win flag is 0 or not. Here, if the flag for winning a Type 1 Big Bonus is 0, the main game state number 4 lever process ends and the player returns. If the flag for winning a Type 1 Big Bonus is not 0, the player proceeds to the AT cycle preferential game count lottery process. In this AT cycle preferential game count lottery process, as shown in Figure 44(B), the AT cycle preferential game count lottery is performed (step S331), the lottery result is saved in the AT cycle preferential game count counter (step S332), and the AT cycle preferential game count lottery process ends and the player returns. With this return from the AT cycle preferential game count lottery process, the main game state number 4 lever process shown in Figure 44(A) also ends and the player returns.

Next, the standby animation process that takes place after the section type number management lever process shown in Figure 32 will be explained. In this standby animation process, as shown in Figure 45, it is first determined whether the section type number is 0 or not (step S341). If the section type number is not 0, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 or not (step S342). If the main game state number is 3, it is further determined whether the value of the seven set counter is 1 or not (step S344). If the value of the seven set counter is 1, it is determined whether the seven table number is less than 15 or not (step S344). If it is less than 15, the process proceeds to step S345, and if it is 15 or more, the process proceeds to step S347. In step S347, it is determined whether the winning re-play condition device number is one of 1 to 12 or 37 to 39. If it is determined not to be one of these, the process proceeds to step S345. If it is determined to be one of these, the standby animation process ends and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is 0 in the determination in step S341, or if the main game state number is not 3 in the determination in step S342, the process proceeds directly to step S345.

In step S345, it is determined whether the lever weight number is 0. If the lever weight number is 0, the process proceeds to step S345. If the lever weight number is not 0, the program waits for a time corresponding to the lever weight number, stores 0 in the lever weight number (step S349), and then proceeds to step S346. In step S346, it is determined whether the standby effect number is 0. If the standby effect number is 0, the standby effect processing is terminated and the program returns. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the standby effect is executed (step S349), the standby effect processing is terminated, and the program returns.

Upon completion of the standby animation process and return, the section type number management lever process shown in Figure 32 also ends, thereby completing the internal lottery start process shown in Figure 31(A), and proceeding to step S4 in Figure 30(B). In step S4, the system continuously determines whether all reels have stopped. If all reels have stopped, game tokens are dispensed (only if a winning combination is achieved) (step S5). Furthermore, count management is performed, including updating the display on the indicator (not shown) that shows the number of game tokens acquired during AT, etc., according to the number of tokens dispensed (step S6). Afterward, the section type number management game end process is performed (step S7).

In this section type number management game termination process, as shown in Figure 46, it is first determined whether the section type number is 0 (step S361). If the section type number is 0, the section type number management game termination process ends and the system returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, 1 is saved to the lever all-stop flag (step S362), and the cumulative counter process is performed (step S363). In the cumulative counter process, as shown in Figure 47, it is determined whether the re-play activation symbol (the symbol corresponding to the re-play role) is displayed (step S381). If it is displayed, the cumulative counter process ends and the system returns. On the other hand, if the re-play activation symbol is not displayed, the number of game tokens dispensed (including the case of 0) is added to the cumulative counter value (step S382), and then 3 is subtracted from the cumulative counter value (step S383), before the cumulative counter process ends and the system returns.

Upon return from the cumulative counter processing, the process proceeds to step S364 in Figure 46 to determine the main game state number. Then, according to the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, the process of stopping all main game state number 0 is performed (step S365), if the main game state number is 1, the process of stopping all main game state number 1 is performed (step S366), if the main game state number is 2, the process of stopping all main game state numbers 2 and 5 is performed (step S367). Also, if the main game state number is 3, the process of stopping all main game state number 3 is performed (step S3
68) If the main game state number is 4, the process of stopping all main game state number 4 is performed (step S369), and if the main game state number is 5, the process of stopping all main game state numbers 2 and 5 is performed (step S370). Furthermore, if the main game state number is 6, the process of stopping all main game state number 6 is performed (step S371), and if the main game state number is 7, the process of stopping all main game state number 7 is performed (step S372).

In the main game state number 0 full stop process in step S365 of Figure 46, as shown in Figure 48, first, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not (step S391). If the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 or not (step S392). If the condition device group A number is 1, it is further determined whether the BB is not established or not (step S392). If the BB is not established, 6 is saved in the main game state number (step S394), and the main game state number 0 full stop process ends and the system returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the determination in step S392, and if the BB is established in the determination in step S393, 0 is saved in the main game state number (step S396), and the main game state number 0 full stop process ends and the system returns. Also, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S391, the system proceeds to step S396, where it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 or not. If the condition device group A number is not 1, the main game state number is set to 2 (step S398), the main game state number 0 full stop process is terminated, and the system returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is 1, the system proceeds to step S397, and the AT entry game termination process is performed.

In this AT entry game termination process, as shown in Figure 49, 0 is saved to the Chance Mode number (step S401), 0 to the Chance Game Count counter (step S402), and 0 to the Chance Cycle Counter (step S403). Then, 0 is saved to the EX Mode number (step S404), 0 to the AT Cycle Counter (step S405), and 0 to the Drawn Flag (step S406). Furthermore, 3 is saved to the Main Game State number (step S407), and the Advantageous Section Lamp is turned on (step S408).

Next, as shown in Figure 50, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are lined up and stopped on the upper line in the display window W (step S409). If they are lined up and stopped, the process proceeds to step S410; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are lined up and stopped on the active line 29 in the display window W. If they are lined up and stopped, the process proceeds to step S410; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are lined up and stopped on the lower line in the display window W. If they are lined up and stopped, the process proceeds to step S410; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S414. In step S414, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are lined up and stopped on the downward sloping line in the display window W. If they are lined up and stopped, the process proceeds to step S410; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S415. In step S415, it is determined whether three "red seven" symbols are lined up and stopped on the upward-sloping line within the display window W. If they are lined up and stopped, the process proceeds to step S410; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S416.

If the process proceeds to step S410 (when three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row within the display window W), 1 is saved in the all-stop weight number, and 0 is saved in the standby performance number (step S411), and the process proceeds to step S418 in Figure 49. On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S416 (when three "red seven" symbols are not displayed in a row within the display window W), 0 is saved in the all-stop weight number, and 1 is saved in the standby performance number (step S417), and the process proceeds to step S418 in Figure 49. In step S418, it is determined whether the seven number is 2 or not. If the seven number is not 2, the AT entry game termination process is terminated and the process returns. If the seven number is 2, 2 is added to the standby performance number (step S419), and the AT entry game termination process is terminated and the process returns. Upon returning from the AT entry game termination process, the main game state number 0 all-stop process in Figure 48 is also terminated and the process returns.

In step S366 of Figure 46, during the complete stop processing for main game state number 1, as shown in Figure 51(A), the chance game counter is decremented by 1 (step S431), and it is determined whether the game is a BB operation termination game (a game in which the BB game operation ends) or not (step S432). If it is not a BB operation termination game, the process proceeds directly to step S435. If it is a BB operation termination game, 0 is stored in the chance game counter (step S433), the chance cycle counter is decremented by 1 (step S434), and the process proceeds to step S435. In step S435, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0. If the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the chance game counter is 0 (step S436), and if the value of the chance game counter is 0, it is further determined whether the value of the chance cycle counter is 0 (step S437). If the value of the chance cycle counter is 0, a chance mode 3 lottery is performed (step S438), and then a chance mode number determination process is carried out (step S439).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 or not (step S441). If the chance mode number is not 4, 1 is saved in the advantageous section counter (step S441), and the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and the system returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4, the AT win processing is performed (step S445), then 2 is saved in the main game state number (step S448), and the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and the system returns. Meanwhile, if the value of the chance game counter is not 0 in the determination in step S436, and the value of the chance cycle counter is not 0 in the determination in step S437, the system proceeds to step S442, and it is determined whether the type 1 BB win flag is 0 or not. If the type 1 BB win flag is 0, the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and the system returns. In response to this, if the flag indicating a Type 1 BB win is not 0, it is determined whether the Type 1 BB activation symbol is hidden or not (step S443). If the Type 1 BB activation symbol is hidden, 6 is saved to the main game state number (step S444). If the Type 1 BB activation symbol is not hidden, the process of stopping all operations in main game state number 1 is terminated and the system returns.

Furthermore, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S435, the process proceeds to step S446 to determine whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. If the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the value 2 is saved to the main game state number (step S448), and the main game state number 1 all-stop process is terminated and the system returns. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the AT entry game termination process is performed (step S447), and then the main game state number 1 all-stop process is terminated and the system returns.

In step S367 of Figure 46, during the process of stopping all main game states 2 and 5, as shown in Figure 51(B), it is determined whether the flag for the type 1 BB win is 0 (step S421). If the flag for the type 1 BB win is 0, the process continues as is. If the flag for the type 1 BB win is not 0, the AT entry game termination process is performed (step S422), and then the process of stopping all main game states 2 and 5 is terminated and the system returns.

In step S368 of Figure 46, during the main game state number 3 complete shutdown process, as shown in Figure 52, it is first determined whether the value of the bell count counter is 0 (step S451). If the value of the bell count counter is not 0, the main game state number 3 complete shutdown process is terminated and the system returns. If the value of the bell count counter is 0, the system proceeds to step S452.
The process proceeds to determine whether the Seven number is 1. If the Seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S452 to determine whether the value of the Seven counter is 0. If the value of the Seven counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S454 to determine whether the value of the cumulative counter is less than 2001. If the value of the cumulative counter is less than 2001, the process determines whether the value of the arrival flag is 0 (step S455). If the value of the arrival flag is 0, an AT mode rewrite lottery is performed (step S456). Next, the process determines whether the lottery result is 0 (step S457). If the lottery result is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S459. If the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved to the AT mode number (step S458), and then the process proceeds to step S459.

In step S459, an AT cycle lottery is performed, and the result of the lottery is saved to the AT cycle counter (step S460). Next, a Seven Table 1 lottery is performed (step S462), and the result of the lottery is stored in the Seven Table number (step S463). Then, an AT cycle preferential game count lottery process is performed (step S464), after which 0 is saved to the AT winning flag (step S465), 0 is saved to the Seven number (step S466), and 0 is saved to the Seven counter (step S467). Next, 0 is saved to the gold Seven counter (step S468), 0 is saved to the Seven Set counter (step S469), and 0 is saved to the Loop number (step S470). Subsequently, 0 is saved to the CU rank number (step S471), 0 is saved to the arrival flag (step S472), and 0 is saved to the bonus mode number (step S473). Furthermore, 0 is saved to the bell count counter (step S474) and 0 is saved to the total acquisition counter (step S475). Then, save 7 as the main game state number (step S476), save 2 as the all-stop wait number (step S477), and complete the all-stop processing for main game state number 3 and return.

On the other hand, if the Seven number is not 1 as determined in step S452, and if the Seven counter is not 0 as determined in step S453, the process proceeds to step S481 in Figure 53, where it is determined whether the value of the Seven set counter is 7. If the value of the Seven set counter is not 7, the process proceeds directly to step S484. If the value of the Seven set counter is 7, 15 is stored in the Seven table number (step S482), then 0 is stored in the Seven set counter (step S483), and the process proceeds to step S484. In step S484, the Loop CU rank set process is performed, and then it is determined whether the Seven number is 1 (step S485). If the Seven number is not 1, it is determined whether the value of the Gold Seven Counter is 0 (step S487), 1 is stored in the Seven number (step S488), and the process proceeds to step S489. Conversely, if the Seven number is 1, the value of the Seven counter is deducted by 1 (step S488), and the process proceeds to step S489.

In step S489, it is determined whether the value of the Seven Counter is 0. If the value of the Seven Counter is 0, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 (step S490). If the arrival flag is 0, the Seven Loop drawing process (step S491) and the arrival flag processing (step S492) are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S493. On the other hand, if the value of the Seven Counter is not 0 in the determination in step S489, and if the arrival flag is not 0 in the determination in step S490, the process proceeds directly to step S493. Also, if the value of the Gold Seven Counter is not 0 in the determination in step S487, the process proceeds to step S495, where it is determined whether the value of the Gold Seven Counter is 3. If the value of the Gold Seven Counter is not 3, the process proceeds directly to step S497. If the value of the Gold Seven Counter is 3, the value 3 is saved in the standby performance number (step S496), and then the process proceeds to step S497. In step S497, the value of the Gold Seven Counter is deducted by 1, and then the Gold Seven Loop lottery process is executed (step S498), after which the process proceeds to step S493.

In step S493, a bonus mode lottery is performed, and the result is saved to the bonus mode number (step S494). Then, the process proceeds to step S501 in Figure 54, where the correction counter processing is performed. Next, a bell count switching lottery is performed (step S502), and it is determined whether the result is 0 or not (step S503). If the result of the bell count switching lottery is 0, a bell count 2 lottery is performed (step S504), the result is saved to the bell count counter (step S505), and the process proceeds to step S508. If the result of the bell count switching lottery is not 0, a bell count 3 lottery is performed (step S506), the result is saved to the bell count counter (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, the bell count counter correction process is performed, followed by the arrival flag processing (step S509). Next, 3 is saved to the lever weight number (step S510), and it is determined whether the standby performance number is 0 or not (step S511). If the standby performance number is 0, 1 is saved to the standby performance number (step S512), and the process proceeds to step S477 in Figure 54. On the other hand, if the standby performance number is not 0, the process proceeds directly to step S477. Then, 2 is saved to the all-stop weight number, the main game state number 3 all-stop processing is completed, and the process returns.

In step S369 of Figure 46, during the complete stop processing for main game state number 4, as shown in Figure 55, the value of the AT cycle preferential game count counter is deducted by 1 (step S521), and it is determined whether the game is a BB activation termination game (step S522). If the game is not a BB activation termination game, the process proceeds directly to step S525. If the game is a BB activation termination game, 0 is stored in the AT cycle preferential game count counter (step S523), the value of the AT cycle counter is further deducted by 1 (step S524), and the process proceeds to step S525. In step S525, it is determined whether the AT win flag is 0. If the AT win flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the AT cycle counter is 0 (step S526), and if the value of the AT cycle counter is also 0, a draw for the second draw is performed (step S527). Then, it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S528). If the lottery result is 0, 1 is saved in the advantageous section clear counter (step S529), and the main game state number 4 full stop process is terminated and the system returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the AT cycle counter is not 0 as determined in step S526, the process proceeds to step S534 to determine whether the Type 1 BB win flag is 0. If the Type 1 BB win flag is 0, the process for stopping all main game state numbers 4 is terminated and the system returns. Conversely, if the Type 1 BB win flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S535 to determine whether a BB has not occurred. If a BB has not occurred, the process for stopping all main game state numbers 4 is terminated and the system returns. If a BB has occurred, the system saves 7 to the main game state number (step S536), then terminates the process for stopping all main game state numbers 4 and returns.

Furthermore, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S525, the process proceeds to step S531 to determine whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. If the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S532, where the AT entry game termination process is performed, the main game state number 4 all-stop process is terminated, and the system returns. Conversely, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S533, where 5 is saved to the main game state number, the main game state number 4 all-stop process is terminated, and the system returns. Additionally, if the result of the draw-back 2 lottery is not 0 in the determination in step S528, the process proceeds to step S530, where the AT winning process is performed, then 5 is saved to the main game state number (step S533), the main game state number 4 all-stop process is terminated, and the system returns.

In step S371 of Figure 46, the process of stopping all main game state numbers 6 is performed. As shown in Figure 56(A), it is determined whether or not a Big Bonus (BB) has been achieved (step S541). If a BB has not been achieved, the process of stopping all main game state numbers 6 is terminated and the system returns. If a BB has been achieved, 1 is saved to the main game state number (step S542), and then the process of stopping all main game state numbers 6 is terminated and the system returns.

In step S372 of Figure 46, during the full stop processing for main game state number 7, it is determined whether or not a Big Bonus (BB) has been achieved (step S551), as shown in Figure 56(B). If a BB has not been achieved, the full stop processing for main game state number 7 is terminated and the system returns. If a BB has been achieved, the system saves 4 to the main game state number (step S552), then terminates the full stop processing for main game state number 6 and returns.

After executing one of the full game stop processes for main game state numbers 0 to 7 shown in steps S365 to S372 of Figure 46, the process proceeds to step S373 of Figure 46. Here, 0 is saved as the instruction number, the section type number management game termination process is completed, and the system returns. Upon returning from the section type number management game termination process, the system proceeds to step S8 of Figure 30(B) to perform the advantageous section clear counter management process.

In the advantageous section clear counter management process, as shown in Figure 57, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is deducted by 1 (step S561), and it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter was 0 before the deduction (step S562). If the value of the advantageous section clear counter was not 0 before the deduction, the process proceeds to step S565, where it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter became 0 as a result of the deduction. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter became 0 as a result of the deduction, the process proceeds directly to step S566. Conversely, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0 after the deduction, the process proceeds to step S567, where it is determined whether the re-play activation symbol was displayed in the game. If the re-play activation symbol was displayed, the process proceeds directly to step S569. If it was not displayed, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game tokens paid out in the game is added to the net increase counter (step S568), and then the process proceeds to step S569.

In step S569, it is determined whether the net increase counter value is 2401 or greater. If the net increase counter value is less than 2401, the process proceeds to step S566. If it is 2401 or greater, the advantageous section clear counter management process ends and the system returns. In step S566, 0 is stored in all memory areas that store data values affecting the performance of the instruction function, and the process proceeds to step S563. On the other hand, if the advantageous section clear counter value is 0 before the current subtraction, as determined in step S562, the process proceeds directly to step S563. In step S563, it is determined whether the section type number is 0. If the section type number is 0, the advantageous section clear counter management process ends and the system returns. Conversely, if the section type number is not 0, 1500 is stored in the advantageous section clear counter (step S564), and then the advantageous section clear counter management process ends and the system returns.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to Figure 58. In this embodiment, processing such as reading each game operation signal output in response to game operations such as betting operations performed by the player, detecting (checking) the signal level, sending each control command, and controlling the reel drive is performed by timer interrupt processing which is carried out at predetermined fixed intervals (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt processing, as shown in Figure 58, first, an interrupt initial processing (save registers, disable interrupts, etc.) is performed (step MT11), and then it is determined whether or not a power outage has been detected (step MT12). If a power outage has been detected, power outage processing is performed (step MT25). In power outage processing, registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved,
The interrupt state is saved, etc. In addition, information regarding the role determination result and game state (including information regarding AT) stored in a designated memory area is retained, and checksum calculation and storage are also performed.

On the other hand, if no power outage is detected, the interrupt counter value is updated (subtracted by "1") (step MT13), and then timer measurement is performed (step MT14). This timer measurement involves subtracting or adding the timer value of any timer set in the game progress control process described above. Next, the input ports are read (step MT15). This input port reading involves reading and storing the signal levels of each game operation signal input to the input ports, and determining the signal levels.

Next, reel drive control processing is performed to control the driving of reels 3a to 3c (acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc.) (step MT16). This reel drive control processing involves updating the reel drive pulse output counter value, which indicates the timing for switching the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor, according to the reel drive state (stopped, reel rotation standby, accelerating, constant speed, deceleration, etc.), and acquiring, updating, and outputting reel drive pulse data to drive the stepping motor. In the next step, MT17, it is determined whether the reel drive control processing has been performed for all reels. If not, the process returns to step MT16 and the reel drive control processing is performed again. If it has been performed for all reels, port output processing is performed to generate excitation outputs for the reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. (step MT18), and then control command transmission processing is performed to send the control commands stored in the control command buffer (CB) (step MT19).

Next, the process proceeds to step MT20, where the external signal data stored in the predetermined memory area is read and the external signal is output. Then, an LED display is performed on the indicator lamps (step MT21). For example, the payout indicator lamp 46j displays the following: If no error (excluding E-series errors) occurs, it displays a payout number of "0-9" based on the number of game tokens dispensed, or a numerical value of "1-6" based on the set value. Furthermore, when indicating the order of button presses, it displays the instruction number in the format "=1" to "=6". If an error (excluding E-series errors) occurs, an error display is performed based on the error number value.

Next, the process proceeds to step MT22 for error management. This error management begins with an error check. This check determines whether an H0 error, CE error, CP error, CH error, C0 error, C1 error, E6 error, or E7 error has occurred. Furthermore, if an E6 or E7 error occurs, the payout indicator lamp 46j displays an error, and the game is stopped. Note that if an E-series error occurs, error recovery is possible if the setting change processing described above is executed. After this error check, if an error has occurred, the system performs an error detection output request set to send error information to the sub-control means 200. After executing this error management process, the system updates the random numbers used for determining roles, etc. (step MT23), then performs interrupt recovery processing (register recovery, interrupt enablement, etc.) (step MT24), and finally returns via interrupt.

<LED substrates and light-emitting components>
Next, referring mainly to Figures 59 to 66, we will explain the LED substrates and light-emitting components used in each of the display lamps shown in Figure 1 (first display lamp 12, second display lamps 13a, 13b, third display lamps 14a, 14b, fourth display lamps 16a, 16b, decorative lamps 32a, 32b). Note that the applications of the LED substrates and light-emitting components described below are not limited to the display lamps of slot machine 1.

(Component surface shape of LED substrate and configuration of light-emitting components)
The LED board 310 shown in Figure 59 is an example of an LED board used in the first indicator lamp 12 of slot machine 1. Similarly, the LED boards 320 and 330 shown in Figure 59 are examples of LED boards used in the fourth indicator lamps 16a and 16b of slot machine SM, respectively. The LED boards 310, 320, and 330 are arranged around the display unit (in this case, the display screen 11a) that players often focus on while playing.

The component surfaces 311 of LED substrate 310, 321 of LED substrate 320, and 331 of LED substrate 330 are each formed in a curved shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the component surface 311 of LED substrate 310 has an overall curved shape at its upper edge 312a and lower edge 312b, the component surface 321 of LED substrate 320 has a shape that curves to the right as it extends upwards, and the component surface 331 of LED substrate 330 has a shape that curves to the left as it extends upwards. It should be noted that the curved shape of the component surfaces is not limited to the shapes of component surfaces 311, 321, and 331 described above. For example, an LED substrate with a curved component surface is one in which a bent portion 303 or curved portion 304 is formed on a part of the side edge of its component surface 302, as shown in Figure 60(A), or one in which the component surface 307 is bent at one or more positions overall, as shown in Figure 60(B) of LED substrate 306.

Multiple light-emitting components 340 (some numbered) are mounted on the component side 311 of LED substrate 310, the component side 311 of LED substrate 320, and the component side 331 of LED substrate 330, respectively. As shown in Figure 61, the light-emitting component 340 is a surface-mount type PLCC (with molded frame) LED device, comprising a rectangular parallelepiped-shaped lamp housing (molding frame) 341, a lead frame (electrode) 342 provided in the lamp housing 341, and three light-emitting elements installed in a cylindrical recess 343 formed in the lamp housing 341. The three light-emitting elements consist of a red LED element 344R, a green LED element 344G, and a blue LED element 344B, and are connected to the lead frame 342 by bonding wires (not shown). Resin is injected into the recess 343 of the lamp housing 341 to seal the three light-emitting elements.

In the light-emitting component 340, as shown in Figure 61, three light-emitting elements (red LED element 344R, green LED element 344G, and blue LED element 344B) are arranged in an equilateral triangle, and are arranged clockwise from the red LED element 344R, in the order of blue LED element 344B, green LED element 344G. In this way, the relative positions of the three light-emitting elements are defined. However, the arrangement of the three light-emitting elements is not limited to this. For example, as shown in the light-emitting component 340A in Figure 62(A), the three light-emitting elements (red LED element 344R, green LED element 344G, and blue LED element 344B) may be arranged in a straight line, or as shown in the light-emitting component 340B in Figure 62(B), the three light-emitting elements (red LED element 344R, green LED element 344G, and blue LED element 344B) may be arranged in an L-shape. Furthermore, the arrangement of the red LED element 344R, the green LED element 344G, and the blue LED element 344B may differ from the illustrated example (for example, an arrangement where the positions of the red LED element 344R and the green LED element 344G are swapped, or an arrangement where the positions of the green LED element 344G and the blue LED element 344B are swapped, etc.).

Here, we have used a surface-mount type PLCC LED device as an example, but other types of LED devices may also be used, such as surface-mount type PCB (printed board) LED devices or pin-insertion type (vertical) LED devices. Furthermore, in addition to the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements that constitute the three primary colors of light, LED devices equipped with light-emitting elements of other colors (for example, white or yellow) may also be used.

(Installation orientation of light-emitting components and orientation of red LED elements)
Each light-emitting component 340 mounted on the component side 311 of the LED board 310 is installed in the same orientation. Similarly, each light-emitting component 340 mounted on the component side 321 of the LED board 320 is installed in the same orientation, and each light-emitting component 340 mounted on the component side 331 of the LED board 330 is installed in the same orientation. Specifically, on the component side 311 of the LED board 310, which is positioned above the display screen 11a, as shown in Figure 63(A), each light-emitting component 340 is installed in the same orientation with the red LED element 344R facing downwards (towards the display screen 11a) (an orientation in which the red LED element 344R is biased towards the display screen 11a). The four arrows in Figure 63(A) indicate the up, down, left, and right directions relative to the component side 311 when the LED board 310 is installed in the slot machine SM.

Furthermore, on the component side 321 of the LED board 320 located to the left of the display screen 11a, as shown in Figure 63(B), each light-emitting component 340 is installed in the same orientation with the red LED element 344R facing to the right (towards the display screen 11a) (an orientation in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a). In addition, on the component side 331 of the LED board 330 located to the right of the display screen 11a, as shown in Figure 63(C), each light-emitting component 340 is installed in the orientation with the red LED element 344R facing to the left (towards the display screen 11a) (an orientation in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a). The four arrows in Figure 63(B) indicate the up, down, left, and right directions relative to the component surface 321 when the LED board 320 is installed in the slot machine SM, and the four arrows in Figure 63(C) indicate the up, down, left, and right directions relative to the component surface 331 when the LED board 330 is installed in the slot machine SM.

In this way, by aligning each light-emitting component mounted on the component side of a single LED board to the same orientation, the way each component illuminates can be made uniform, thereby enhancing the lighting effect provided by each component. Conversely, if the orientations of the light-emitting components mounted on the component side of a single LED board are inconsistent, when all components are illuminated simultaneously in the same color, variations in illumination may occur, potentially reducing the overall effect. While it is preferable to align all light-emitting components mounted on the component side of a single LED board to the same orientation, some components may be positioned in different orientations. Ideally, 70% or 80% or more of the light-emitting components on the component side of a single LED board should be positioned in the same orientation; however, a reasonable effect can be achieved if 50% or more of the components are positioned in the same orientation. This also applies to the effect of the orientation of the red LED element 344R, which will be explained below.

Furthermore, as described above, by positioning each light-emitting component 340 so that the red LED element 344R is biased towards the display screen 11a, the following effects can be obtained. Specifically, the red light emitted by the red LED element 344R has a longer wavelength than green or blue light and is more easily accessible to the human eye. Also, red is a color that attracts attention and is conspicuous. On the other hand, the display screen 11a is often the focus of a player's attention during gameplay. Therefore, by positioning each light-emitting component 340 so that the red LED element 344R faces the display screen 11a, the red light is more easily absorbed by the eyes of the player viewing the display screen 11a. This creates a visually intensified effect, enhancing the lighting effect.

In the light-emitting component 340, the orientation in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a preferably refers to the orientation in which the red LED element 344R is located closest to the display screen 11a than the green LED element 344G and the blue LED element 344B (as shown in Figures 63(A) to (C)), but is not limited to this. For example, consider the case where the light-emitting component 340 is installed in the orientation shown in Figure 64(A). In this case, the display screen 11a is located to the right. In this orientation, the green LED element 344G is located to the right (closer to the display screen 11a) than the red LED element 344R. However, if we set a virtual line L11 that divides the light-emitting component 340 in the left-right direction, the red LED element 344R is located in the region to the right of this virtual line L11, and in that respect, it can be said to be facing toward the display screen 11a. Therefore, the orientation of the light-emitting component 340 is such that the red LED element 344R is biased towards the display screen 11a (to the right).

Furthermore, consider the case where the light-emitting component 340 is installed in the orientation shown in Figure 64(B). In this case, the display screen 11a is assumed to be positioned below. In this orientation, the blue LED element 344B is located lower (closer to the display screen 11a) than the red LED element 344R. However, if we define a virtual line L12 that divides the light-emitting component 340 vertically, the red LED element 344R is located in the region below this virtual line L11, and in that respect, it can be said to be facing the display screen 11a. Therefore, even in this orientation of the light-emitting component 340, we assume that the red LED element 344R is biased towards the display screen 11a (downward).

(Installation density of light-emitting components)
As shown in Figure 59, the component side 311 of the LED substrate 310 is divided into two regions: region AR1 and region AR2. Region AR1 is located lower down and closer to the display screen 11a than region AR2. Region AR1, which is relatively closer to the display screen 11a (for example, the distance from the center of the display screen 11a), is set to have a higher installation density (number of components per unit area) of light-emitting components 340 than region AR2, which is relatively farther away from the display screen 11a. In other words, each light-emitting component 340 is installed such that the arrangement pitch (distance between adjacent light-emitting components 340) in region AR1 is shorter than the arrangement pitch of multiple light-emitting components 340 in region AR2.

Thus, by setting a higher installation density of the light-emitting components 340 in region AR1, which is relatively closer to the display screen 11a than region AR2, which is relatively farther away from the display screen 11a, the following effects can be obtained. Specifically, by increasing the installation density of the light-emitting components 340 in region AR1, the light intensity per unit area from each light-emitting component 340 in region AR1 can be increased. Furthermore, since region AR1 is closer to the display screen 11a than region AR2, the light from the light-emitting components 340 in region AR1 is more easily seen by the player viewing the display screen 11a. Therefore, by increasing the light intensity per unit area from each light-emitting component 340 in region AR1, it becomes possible to enhance the lighting effect.

The installation density of the light-emitting components 340 is configured similarly for the component surface 321 of the LED substrate 320 and the component surface 331 of the LED substrate 330, and the same effect can be obtained. That is, as shown in Figure 59, the component surface 321 of the LED substrate 320 is divided into five regions, from region AR11 to region R15. Region AR11 is located to the right, closer to the display screen 11a than region AR12, and the installation density of light-emitting components 340 is set higher in region AR11 than in region AR12. Region AR14 is located diagonally to the lower right, closer to the display screen 11a than region AR15, and region AR13 is located diagonally to the lower right, closer to the display screen 11a than region AR14. The installation density of light-emitting components 340 is higher in region AR14 than in region AR15, and higher in region AR13 than in region AR14.
The value is set higher.

Similarly, the component side 331 of the LED substrate 330 is divided into five regions: regions AR21 to R25. Region AR21 is located to the left, closer to the display screen 11a than region AR22, and the installation density of light-emitting components 340 is set higher in region AR21 than in region AR22. Region AR24 is located to the lower left, closer to the display screen 11a than region AR25, and region AR13 is located to the lower left, closer to the display screen 11a than region AR14. The installation density of light-emitting components 340 is set higher in region AR24 than in region AR25, and higher in region AR23 than in region AR24.

(Red LED elements should not be in close proximity to each other)
On the component side 311 of the LED substrate 310, the component side 321 of the LED substrate 320, and the component side 331 of the LED substrate 330, each light-emitting component 340 is arranged such that the red LED elements 344R are not in close proximity to each other. Here, the state in which the red LED elements 344R are not in close proximity means that, on the component side of one LED substrate, the two light-emitting components are arranged such that a non-red LED element (green LED element 344G or blue LED element 344B) is located between the red LED element 344R of one of the two closest light-emitting components. This point will be explained in detail below.

For example, in region AR1 of component surface 311, two light-emitting components 340 that are closest to each other in the left-right direction are arranged as shown in Figure 65(A). In this case, between the red LED element 344R of the left light-emitting component 340 and the red LED element 344R of the right light-emitting component 340 (more specifically, within the area between the two red LED elements 344R and within the vertical width of the two light-emitting components 340 (the rectangular area enclosed by the dashed-dot line in the figure)), the green LED element 344G of the left light-emitting component 340 and the blue LED element 344B of the right light-emitting component 340 are located. Therefore, the two light-emitting components 340 are arranged so that their respective red LED elements 344R are not in close proximity to each other.

As another example, in region AR11 of component surface 321, two light-emitting components 340 that are closest to each other in the vertical direction are arranged as shown in Figure 65(B). In this case, between the red LED element 344R of the upper light-emitting component 340 and the red LED element 344R of the lower light-emitting component 340 (more specifically, within the area between the two red LED elements 344R and within the width of the two light-emitting components 340 in the horizontal direction (the rectangular area enclosed by the dashed-dot line in the figure)), the blue LED element 344B of the upper light-emitting component 340 and the green LED element 344G of the lower light-emitting component 340 are located. Therefore, the two light-emitting components 340 are arranged so that their respective red LED elements 344R are not in close proximity to each other.

Furthermore, on the component side of a single LED substrate, if there are no LED elements of a color other than red between the red LED element 344R of one of the two closest light-emitting components and the red LED element 344R of the other light-emitting component, then those two light-emitting components are positioned with their respective red LED elements 344R in close proximity to each other.

For example, consider the case where two light-emitting components 340 are positioned closest to each other in the left-right direction on the component side of a single LED substrate, as shown in Figure 66(A). In this case, neither a green LED element 344G nor a blue LED element 344B is located between the red LED element 344R of the left light-emitting component 340 and the red LED element 344R of the right light-emitting component 340 (the area between the two red LED elements 344R and within the vertical width of the two light-emitting components 340 (the rectangular area enclosed by the dashed line in the figure)). Therefore, these two light-emitting components 340 are positioned so that their respective red LED elements 344R are in close proximity to each other.

Furthermore, another light-emitting component 340 may be placed between the two light-emitting components 340 arranged as shown in Figure 66(A), for example, in the configuration shown in Figure 66(B). In that case, the green LED element 344G and blue LED element 344B of the lower light-emitting component 340 will be located between the red LED element 344R of the left light-emitting component 340 and the red LED element 344R of the right light-emitting component 340 (within the rectangular area enclosed by the dashed-dot line in the figure). Therefore, the situation where the red LED elements 344R are positioned too close to each other is eliminated.

As described above, by arranging the light-emitting components 340 so that the red LED elements 344R are not in close proximity to each other, the following effects can be obtained. That is, as previously mentioned, the red color emitted by the red LED elements 344R is a conspicuous color that attracts human attention. Therefore, if the red LED elements 344R are in close proximity to each other, the red color may become uneven in those close areas, potentially causing visual color unevenness. By ensuring that the red LED elements 344R are not in close proximity to each other, the unevenness of the red color can be eliminated, resulting in a more uniform color and thus enhancing the lighting effect.

Furthermore, on the component side of a single LED substrate, it is preferable that all light-emitting components mounted there are positioned so that their respective red LED elements are not in close proximity to each other. However, some light-emitting components may be positioned so that their respective red LED elements are in close proximity to each other. It is preferable that 70% or 80% or more of the light-emitting components on the component side of a single LED substrate are positioned so that their respective red LED elements are not in close proximity to each other. However, a certain level of effectiveness can be achieved if 50% or more of the light-emitting components are positioned so that their respective red LED elements are not in close proximity to each other.

Here, we have described the characteristic configuration of the LED boards, such as the shape of the LED boards and the arrangement of the mounted light-emitting components, using the LED board 310 used in the first display lamp 12 and the LED boards 320 and 330 used in the fourth display lamps 16a and 16b, respectively, in a slot machine SM as examples. However, this is not limited to these examples, and the above characteristic configuration can be applied to any LED board and light-emitting component. Furthermore, the above-described characteristic configuration of LED boards and light-emitting components can also be applied to any LED board and light-emitting component in a pachinko game machine PM.

Furthermore, while the display screen 11a in the slot machine SM was described here as an example of a display unit, it is not limited to this. For example, the display window W or the lower panel cover 31 may also be used as a display unit. Alternatively, the area where a specific character is displayed may also be used as a display unit. Examples of display units in a pachinko game machine PM include the game area PA, the performance image display unit provided within the game area PA, or the area where a specific character is displayed.

The LED circuit boards and light-emitting components described above are applicable not only to slot machines but also to the display and decorative lamps in pachinko machines. An example of a pachinko machine to which these components can be applied is shown below.

<Overview of the configuration of a Pachinko game machine (PM)>
Figures 67 and 68 show a schematic configuration of a pachinko game machine PM to which the above-described LED substrate and light-emitting components can be applied. For convenience, in the following explanation, the directions indicated by the arrows in Figure 67 will be referred to as the front-back direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction, respectively. As shown in Figure 67, the pachinko game machine PM is configured such that a front frame 402, which is a rectangular frame in size to match the opening front of an outer frame 401 that forms a vertically oriented fixed holding frame, can be opened and closed and attached and detached by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 403 arranged on the left front edges of each other. The front frame 402 is normally kept in a closed state, engaged and connected to the outer frame 401, using a locking device 404 called a double lock provided on the right front edge.

A rectangular glass frame 405, shaped to fit the upper front area of the front frame 402, is assembled to the front frame 402 using upper and lower hinge mechanisms 403, allowing it to open and close horizontally and be detached. A locking device 404 keeps it closed, covering the front of the front frame 402. The game board 410 is detachably set and held within the front frame 402, and the game area PA in front of the game board 410 is visible through the double-glazed glass 405a of the glass frame 405, which is normally kept closed.

The lower part of the glass frame 405 is provided with upper and lower ball trays (upper ball tray 406a and lower ball tray 406b) for storing game balls. A launch handle 407 for launching game balls is provided on the front right side of the lower ball tray 406b. The front side of the glass frame 405 is provided with an illuminated lamp 408 having a light-emitting element such as a light-emitting diode (LED), and a speaker 409 that generates sound effects according to the game's progress.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted in Figure 67, the game board 410 uses a decorative panel as its base, which is formed by attaching cells printed with predetermined patterns to a rectangular laminated plywood that has been processed using a router or similar method. A roughly circular game area PA is formed, surrounded by upper and lower rail decorations. The game area PA is equipped with numerous game pins, a windmill, a central decoration, a display unit that shows predetermined images according to the progress of the game, and various prize winning slots (all not shown). At the lower end of the game area PA, an outlet (not shown) is formed, penetrating the game board 410 from front to back, for discharging game balls that have fallen without entering the prize winning slots to the back side.

As shown in Figure 68, a rear set plate 430, which is based on a rectangular frame body that is somewhat smaller than the front frame 402 and has a central window connecting the front and rear, is connected to the rear of the front frame 402 via upper and lower hinge mechanisms 403, allowing it to open and close horizontally and be attached and detached. A rear set cover 430C, which is a rectangular box-shaped rear set cover with an open front, is detachably attached to this rear set plate 430 and is normally positioned to cover the back side of the game board 410 attached to the front frame 402.

Each part of the reverse set board 430 is provided with a ball storage tank 431 for storing numerous game balls, a tank rail 432 extending from the ball storage tank 431 to the right with a gentle downward slope, a ball supply passage member 433 connected to the right end of the tank rail 432 and extending downward, a prize ball dispensing unit 434 for dispensing game balls guided by the ball supply passage member 433, and a prize ball passage member 435 for guiding the game balls dispensed from the prize ball dispensing unit 434 to the upper ball tray 406.

On the back of the game board 410, a main control board case unit CU1, which has a main control board (not shown) that comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko game machine PM, and an effect control board case unit CU2, which has an effect control board (not shown) that controls all effects such as image display, effect lighting, and sound effects according to the game progression, are mounted so as to be covered by a back set cover 430C. On the back of the back set board 430, a payout control board case unit CU3, which has a payout control board (not shown) that controls the launching and payout of game balls, and a power supply board case unit CU4, which has a power supply board (not shown) that receives power from the game facility and supplies power to various control boards and electrical/electronic components are mounted. These control boards and the electrical/electronic components of each part of the pachinko game machine PM are connected by harnesses (connector cables) so that the pachinko game machine PM can be operated.

The pachinko game machine PM has its outer frame 401 fixedly installed on the game island (installation frame) of the game facility. The front frame 402, glass frame 405, etc., are closed and locked when the machine is put into play. Gameplay begins by storing game balls in the upper ball tray 406a and rotating the launch handle 407. When the launch handle 407 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 406a are fed one by one to the launch mechanism by a ball feeding mechanism located on the back side of the glass frame 405. The launch mechanism then launches the balls into the game area PA, and the pachinko game proceeds from there.

<Circuit board case unit>
Next, with reference to Figures 69 to 77, the circuit board case unit 500 shown in these figures will be described. For convenience, in the following description, this circuit board case unit 500 will be described as corresponding to the main control circuit board case unit CU1 of the pachinko game machine PM (see Figure 68), but it is not limited to this. Also, in the following description, for the sake of explanation, the directions of front, back, left, right, up, and down are defined based on the state in Figure 69 as the direction when it is installed on the pachinko game machine PM, and the directions of the arrows shown in Figure 69 will be referred to as front, back, left, right, up, and down, respectively.

The main control board case unit 500 is primarily composed of, for example, a main control board 510, which serves as the central control mechanism in a pachinko game machine (PM), and a roughly rectangular container-shaped board case 560 that houses the main control board 510.

The main control board 510 is constructed using a rectangular printed circuit board as its substrate. As shown in Figure 70, the CPU 520, setting change unit 530, setting value display monitor 540, performance display monitor 550, and multiple connectors (only connectors CN1 to CN5 are numbered in the figure) are mounted on its component side (also referred to as the "mounting side") 511. Although not shown in detail, electronic devices such as ROM and RAM, as well as electronic and electrical components such as resistors, are also mounted on this component side 511. The CPU 520 is positioned on the component side 511 such that its long side aligns with the long side direction of the main control board 510 (the left-right direction in Figure 69). The main control board 510 has screw insertion holes 512a to 512d at its four corners, and is fixed to the inner surface of the board case 560 (the top case 565 described later) by screws (see screw 513 shown in Figure 77) inserted through each of the screw insertion holes 512a to 512d.

As shown in Figure 70, the setting change unit 530 is configured to include a setting key type switch 531 and a setting change switch 536. The setting key type switch 531 is a switch operated to confirm and change the setting value that determines the degree of advantage for the player, for example, the degree (rank) of the probability of winning in a predetermined win/fail lottery that affects the payout rate, such as the lottery for winning special symbols. The setting change switch 536 is a switch for changing the setting value in multiple stages (six stages in this embodiment). The setting key type switch 531 has a setting change key cylinder 532 into which a setting change key (not shown) held by a game store employee can be inserted and rotated, and the setting key type switch 531 is configured to be switched by rotating this setting change key cylinder 532. The setting change switch 536 has a setting change button 537 that is pressed by a game store employee, and is configured to be switched by pressing this setting change button 537. The setting change unit 530 (setting key type switch 531, setting change switch 536) may be provided on a separate board other than the main control board 510, or on a part other than a board.

The setting change unit 530 starts the setting change mode (a mode in which the setting value can be changed) when power is supplied while the main control board 510 is not powered, the setting change key is inserted into the setting change key cylinder 532 and rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the rear (also referred to as the "setting change key operation direction"), and the setting change switch 536 is in the ON state (the setting change button 537 is pressed). In this setting change mode, each time the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) is pressed, the setting value is switched in one of six steps from 1 to 6, and the switched setting value is displayed on the setting value display monitor 540. When the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting value is confirmed, the setting change mode ends, and the system transitions to the normal mode (a mode in which the game can be played and the setting value display monitor 540 is not lit). In addition to the above conditions, the front frame 402 must be open relative to the outer frame 401 (also referred to as the "front frame open state") as a condition for activating the setting change mode. Furthermore, if the front frame is not open, the system may be prevented from transitioning from the setting change mode to the normal mode. Upon transitioning from the setting change mode to the normal mode, a setting change sound indicating completion of the setting change will be output from a designated speaker.

Furthermore, the setting change switch 536 in the setting change unit 600 is configured to also function as a RAM clear switch. That is, when the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) is pressed and the power is turned on to start the setting change mode, the main control board 510 clears at least the information related to the game state (information such as normal state, probability change state, time-saving state, latent probability change state, etc.) from all the information stored in the RAM. At this time, the setting value is updated to the setting value that results in the lowest payout rate (for example, setting 1). Alternatively, instead of using the setting change switch 536 as a RAM clear switch, a separate dedicated RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) may be provided. In this case, the setting change mode may be activated when power is supplied while the dedicated RAM clear switch is in the ON state. Alternatively, the system may be configured to have only one setting value (for example, setting 1). In this case, pressing the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) will not update the setting value (for example, it will remain unchanged at setting 1).

Furthermore, when the setting change unit 530 is powered off from the main control board 510, and the setting change key is inserted into the setting change key cylinder 532 and rotated approximately 90 degrees in the direction of the setting change key operation (while the setting change switch 536 is in the off state), if power is supplied, it starts the setting confirmation mode (a mode that allows confirmation of the setting value) and displays the current setting value on the setting value display monitor 540. When the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting confirmation mode ends and the system returns to normal mode. In addition to the above conditions, the front frame must be open as a condition for activating the setting confirmation mode. In the Pachinko game machine PM, even if the setting change key cylinder 532 is rotated by the setting change key after power is supplied, and the setting key type switch 531 is turned ON, the system does not transition to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display monitor 540.

The circuit board case 560 comprises a bottom case 561 that is detachably attached to the back of the game board 20, and a top case 565 that is detachably attached to the bottom case 561. An engagement and connecting mechanism 570 is provided on the right edge of the case, which aligns front to back when the top case 565 is attached to the bottom case 561 in the closed state. The bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are combined and integrated in the closed state with their openings facing each other. Both the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are formed using a colorless, transparent resin material (e.g., polycarbonate) by molding or other molding means, and are configured so that the inside of the circuit board case 560 can be seen from the outside.

The bottom case 561 is formed as a rectangular box shape with an open rear, and the top case 565 is formed as a rectangular box shape with an open front. The top case 565 is configured to slide onto the bottom case 561 in the left-right direction. That is, by slightly shifting the top case 565 to the left of the bottom case 561 and combining the two cases 561 and 565 facing each other in the front-rear direction, and then sliding the top case 565 to the right (hereinafter also referred to as the "closing direction"), the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 can be integrated in a closed state with their openings facing each other. On the other hand, the integrated cases 561 and 565 can be separated by sliding the top case 565 a predetermined distance to the left (hereinafter also referred to as the "opening direction") relative to the bottom case 561.

The engagement and connection mechanism 570 further engages and connects the integrated bottom case 561 and top case 565 using a crimping member 575, thereby restricting the top case 565 from sliding in the opening direction relative to the bottom case 561. Specifically, the engagement and connection mechanism 570 comprises a bottom-side locking portion 571 (see Figure 71) provided on the right edge of the bottom case 561, a top-side locking portion 573 (see Figure 72) provided on the right edge of the top case 565, and a crimping member 575 (see Figure 69) for engaging and connecting the bottom-side locking portion 571 and the top-side locking portion 573.

The bottom-side locking portion 571 has a bottom-side locking hole (not shown) that opens towards the rear, and the top-side locking portion 573 has upper and lower top-side locking holes 573a (see Figure 69) formed through the front and back at positions aligned front to back with the bottom-side locking hole. The crimping member 575 has a shaft portion 575a extending front to back, an operating portion 575b formed in the shape of a disc with a larger diameter than the shaft portion 575a, and a cylindrical locking pin 575c provided in a pin housing hole (not shown) recessed in the shaft portion 575b and supported to move freely in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the shaft portion 575a. The locking pin 575c is biased so that its tip protrudes outward from the shaft portion 575a by the repulsive force of a spring (not shown) provided in the pin housing hole.

In the engagement and coupling mechanism 570 with this configuration, when the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 are integrated in the closed state, the bottom-side locking portion 571 and the top-side locking portion 573 overlap and face each other front to back. In this state, by inserting the shaft portion 575a of the crimping member 575 across the bottom-side locking hole and the top-side locking hole 573a, the crimping member 575 engages and connects with the bottom-side locking portion 571 and the top-side locking portion 573, making the top case 565 in the closed state inaccessible (unopenable) from the bottom case 561.

The top case 565 has connector insertion/removal openings (not shown) that penetrate from both sides, corresponding to the mounting positions of each connector (including connectors CN1 to CN5) of the main control board 510. When the main control board 510 is mounted on the top case 565, each connector of the main control board 510 is exposed to the outside through the connector insertion/removal openings (see Figure 69), allowing for electrical connection to the performance control board, image control board, payout control board, etc., via harnesses (connector cables).

Furthermore, the top case 565 has a setting change section corresponding opening (not shown) that penetrates from front to back, corresponding to the mounting position of the setting change section 530 (setting key type switch 531 and setting change switch 536) of the main control board 510. When the main control board 510 is attached to the top case 565, the setting change section 530 is exposed to the outside through the setting change section corresponding opening (see Figure 69). The top case 565 is also equipped with a small door 567 (see Figure 72) that covers the setting change section 530 facing rearward from the setting change section corresponding opening, and is swingable open and closed (not shown in Figure 69). When operating the setting change section 530 (setting key type switch 531 and setting change switch 536), this small door 567 is swung upward to expose the setting change section 530.

As described above, the circuit board case unit 500, which houses the main control board 510 within the circuit board case 560, is mounted on the rear side of the game board 420 with the bottom case 561 facing forward and the top case 565 facing rear. When the circuit board case unit 500 is mounted on the rear side of the game board 420, the right edge of the circuit board case 560 (the side edge of the circuit board case 560 on which the engagement coupling mechanism 570 is provided) is located on the side of the open end edge of the front frame 402 (the side edge of the front frame 402 on which the hinge mechanisms 403a and 403b are provided, opposite to the side edge on which the front frame 402 opens).

(Differences in the configuration of 7-segment LEDs)
As shown in Figure 73, the above-mentioned setting value display monitor 540 consists of a single-digit LED indicator light (7-segment LED with dots) 541. This LED indicator light 541 consists of seven rod-shaped LED segments arranged in a figure-eight shape and one dot-shaped LED segment formed in a dot-point shape. Each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 is configured to light up in red, and is also configured to appear red even when not lit (off). For example, a red-lit LED element is used as the light-emitting element of each LED segment, and the cover member (lamp cover) and diffusion sheet covering the LED element are made of a red translucent material.

It should be noted that the red color of an LED segment when it is lit and the red color of an LED segment when it is not lit are not necessarily the same color. Specifically, for example, when representing a color using a 256-level RGB color system, if the red color of an LED segment when it is lit is (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0), then the red color of an LED segment when it is not lit is not necessarily (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0). For example, in the case of a color where the R component is "200" or more and the G and B components are "100" or less, specific examples include (R, G, B) = (237, 26, 61) and (R, G, B) = (241, 91, 91), which are also included in the color red. The color of an LED segment when it is not lit is the color when the LED segment is illuminated with white light (including the light from indoor lighting in amusement parlors, etc.). To take into account the precise differences in color, in the following explanation, the color of the LED segment when lit will be referred to as "red," and the color of the LED segment when not lit will also be referred to as "reddish color."

Figure 73(A) shows the case where all LED segments of the LED indicator light 541 are not lit, and Figure 73(B) shows the case where all LED segments of the LED indicator light 541 are lit. Figure 73(C) shows the lit/unlit states of each LED segment when the LED indicator light 541 displays the number "6". For convenience, these figures show the lit LED segments in black (actual color is red) and the unlit LED segments in gray (actual color is reddish) to distinguish between the two. Red is a conspicuous color that attracts human attention and has high visibility. Therefore, by configuring each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 to light up in red, the visibility of the LED indicator light 541 when lit is improved. Furthermore, the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 is configured so that each LED segment appears red (reddish) even when unlit, thus maintaining high visibility and making it easily noticeable even when unlit.

On the other hand, the performance display monitor 550, as shown in Figure 74, is composed of four-digit LED indicator lights (seven-segment LEDs with dots) 551 to 554. Each digit LED indicator light 5
LEDs 51-554 consist of seven bar-shaped LED segments arranged in a figure-eight pattern and one dot-shaped LED segment. Each LED indicator light 551-554 can display numbers from 0 to 9, alphabet characters, hyphens, etc., by selectively lighting up its eight LED segments. The upper two digit LED indicator lights 551 and 552 display, for example, an identification symbol (e.g., "bL.") to identify the type of game performance data for the pachinko machine PM. On the other hand, the lower two digit LED indicator lights 553 and 554 display a numerical value (calculated value "00" to "99") indicating the calculation result of the game performance data. Furthermore, each LED indicator light 551-554 flashes when the number of samples of its counting data (cumulative number of balls played) has not reached a predetermined number, and lights up when the number of samples has reached the predetermined number. Furthermore, each of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 is configured to blink all LED segments, including dot-shaped LED segments, for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the time the power is turned on. This is provided as a test pattern to make it possible to visually confirm whether all LED segments are capable of lighting up. The blinking display is performed in a pattern that alternates between lighting and turning off at predetermined time intervals (for example, an error of 0.3 seconds ± 10%; a time within the range of 0.297 seconds to 0.33 seconds), depending on the interval at which interrupt processing is executed.

Each LED segment of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 in the performance display monitor 550 is configured to light up in red (for example, (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0)), and to appear white when not lit (off). For example, a red-lit LED element is used as the light-emitting element of each LED segment, and the cover member (lamp cover) and diffusion sheet covering the LED element are made of a white-colored translucent material. White-based colors basically refer to achromatic colors that contain R, G, and B components in equal and uniform proportions, such as white with (R, G, B) = (255, 255, 255) or milky white with (R, G, B) = (243, 243, 243), and are relatively bright (for example, lightness of 7 or higher). However, colors in which the proportions of R, G, and B components differ by about 10%, such as (R, G, B) = (250, 240, 230), are also included in the white-based color category. Red is a conspicuous color that attracts people's attention and has high visibility. Therefore, by configuring each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 to light up in red, it is possible to improve the visibility of each LED indicator light 551 to 554 when lit. On the other hand, white-based colors are less conspicuous than red (red-based colors) and have low visibility. Therefore, the setting value display monitor 540, which is configured so that each LED segment of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 appears white when not lit, has low visibility and is inconspicuous when not lit.

Figure 74(A) shows the case where all LED segments of LED indicator lights 551-554 are not illuminated, and Figure 74(B) shows the case where all LED segments of LED indicator lights 551-554 are illuminated. Figure 74(C) shows the illuminated/unilluminated state of each LED segment when LED indicator lights 551-554 display "bL.53". For convenience, in these figures, illuminated LED segments are shown in black (actual color is red), and unilluminated LED segments are shown in white (actual color is a whitish color) to distinguish between the two.

Both the LED indicator lights 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 and the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 light up red (or flash red) when illuminated, so both are equally highly visible and noticeable when not illuminated. On the other hand, the LED segments of the LED indicator lights 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 are configured to appear reddish even when not illuminated, while the LED segments of the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 are configured to appear white when not illuminated, making it easier to distinguish between the two when not illuminated. In addition, the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may flash when illuminated, so the fact that each LED segment is configured to appear white when not illuminated and red when illuminated makes it easier to distinguish between LED segments that flash intermittently and LED segments that are off. In contrast, the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 does not flash when illuminated.

Furthermore, the LED segments of the LED indicator lights 541 on the setting value display monitor 540 may be made of white-colored translucent material so that they appear white when not lit, making them relatively inconspicuous. Conversely, the LED segments of the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 on the performance display monitor 550 may be made of red-colored translucent material so that they appear red when not lit, making them relatively conspicuous. In this case, the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 on the performance display monitor 550 will be easier to see than the LED indicator light 541 on the setting value display monitor 540 when not lit. Also, since the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 on the performance display monitor 550 light up and blink more often than the LED indicator light 541 on the setting value display monitor 540, the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 (LED elements) on the performance display monitor 550 are more prone to deterioration over time. However, even if the luminous intensity of the LED indicator lights 551-554 decreases due to aging or other factors, and the degree of redness weakens, this can be compensated for by the reddish color of the cover material or other components on each LED segment. Furthermore, both the LED segments of the LED indicator light 541 on the setting value display monitor 540 and the LED segments of the LED indicator lights 551-554 on the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to appear reddish or white when not illuminated.

The setting value display monitor 540 remains unlit when powered on under predetermined conditions, whereas the performance display monitor 550 transitions from unlit to lit or blinking even when powered on under the same predetermined conditions. The predetermined conditions for powering on refer to a state where power is turned on without any special processing or operation, such as when the setting key type switch 531 of the setting change unit 530 is not rotated (also referred to as "normal power-on"), or when the power is turned on while the power is off due to an error and the setting key type switch 531 is not rotated (in this case, the error state occurs after power-on). However, in the case of an error state that cannot be recovered, by transitioning from unlit to lit or blinking when powered on under predetermined conditions, the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550, which are inconspicuous when unlit, can be made immediately noticeable after power-on. Furthermore, the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to light up or blink even when an error is occurring or during setting changes. However, the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to turn off when an error occurs that cannot be recovered from.

Furthermore, the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 is larger than the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 (see Figure 70), making it more visible and conspicuous than the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550. Alternatively, the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 and the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to be of the same size, or the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to be larger than the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540. Also, the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 and/or the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured as 7-segment LEDs without dots.

Here, the differences in the configuration of LED indicator lights (7-segment LEDs) were explained using the setting value display monitor 540 and the performance display monitor 550 in the pachinko game machine PM as examples. However, the explanation is not limited to these examples, and it is possible to apply the above-described differences in configuration to any different 7-segment LEDs used. Furthermore, the above-described differences in the configuration of 7-segment LEDs can also be applied to multiple LED indicator lights used in the slot machine 1. For example, the main control board 60 of the slot machine 1 may be provided with a display monitor with a configuration similar to the performance display monitor 550 (for example, a prize ratio display monitor that displays the prize ratio) and a setting value display monitor with a configuration similar to the setting value display monitor 540, and these display monitors may be given the above-described differences in the configuration of 7-segment LEDs. In addition, the above-described differences in the configuration of 7-segment LEDs may be applied to the stored coin count display lamp 46h and the payout count display lamp 46j.

(Colored crimping component)
As described above, an engagement and coupling mechanism 570 is provided on the right edge of the substrate case 560 (see Figure 69), and a crimping member 575 is positioned on the engagement and coupling mechanism 570. In this embodiment, this crimping member 575 is made of a colored member (a member with a color). A colored member refers to a member whose surface has been painted or plated with a color, or a member formed from a colored material. Any material such as resin, wood, or metal can be used to form the colored member. Note that "colored" means any state with a color, excluding the colorless and transparent state, and includes achromatic colors such as white, gray, and black. If it is colored, it may be transparent (colored transparent) or opaque.

By making the crimping member 575 a colored material, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the circuit board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, if one tries to look inside the circuit board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in Figure 72 through the right edge of the circuit board case 560, the line of sight is obstructed by the colored crimping member 575, making it difficult to see inside the circuit board case 560. Therefore, for example, even if one opens the front frame 402 slightly and looks inside the pachinko game machine PM from the open end edge, it becomes difficult to see inside the circuit board case 560 through the right edge of the circuit board case 560, thus making it more difficult to perform fraudulent acts against the circuit board case 560. Furthermore, the removal and/or installation of the circuit board case unit 500 from the rear of the game board 420 (for example, a bracket member provided on the rear of the game board 420 to hold the circuit board case unit 500 (not shown)) may be configured to be performed from a side edge other than the right edge of the circuit board case 560 (the upper side edge, left side edge, or lower side edge), or it may be configured to be performed from the right edge side of the circuit board case 560.

As shown in Figure 72, the crimping member 575 is configured such that the diameter (diameter dimension) D of the shaft portion 575a of the crimping member 575 is longer than the width dimension W of the short side (vertical direction of the CPU 520 in Figure 72). Furthermore, when the component surface 511 of the main control board 510 is used as the reference plane for height (position in the front-to-back direction in Figure 69), as shown in Figure 75, the height H12 of the crimping member 575 from the component surface 511 is higher than the height H11 of the CPU 520 from the component surface 511. In addition, as shown in Figure 72, the lower of the two crimping members 575 and the CPU 520 mounted on the main control board 510 are positioned in a linear fashion in the left-to-right direction (on the same imaginary straight line extending in the left-to-right direction). In other words, when viewing the circuit board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in Figure 72, the CPU 520 is positioned so that it is hidden behind the crimping member 575. Therefore, if one were to slightly open the front frame 402 and peer into the pachinko machine PM through its open edge, attempting to view the inside of the circuit board case 560 through its right edge, the CPU 520 would be hidden behind the crimping member 575 and not visible. Consequently, fraudulent activities targeting the CPU 520 inside the circuit board case 560 are significantly reduced.

Here, a crimping member 575 was used as an example of a colored member installed on the circuit board case unit 500, but the explanation is not limited to this, and the same effect can be obtained by placing any colored member other than a crimping member on the right edge of the circuit board case 560. For example, a test connector mounted on the main control board 510 for electrical connection to the test device side during type testing of a pachinko game machine PM may be made of a colored member, and this test connector and the CPU 520 may be placed in a position where they are aligned linearly in the left-right direction on the component surface 511 (for example, the position between the CPU 520 and the crimping member 575 in Figure 72). In this case, it is preferable that the width dimension of the test connector (the vertical width dimension in Figure 69) is longer than the width dimension W of the short side of the CPU 520, and that the height of the test connector from the component surface 511 of the main control board 510 is greater than the height of the CPU 520 from the component surface 511. As a result, when attempting to look inside the circuit board case 560 through the right edge of the circuit board case 560, the CPU 520 is hidden behind the test connector and difficult to see.

Furthermore, the colored material described above may also be provided on the side edges of the circuit board case 560 other than the right edge (the upper, left, and lower edges). For example, if the colored material is placed on the upper edge of the circuit board case 560 when the circuit board case unit 500 is attached to the rear side of the game board 420, when someone tries to look inside the circuit board case 560 from above through the upper edge, the colored material will obstruct their line of sight, making it difficult to see inside the circuit board case 560. Similar effects can be obtained by placing the colored material on the left or lower edge of the circuit board case 560.

(Step at the side edge of the circuit board case)
As shown in Figures 69 and 72, a stepped portion 580 is provided on the right edge of the substrate case 560. This stepped portion 580 is integrally formed with the top case 565 and, as shown in Figure 76, has three stepped portions: a first stepped portion 581, a second stepped portion 582, and a third stepped portion 583, a first wall portion 584 connecting the first stepped portion 581 and the second stepped portion 582, a second wall portion 585 connecting the second stepped portion 582 and the third stepped portion 583, and a third wall portion 586. Figure 76(A) schematically shows the stepped portion 580 as viewed from the direction of arrow L in Figure 72, and Figures 76(B) and (C) schematically show the stepped portion 580 as viewed from the direction of arrow K in Figure 72.

By providing such a stepped portion 580 on the right edge of the circuit board case 560, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the circuit board case unit 500 is attached to the rear side of the game board 420, if one attempts to look inside the circuit board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in Figure 72, the view inside the circuit board case 560 will be divided or distorted by the stepped portion 580 (mainly the second and third steps 582 and 583), thus reducing visibility inside the circuit board case 560. Therefore, for example, even if one slightly opens the front frame 402 and looks inside the pachinko game machine PM from its open edge, it becomes difficult to see inside the circuit board case 560 through the right edge (stepped portion 580), making it harder for fraudulent activity to occur against the circuit board case 560.

Furthermore, a colored component as described above may be placed on the stepped portion 580. For example, a test connector as described above may be placed on the stepped portion 580. By placing a colored component on the stepped portion 580, when looking into the circuit board case 560 through the right edge of the circuit board case 560, not only is the view inside the circuit board case 560 divided or distorted by the stepped portion 580, but the line of sight is also obstructed by the colored component, making it difficult to see inside the circuit board case 560. This further reduces the visibility inside the circuit board case 560.

Here, we have explained using the example of providing a stepped portion 580 on the right edge of the circuit board case 560, but the stepped portion described above may also be provided on side edges other than the right edge of the circuit board case 560 (upper side edge, left side edge, or lower side edge). For example, if a stepped portion is provided on the lower side edge of the circuit board case 560 when the circuit board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, when someone tries to look inside the circuit board case 560 from below through the lower side edge of the circuit board case 560, the view inside the circuit board case 560 will be divided or distorted by the stepped portion, making it difficult to see inside the circuit board case 560. The same effect can be obtained if the stepped portion is directed towards the left side edge or upper side edge of the circuit board case 560.

The stepped portion 580 described above is formed in the top case 565, but it may also be formed by the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 (for example, the stepped portion may be formed at the boundary between the bottom case 561 and the top case 565). Alternatively, the stepped portion may be formed by the engaging coupling mechanism 570 and the circuit board case 560 (for example, the stepped portion may be formed at the boundary between the coupling mechanism 570 and the circuit board case 560), or by the bracket member provided on the back of the game board 420 and the circuit board case 560 (for example, the stepped portion may be formed at the boundary between the bracket member and the circuit board case 560).

(Colored sealing material)
As shown in Figures 69 and 72, a sealing member SL may be attached to the stepped portion 580 described above. This sealing member SL is made of a strip-shaped colored sheet-like material and is attached to the right edge of the substrate case 560 along the stepped portion 580, as shown in Figure 76(C). A colored sheet-like material refers to a material formed in a sheet shape with a colored coating or printing applied to its surface, or a material formed in a sheet shape from a colored material. Any material such as resin, paper, or metal foil can be used to form the colored sheet-like material. As mentioned above, "colored" means any colored state, excluding the colorless and transparent state, and includes achromatic colors such as white, gray, and black. If it is colored, it may be transparent (colored transparent) or opaque. The sealing member SL can be any sealing member, such as a sealing sticker indicating that the substrate case has been sealed, or an identification sticker on which a one-dimensional or two-dimensional code (identifier) representing predetermined information is written.

By attaching the colored sealing member SL to the stepped portion 580 (the right edge of the circuit board case 560), the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the circuit board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, if one tries to look inside the circuit board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in Figure 72 through the right edge of the circuit board case 560, the line of sight is obstructed by the colored sealing member SL, making it difficult to see inside the circuit board case 560. Therefore, for example, even if one opens the front frame 402 slightly and looks inside the pachinko game machine PM from the open end edge, it becomes difficult to see inside the circuit board case 560 through the right edge of the circuit board case 560, thus making it more difficult to perform fraudulent acts against the circuit board case 560. Furthermore, by providing the sealing member SL on the stepped portion 580, the synergistic effect between the sealing member SL and the stepped portion 580 provides an excellent effect of more effectively reducing visibility inside the substrate case 560. However, the sealing member SL may also be attached to the portion of the right edge of the substrate case 560 where the stepped portion 580 is not formed.

Furthermore, the colored sealing material (sheet-like material) described above may be provided on the side edges of the circuit board case 560 other than the right edge (upper edge, left edge, and lower edge). For example, if the colored sealing material is placed on the upper edge of the circuit board case 560 when the circuit board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, when someone tries to look inside the circuit board case 560 from above through the upper edge, the line of sight will be obstructed by the colored sealing material, making it difficult to see inside the circuit board case 560. Similar effects can be obtained by placing the colored sealing material on the left edge or lower edge of the circuit board case 560.

(Screws and connectors for mounting the circuit board)
As described above, the main control board 510 has screw insertion holes 512a to 512d at its four corners, as shown in Figure 70, and is fixed to the inner surface of the top case 565 by screws inserted through each of the screw insertion holes 512a to 512d. Figure 77 shows the relationship between a screw 513 inserted through a screw insertion hole 512b and connector CN3. Connector CN3 is the connector located closest to the screw insertion hole 512b among all the connectors mounted on the component side 511 of the main control board 510.

As shown in Figure 77, a cylindrical screw receiving portion 566, perpendicular to the component surface 511, is integrally formed with the top case 565 on its inner surface (the surface facing the component surface 511). The screw 513, inserted through the screw insertion hole 512b from the solder side 515 of the main control board 510 towards the component surface 511, is mounted so as to screw into the inner circumferential surface of the screw receiving portion 566 and enter the interior of the screw receiving portion 566, thereby fixing the main control board 510 to the top case 565.

As shown in Figure 77, with the main control board 510 fixed to the top case 565 (with the screws 513 fixed to the screw receiving portion 566 via the main control board 510), the height of the screws 513 from the component surface 511 (the length of the portion of the screws 513 protruding from the component surface 511) is defined as H1. Furthermore, the height of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3 from the component surface 511 is defined as H2, and the height of the connector CN3 from the component surface 511 (the height of the housing surrounding each terminal pin PN) is defined as H3. In this configuration, the height H1 of the screws 513 is higher than the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3, and lower than the height H3 of the connector CN3.

By setting the height H1 of the screw 513, the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3, and the height H3 of the connector CN3 in this way, the following effect can be obtained. That is, when the circuit board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, if an attempt is made to insert a fraudulent tool (for example, a rod-shaped tool) into the circuit board case 560 in order to perform fraudulent activity against the main control board 510, the height H1 of the screw 513 is higher than the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3. Therefore, the screw 513 can block the fraudulent tool from contacting or impacting the terminal pins PN.

On the other hand, if an unauthorized device is inserted into the circuit board case 560 and an impact is applied to damage the screw 513, the height H3 of the connector CN3 is higher than the height H1 of the screw 513. Therefore, the connector CN3 can block the unauthorized device from applying impact to the screw 513, or the connector CN3 can mitigate the impact. As a result, it becomes difficult for the screw 513 (and the screw receiving portion 566) to be destroyed and the main control board 510 to be removed.

Here, we have explained the case where the height of screw 513 and connector CN3 is set from the component surface 511 as described above. However, the height can also be set in the same manner for any screw used to fix the main control board 510, or any connector placed near that screw, and similar effects can be obtained.

The characteristic configuration of the circuit board case unit 500 (circuit board case 560 and main control board 510) described above can be similarly applied to other components in the pachinko game machine PM besides the main control board case unit CU1, such as the performance control board case unit CU2, the payout control board case unit CU3, and the power supply board case unit CU4, and the same effects can be obtained. Furthermore, the same can be applied to the main control board case unit 160 and the sub-control board case unit in the slot machine 1, and the same effects can be obtained.

[Second Embodiment]
The following describes the slot machine according to the second embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "second form slot machine"), with additional reference to Figures 78 to 102. The following mainly describes the features of the second form slot machine. The features described below are not limited to the second form slot machine and can be combined with other embodiments. Note that the second form slot machine shares or is similar in basic configuration to the first embodiment slot machine 1 described above, and therefore their descriptions will be omitted. Furthermore, the control processes such as the role determination process and reel control process described in slot machine 1 can be applied to the second form slot machine in the same way, or with some modifications to the processing content.

The following describes the characteristic configuration of the slot machine in this embodiment.
≪Basic Specifications≫
<Effective line>
In this embodiment of the slot machine, there is only one winning line that forms a V-shape (inverted V-shape) connecting the lower part of the left reel 3a, the middle part of the middle reel 3b, and the lower part of the right reel 3c. When a predetermined number of tokens are inserted, this winning line becomes an active line. The predetermined number varies depending on the type of game; it is 2 tokens during the CB game (described later) and 3 tokens for all other games.

<Pattern arrangement>
In this embodiment, 20 symbols are arranged on each of the reels 3a to 3c as shown in Figure 78 (in Figure 78, "left reel,""middlereel," and "right reel" refer to reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively). The types of symbols arranged on each of the reels 3a to 3c are nine types: "red seven,""blueseven,""bar,""replay,""blank,""bell,""medal,""watermelonA," and "watermelon B." The arrows shown in Figure 78 indicate the direction in which the symbols on each reel scroll within the display window W when the reels 3a to 3c are rotating during gameplay (except during freeze effects).

<Types of winning combinations and symbol combinations>
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations that, when displayed on the winning line in each reel 3a to 3c, grant the player a special bonus are set as shown in Figures 79 to 82. Here, Figure 79(a) shows the bonus symbol combination, Figure 79(b) shows the replay symbol combination, and Figures 80 to 82 show the minor win symbol combination.

(Bonus symbol combinations)
In this embodiment, three groups of symbol combinations, Type 2 BB01 to BB03, are defined. The Type 2 BB01 symbol combination group consists of four symbol combinations, while the Type 2 BB02 and BB03 symbol combination groups each consist of eight symbol combinations. In each of the Type 2 BB01 to BB03 symbol combination groups, even if the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are stopped at any timing, the reel stop control ensures that one of these symbol combinations is always displayed on the winning line. In other words, each of the Type 2 BB01 to BB03 symbol combination groups has a 100% probability of being drawn in by reel control (PB=1), and no misses occur.

In this embodiment, when a bonus symbol combination aligns on the winning line, a Type 2 BB game begins in the next game. During the Type 2 BB game, a Challenge Bonus (CB) game, which ends after one game, is executed continuously. In this embodiment, the symbol combination that initiates the CB game is predetermined, and during the Type 2 BB game, a new CB game is initiated in the next game after one CB game has finished. The CB game requires that at least one reel be stopped within 75 milliseconds after the corresponding stop switch is operated. In this embodiment, the right reel is controlled to stop within 75 milliseconds. The Type 2 BB game ends when the total payout of medals from the continuously executed CB games exceeds 11.

(Symbol combinations for replay)
As shown in Figure 79(b), there are eight types of symbol combinations or groups of symbol combinations designated for replays, namely replays 01 to 08. Of these, the symbol combination groups for replays 03 to 05 each consist of two symbol combinations. Additionally, the symbol combination for replay 06 includes a combination in which the "Red Seven" symbol aligns on the horizontal line in the middle row, the symbol combination for replay 07 includes a combination in which the "Blue Seven" symbol aligns on the horizontal line in the middle row, and the symbol combination for replay 08 includes a combination in which the "Bar" symbol aligns on the horizontal line in the middle row.

(Combinations of symbols for minor roles)
As shown in Figures 80 to 82, there are 142 types of symbol combinations or groups of symbol combinations for winning combinations, numbered 001 to 142. In this embodiment, the number of medals paid out in games other than the two types of BB games (see column "A" in the "Number of medals paid out" column in Figures 80 to 82) is different from the number of medals paid out in the two types of BB games (in other words, CB games) (see column "B" in the "Number of medals paid out" column).

In games other than the two types of Big Bonus (BB) games, the combination of symbols that pays out the most medals is Win 001, Win 002, and Win 142, which pays out 12 medals. For convenience, these combinations are also referred to as the 12-medal combination. In addition, the combinations of symbols that pay out 3 medals are Win 003, 004, Win 072, 073, and Win 130-141, which are also referred to as the 3-medal combination. All other minor winning combinations pay out 1 medal, and these combinations are also referred to as the 1-medal combination. In CB games, the number of medals dispensed is either 2 or 1. Two medals are dispensed for winning combinations 001-004, 039, 040, 043-046, 049, 050, 059, 064, 068, 069, 072-074, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 111, and 130-0142. All other winning combinations dispense one medal.

<Types of Conditioning Devices and Reel Stop Control When Conditioning Devices are Operated>
Next, with reference to Figures 83 to 89, the condition device numbers in this embodiment and the corresponding types of condition devices will be explained. Figure 83(a) shows the correspondence between the bonus condition device number and the name and designation of the bonus condition device, and the two types of BB symbol combinations associated with each bonus condition device. Figure 83(b) shows the correspondence between the prize re-play condition device number and the name and designation of the re-play condition device, and the re-play symbol combinations associated with each re-play condition device.

Figures 84 to 89 show the correspondence between the prize-winning re-play condition device number (simply referred to as "number" in the figures) and the name and designation of the prize-winning condition device, as well as the symbol combinations of small wins associated with each prize-winning condition device. In the "Reel Control" column of Figures 84 to 89, the notation "1**" means that the first stop operation is the left stop switch 26a, and the second and third stop operations are any stop switch. The notation "2**" means that the first stop operation is the middle stop switch 26b, and the second and third stop operations are any stop switch. The notation "3**" means that the first stop operation is the right stop switch 26c, and the second and third stop operations are any stop switch. Furthermore, "123," "132," "213," "231," "312," and "321" correspond to the following button press sequences: "Left-Center-Right," "Left-Right-Center," "Center-Left-Right," "Center-Right-Left," "Center-Right-Left," and "Right-Center-Left," respectively.

(Condition mechanism related to bonuses)
As shown in Figure 83(a), this embodiment has only one bonus condition device, named Type 2 BB, and is assigned bonus condition device number 1. Bonus condition device number 0 indicates that it does not correspond to any bonus condition device. The Type 2 BB condition device of bonus condition device number 1 is associated with the set of symbol combinations Type 2 BB01 to 03 shown in Figure 79(a).

(Condition device for replaying)
As shown in Figure 83(b), there are three replay condition devices: Replay-A to C. The winning replay condition device number for Replay-A is 1, and it is associated with the symbol combinations of Replay 01 to 08 shown in Figure 79(b). The winning replay condition device number for Replay-B is 2, and it is associated with the symbol combinations of Replay 02 to 08. The winning replay condition device number for Replay-C is 3, and it is associated with the symbol combinations of Replay 01 to 05. Furthermore, when Replay-A or B condition device is activated according to the result of the internal lottery, if the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are stopped in the order of right → middle → left (reverse push), reel stop control is performed so that one of the symbol combinations of Replay 06 to 08 is matched. As a result, depending on the timing of the stopping operation, the "Red Seven,""BlueSeven," or "Bar" symbols may line up on the middle horizontal line.

(Conditions for winning an award)
As shown in Figures 84 to 89, there are 94 condition devices related to winning prizes: Prize-A to F, G1 to G24, H1 to H24, I1 to I12, J1 to J12, K1 to K12, L, and Prize-ALL, ALL + Replay A, ALL + Replay B, and ALL + Replay C. These condition devices are assigned prize-replay condition device numbers 4 to 98. The prize-A to E condition devices (prize-replay condition device numbers 4 to 8) are also called "rare role condition devices," and if these condition devices are activated based on the results of the internal lottery, it means that a rare role has been won. If the prize-F condition device (prize-replay condition device number 9) is activated, regardless of the order in which stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed, the reels are stopped to align the symbol combination of a 3-coin win (prize 03 or 04).

When the condition device for the two types of Big Bonuses (BB) is activated (i.e., during the bonus round), if the condition device for winning a prize - G1 to G24 (winning prize re-play condition device numbers 10 to 33) is activated, the reel stop control will be performed so that the "medal" symbol aligns on either the upper horizontal line, the middle horizontal line, or the lower horizontal line (see the "Notes" column in Figures 84 and 85) only if the stop operation is performed using one specific sequence of the six possible stop switch presses. This prevents the alignment of the symbol combinations for the two types of BBs (01 to 03). This "specific press sequence" is the sequence that aligns the symbol combination of winning prize 69 for the condition devices for winning prizes - G1 to G8, the symbol combination of winning prize 70 for the condition devices for winning prizes - G9 to G16, and the symbol combination of winning prize 71 for the condition devices for winning prizes - G17 to G24.

When the condition device for type 2 BB is activated, if the condition device for winning - H1 to H24 (winning re-play condition device numbers 34 to 57) is activated, the reel stop control will be performed so that the "medal" symbol is lined up on either the upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, or lower horizontal line (see the remarks column in Figures 85 to 87), but only if the stop operation is performed using one specific sequence of presses out of the six possible stop switch presses. This prevents the combination of symbols for type 2 BB 01 to 03 from being matched. This "specific button press sequence" is the sequence that results in the following combinations of symbols: 74 (winning combination) for conditions H1-H4; 75 (winning combination) for conditions H5-H8; 76 (winning combination) for conditions H9-H12; 77 (winning combination) for conditions H13-H16; 78 (winning combination) for conditions H17-H20; and 79 (winning combination) for conditions H21-H24.

When the condition device for the two types of Big Bonus (BB) is activated, and the condition devices for winning prizes - I1 to I12 (winning prize re-play condition device numbers 58 to 69) are activated, the reel stop control will be performed in a way that results in a 3-coin payout (winning prize 03 or 04) only if the stop operation is performed using one specific sequence of presses out of the six possible stop switch sequences (see the "Reel Control" column in Figure 87). Hereafter, the condition devices for winning prizes - I1 to I12 will also be referred to as the "press-sequence 3-coin payout condition device." Furthermore, when the condition device for winning prizes - J1 to J12 (winning prize re-play condition device numbers 70 to 81) is activated while the condition device for the two types of BB is activated, the reel stop control will be performed in a way that results in a 12-coin payout (winning prize 01, 02, or 142) only if the stop operation is performed using one specific sequence of presses out of the six possible stop switch sequences (see the "Reel Control" column in Figure 88).

When the condition device for the two types of Big Bonus (BB) is activated, and the condition device for winning K1 to K12 (winning re-play condition device numbers 82 to 93) is activated, the reel stop control is performed in the same way as when the condition device for winning J1 to J12 is activated. However, if the condition device for the two types of BB is not activated, the reel stop control is performed so that a combination of 12-coin winning symbols (winning 01, 02, or 142) is aligned regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed. Hereinafter, the condition devices for winning J1 to J12 and winning K1 to K12 will also be referred to as the "condition device for the 12-coin winning combination by button press order." When the condition device for winning L (winning re-play condition device number 94) is activated, the reel stop control is performed so that a combination of 12-coin winning symbols (winning 01, 02, or 142) is aligned regardless of the order in which the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed.

The following are condition devices that can be activated during two types of Big Bonus (BB) games (more precisely, during CB games): the Win-ALL condition device (Win-Replay Condition Device No. 95), the Win-ALL + Replay A condition device (Win-Replay Condition Device No. 96), the Win-ALL + Replay B condition device (Win-Replay Condition Device No. 97), and the Win-ALL + Replay C condition device (Win-Replay Condition Device No. 98). In this embodiment, during CB games, an internal lottery is conducted only for the condition devices related to replays (details will be described later), and all condition devices related to winning are activated regardless of the lottery. Therefore, if the internal lottery results in the Replay condition device not being activated during CB games, the Win-ALL condition device will be activated. Also, if the internal lottery results in the Replay A condition device being activated, the Win-ALL + Replay A condition device will be activated. Similarly, if the internal draw results in the activation of the Replay-B condition device, the Win-ALL + Replay-B condition device will be activated. If the Replay-C condition device is activated, the Win-ALL + Replay-C condition device will be activated.

When the "Winning - ALL" condition device is activated and the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are stopped in the order of left, middle, and right (pressed in order), the reel stop control is performed so that the same symbol combination (weak chance combination) as when "Winning - C" is activated alone can be displayed. Conversely, when the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are stopped in the order of right, middle, and left (pressed in reverse order), the reel stop control is performed so that a symbol combination in which the "Bar" symbols line up in a straight line can be displayed.

When the "Winning - ALL + Replay A" condition device is activated, and stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in order, the reel stop control is performed in such a way that the same symbol combination (a symbol combination where the "Medal" symbols line up in a straight line) as when "Winning - A" is activated alone may be displayed (i.e., a weak rare symbol may be displayed). Here, "straight line" refers to the upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, lower horizontal line, upward right line, and downward right line. Conversely, when stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in reverse order, the reel stop control is performed in such a way that a symbol combination where the "Bar" symbols line up in a straight line may be displayed.

When the condition device for winning - ALL + replay B is activated and stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in order, the reel stop control is performed such that the same symbol combination (strong chance symbol A or strong chance symbol B) as when winning - D or E is activated alone may be displayed (i.e., the outcome of a strong rare role may be displayed). In contrast, when stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in reverse order, the reel stop control is performed such that the symbol combination in which the "bar" symbols line up in a straight line may be displayed.

Furthermore, when the condition device for winning - ALL + replay C is activated and stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in order, the reel stop control is performed such that the same symbol combination (strong chance symbol A or strong chance symbol B) as when winning - D or E is activated alone may be displayed (i.e., the outcome of a strong rare role may be displayed). Conversely, when stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in reverse order, the reel stop control is performed such that the "bar" symbol is in a state of "disjointed tenpai" (a state where the symbols are aligned in a straight line) on two of the three reels, but the "bar" symbol on the remaining reel is not aligned.

In the following, the activation of the condition device for winning a prize - ALL or winning a prize - ALL + replay A will be referred to as "winning a weak rare role," and the activation of the condition device for winning a prize - ALL + replay B or winning a prize - ALL + replay C will be referred to as "winning a strong rare role."

<Probability of winning in the internal lottery>
Next, the probability of winning the internal draw performed in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the number tables shown in Figures 90 and 91. The number tables shown in Figures 90 and 91 represent the number of winning numbers assigned to each condition device shown in Figures 83 to 89. In this embodiment, the random number generator corresponding to the random number generator 66 shown in Figure 2 is capable of generating pseudo-random numbers from 0 to 65535 (integer values), so there are 65536 possible random values for the pseudo-random numbers. Therefore, the value obtained by dividing each number of winning numbers shown in the number tables in Figures 90 and 91 by 65536 is the probability that the corresponding condition device will operate (also called the "operation probability" or "winning probability").

Figure 90(a) is a table showing the probability of winning for each condition device in the internal draw when the condition devices for Type 2 BB are not activated (Type 2 BB condition devices are inactive). In this table, the numbers in parentheses indicate the number of units allocated to each corresponding condition device. For example, for prize wins G1 to G24, 64 units are allocated to each condition device.

As shown in Figure 90(a), the condition devices for the two types of Big Bonus (BB) operate together with the condition devices for winning – A to F, G1 to G24, H1 to H24, and I1 to I24. Furthermore, the condition devices for replay – A to C, winning – A to E, G1 to G24, H1 to H24, and J1 to J12 have the same activation probability in settings 1 to 6. Also, when the condition device for the two types of BB is activated, as shown in Figure 90(b), the condition device for the two types of BB does not operate in conjunction with it. The activation probabilities of the condition devices related to replay and winning, excluding the condition device for the two types of BB, are the same as the activation probabilities when the condition device for the two types of BB is not activated. During Type 2 BB gameplay (more precisely, during CB gameplay), all conditional devices related to winning are activated independently of internal抽選 (internal lottery), and only for the replay-A to C conditional devices, an internal lottery is conducted with the same probability as the activation probability of the replay-A to C conditional devices shown in Figure 90(b).

Figures 91(a) and (b) are tables showing the total number of units placed for each type of condition device (Type 2 BB, replay, prize winning). Figure 91(a) is the table showing the number of units placed when the Type 2 BB condition device is not activated, and Figure 91(b) is the table showing the number of units placed when the Type 2 BB condition device is activated (including during CB gameplay). As shown in these figures, there are no misses in the internal lottery of this embodiment, and the probability of the condition devices related to replay and prize winning activating is the same when Type 2 BB is not activated and when it is activated. Also, as shown in Figure 91(a), the probability of the Type 2 BB condition device activating is highest for setting 1 (36,378 units placed), the same for settings 2 to 5 (36,268 units placed), and lowest for setting 6 (36,218 units placed).

<Transition of game state>
Next, referring to Figure 92, the transitions in the game state of the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, there are five game states: "Normal,""ChanceZone" (hereinafter also referred to as "CZ"), "Sub-Bonus,""ATGame," and "Continuation Chance." All of these game states are game states in the advantageous section as described in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the transition to the normal section as described in the first embodiment occurs when transitioning from "Sub-Bonus" to "Normal," when transitioning from "Continuation Chance" to "Normal," when 1500 games have been played in the advantageous section, and when the net increase in coins in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 coins. Furthermore, if a Type 2 BB game has not been played when transitioning to the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section and "Normal" occurs in the next game. If a Type 2 BB game has been played, the transition to the advantageous section and "Normal" occurs in the game following the end of the Type 2 BB game.

(Transition from "Normal" to "Chance Zone")
In "Normal" mode, if the conditions for winning (G1 to G24) are activated during gameplay and the stop switch is stopped using the aforementioned "specific button sequence," resulting in the alignment of the "medal" symbols, then "1" is added to the value of the CZ transition counter stored in the RWM of the main control board. In this way, the value of the CZ transition counter is increased by "1" each time the "medal" symbols are aligned, and when the value of the CZ transition counter reaches "6," the game state transitions from "Normal" to "Chance Zone."

(Transition from "Chance Zone" to "Normal" or "Sub-Bonus")
When transitioning from "Normal" to "Chance Zone," the number of games that can be played in the "Chance Zone" (CZ game count) is determined by lottery, ranging from 0 to 30 games. During gameplay in the "Chance Zone," a CZ release lottery is held each time the result of the internal lottery is anything other than a loss. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 91, the result of the internal lottery is never a loss, so a CZ release lottery is held each time a game is played. When the number of CZ games determined by lottery in the "Chance Zone" has been played, if the CZ release lottery is not won, the game state transitions from "Chance Zone" to "Normal." If the CZ release lottery is won, the game state transitions from "Chance Zone" to "Sub-Bonus."

Furthermore, during gameplay in the "Chance Zone," if any of the condition devices for winning (I1 to I12) are activated, the player may be notified of the order in which to press the stop switches to win a 3-coin payout. Also, if any of the condition devices for winning (J1 to J12) are activated, the player may be notified of the order in which to press the stop switches to win a 12-coin payout.

(Transition from "Normal" to "Sub-Bonus")
In "normal" mode, when the condition device for the two types of Big Bonus (BB) is activated, if any of the condition devices for winning (G1 to G24 and H1 to H24) are activated, the player is notified of the order in which to press the stop switches that will result in the "medal" symbols lining up or coming together (see the "reel control" column in Figures 84 to 87). When the player stops the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c according to the notified order, the main control means 100 displays the symbol combination that will result in the "medal" symbols lining up or coming together, and performs reel stop control to prevent the two types of BB symbol combinations from lining up on the winning line. A pressing order that results in the "medal" symbols lining up or coming together, and prevents the two types of BB symbol combinations from lining up on the winning line, is called an "avoidance pressing order." The condition devices for winning (G1 to G24 and H1 to H24) are also called "avoidance condition devices."

If the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated in a different order than the avoidance order (any of the five order combinations other than the avoidance order out of the six possible order combinations), the combination of two types of Big Bonus symbols will line up on the winning line, and the two types of Big Bonus game will start from the next game. As mentioned above, in the two types of Big Bonus game, the CB game is executed continuously. In the CB game, if the condition device related to winning is activated by the internal lottery, the main control means 100 performs reel stop control to preferentially stop and display the combination of symbols for small wins that pay out 2 coins on the winning line. As shown in Figure 91(b), the activation probability of the re-play condition device in CB games is approximately 1/7.3 (activating once every 7.3 games), while the activation probability of the prize-winning condition device is approximately 1/1.16 (activating once every 1.16 games). Therefore, the termination condition for the two types of BB games (payout of more than 11 medals in total) will be met in approximately 6 to 7 games.

As described above, the main control means 100 of this embodiment notifies the avoidance button press order when the avoidance condition device is activated in "normal" mode, but does not notify the avoidance button press order in the following cases: (1) when the condition devices for Type 2 BB and the avoidance condition device are activated when the condition devices for Type 2 BB and the avoidance condition device are activated in the normal section when the condition device for Winning B (Watermelon) is activated in the advantageous section and the condition device for Type 2 BB is activated (inside Type 2 BB). Furthermore, if a Type 2 BB game is started due to the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c being stopped in a button press order other than the avoidance button press order during the game, a lottery for transitioning to a sub-bonus is held each time a rare role is won in the Type 2 BB game (each time any of the condition devices for Winning A to E are activated). In this sub-bonus transition lottery, the probability of winning is higher when the conditions for Winning - ALL + Replay B or Winning - ALL + Replay C are activated (when a strong rare role is won) than when the conditions for Winning - ALL or Winning - ALL + Replay A are activated (when a weak rare role is won). Therefore, the benefit in the two-type BB game is greater when a strong rare role is won than when a weak rare role is won. And, if you win the sub-bonus transition lottery, you will transition to the sub-bonus.

If, at this time, the player accidentally operates the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in the correct avoidance sequence, and the combination of symbols for the two types of Big Bonus (BB) does not line up, the main control means 100 will perform a V-reserve lottery. If this lottery is successful, the number of V-reserves (described later) will be increased by "10". This number of V-reserves is stored in the RMW of the main control means 100. Conversely, if the two types of BB game is started by stopping the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in a sequence other than the avoidance sequence, even if a rare symbol is hit during the two types of BB game, the lottery for transitioning to a sub-bonus will not be performed.

Furthermore, if 700 spins are played in "Normal" mode without transitioning to a "Chance Zone" or "Sub-Bonus," the main control means 100 will transition the game state from "Normal" to "Sub-Bonus."

Furthermore, in "Normal" mode, if any of the avoidance symbols (winning re-play condition device numbers 10-57) are activated while the two-type BB condition device is operating, and the avoidance button press order is not announced, if a combination of symbols for two-type BB 01-03 is achieved, a specific lottery will be held. If the player wins this specific lottery, the game may be set to a favorable state (special zone) for the player from the start to the end of the two-type BB game starting from the next game.

In this special zone (during two types of BB gameplay), for example, after each game, the player is instructed to reverse the stopping operation of stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c. In a game where the condition device for winning - ALL, the condition device for winning - ALL + replay A, or the condition device for winning - ALL + replay B is activated, if the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are reversed and the "bar" symbols line up in a straight line (upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, lower horizontal line, upward right line, or downward right line) (or if the number of times they line up reaches a predetermined number), a V-reserve lottery may be conducted. In this case, the benefit in the two types of BB gameplay is more advantageous for the player when the condition device for winning - ALL or winning - ALL + replay B or winning - ALL + replay C is activated (i.e., a weak rare role is won) than when the condition device for winning - ALL + replay B or winning - ALL + replay C is activated (i.e., a strong rare role is won).

(Transition from "Sub-Bonus" to "AT Game" or "Normal Mode")
When the game transitions to "Sub-Bonus," the main control means 100 notifies the player of the order of pressing buttons to avoid a role when the avoidance condition device is activated, notifies the player of the order of pressing buttons to match the combination of symbols for a 3-coin role when the button-pressing condition device is activated, and notifies the player of the order of pressing buttons to match the combination of symbols for a 12-coin role when the button-pressing condition device is activated. Hereinafter, these button presses will also be referred to as "button presses that result in a favorable game outcome." The main control means 100 also adds to the count value of the lottery right counter each time the rare role condition device or the button-pressing condition device is activated, and performs an AT lottery each time the count value reaches "10." The count value of the lottery right counter is stored in the RWM of the main control means 100. During gameplay in "Sub-Bonus," if the difference in the number of coins exceeds 100, "Sub-Bonus" ends, and if the player has won the AT lottery, the game transitions to "AT Game," and if the player has not won the AT lottery, the game transitions to "Normal."

(Transition from "AT gameplay" to "continuation chance")
In "AT gameplay," when the condition devices for the 3-coin, 12-coin, and avoidance combinations are activated, the main control means 100 notifies the button sequence that will result in a favorable game outcome. "AT gameplay" ends after 10 rounds of play, and transitions to "continuation chance." However, the number of rounds in "AT gameplay" is not limited to 10; the number of rounds may be determined by lottery. Figure 93 shows the contents of the screen displayed on the image display device 11 when transitioning to "AT gameplay." In this figure, the display area AE1 on the left side of the screen displays the number of rounds in "AT gameplay," and the displayed number of rounds decreases by "1" each time a round is played in "AT gameplay." The display area AE2 on the right side of the screen displays the conditions (continuation conditions) for continuing "AT gameplay." These continuation conditions will be explained later.

(Transition from "Continuance Chance" to "AT Game" or "Normal")
In "Continuation Chance," if the continuation conditions are met before the 12-coin payout condition device is activated twice, the game can return to "AT Game." However, if the continuation conditions are not met even after the 12-coin payout condition device is activated twice, the game returns to "Normal." The continuation conditions are that the type of reel with a "V" mark displayed in the display area AE2 of the screen shown in Figure 93 (hereinafter also referred to as the "continuation condition reel") matches the type of reel corresponding to the first stop operation of the push-button sequence that results in the 12-coin payout combination being formed in the activated 12-coin payout condition device.

In the display area AE2 of the screen shown in Figure 93(a), the continuation condition reels for when the 12-coin payout condition device is activated for the first time after the "Continuation Chance" begins are displayed in [First Chance], and the continuation condition reels for when the 12-coin payout condition device is activated for the second time are displayed in [Second Chance]. Two continuation condition reels are determined for each chance. For example, in [First Chance], a "V" mark is displayed at the positions corresponding to the letters "Left" and "Right," and a "-" mark is displayed at the position corresponding to the letter "Middle," indicating that the left and right reels are the continuation condition reels. Similarly, in [Second Chance], a "V" mark is displayed at the positions corresponding to "Left" and "Middle," and a "-" mark is displayed at the position corresponding to the letter "Right," indicating that the left and middle reels are the continuation condition reels.

For example, in the case of the continuation condition reel shown in Figure 93(a), if the condition device for the 12-coin payout that is first activated during the "continuation chance" is one of the following: J1-J4, J9-J12, K1-K4, and K9-K12 (a 12-coin payout can be achieved by first stopping the left stop switch 26a or the right stop switch 26c), then the continuation condition is met. Furthermore, even if the condition device for the 12-coin payout that is first activated is one of the following: J5-J8 or K5-K8 (continuation condition not met), if the condition device for the 12-coin payout that is second activated is one of the following: J1-J4, J5-J8, K1-K4, and K5-K8 (a 12-coin payout can be achieved by first stopping the left stop switch 26a or the middle stop switch 26b), then the continuation condition is met.

Furthermore, if there is a V-hold as mentioned above, a "V" mark will also appear in the position of the "-" mark on the continuation condition reel displayed in display area AE2, and "V" marks will be displayed in all positions: "left," "middle," and "right." For example, display area AE2 in Figure 93(b) shows the case where an "RSV" based on a V-hold has been added to the "middle" position on the continuation condition reel for [Second Chance]. When "V" marks are displayed in all positions: "left," "middle," and "right," the continuation of "AT gameplay" is confirmed.

Furthermore, if the number of V-holds is two or more, a "V" mark based on the V-holds will be added to both [First Chance] and [Second Chance]. Therefore, the continuation condition is met when the 12-coin payout condition device is first activated, and the game will proceed as "AT game" from the next round. In this way, after transitioning from "Sub-Bonus" to "AT game," the game will alternate between "AT game" and "Continuation Chance" until the continuation condition is not met during "Continuation Chance."

≪Control details related to gameplay≫
Next, with reference to the flowcharts shown in Figures 94 to 102, the main control contents performed by the main control means 100 in this embodiment will be described.

<Game progress control processing>
Figure 94 is a flowchart illustrating the game progress control process that controls the progress of one game. The main control means 100 controls the game provided by the gaming machine of this embodiment by repeatedly executing this game progress control process. In Figure 94, when one game is started, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the start lever 25 has been operated (step Sa1). If the start lever 25 has not been operated, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines again whether or not the start lever 25 has been operated, and repeats the process of step Sa1 until the start lever 25 is operated. If the start lever 25 is operated in this state, the determination result of step Sa1 becomes YES, and the main control means 100 performs an internal lottery to determine the operation of various condition devices based on the probabilities in the setting table shown in Figure 90 (step Sa2), and saves the result in the RWM (step Sa3). In this embodiment, not only the result of the internal lottery for the current game but also the result of the internal lottery for the previous game is saved in the RWM.

Next, the main control means 100 performs lever processing according to the current game state ("Normal", "Chance Zone", "Sub-Bonus", "AT Game", or "Continuation Chance"), which includes notifying the order in which to press the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c and controlling transitions in the game state (step Sa4). After this, it determines whether all of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c have stopped rotating (step Sa5). If all the reels have not stopped, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines again whether all the reels have stopped, repeating the process in step Sa5 until all the reels have stopped. The order in which the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c were pressed by the player during this time is stored in the RWM provided on the main control board 60. If all reels stop in this state, the result of the judgment in step Sa5 becomes YES, and the main control means 100 determines the symbols displayed in the display window W and performs a prize determination process to determine whether or not any combination of winning symbols is lined up on the winning line (step Sa6).

Then, the main control means 100 performs a game state-specific full stop process (step Sa7) to control transitions in the game state according to the current game state. If a combination of winning symbols is found on the winning line, it performs a medal payout process (step Sa8) to dispense the number of medals corresponding to that combination, and then performs a game end check process (step Sa9). In the game end check process in step Sa9, if a Type 2 BB game was being played, it primarily determines whether the termination conditions have been met. If the termination conditions are met, it performs various processes related to the termination of the Type 2 BB game, as well as controls related to the transition between the advantageous section and the normal section.

After completing the process in step Sa9, the main control means 100 performs a favorable section clear counter management process (step Sa10) to update the value of the counter that counts the number of games played during the favorable section and the value of the counter that counts the net increase in coins during the favorable section, and then terminates the game progress control process shown in Figure 94.

<Lever operation and full stop operation in "normal"mode>
The lever processing for each game state performed in step Sa4 of the game progression control process and the full game stop processing for each game state performed in step Sa7 will be explained with reference to Figures 95 and 96 when the game state is "normal". Figure 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal lever processing performed in the lever processing for each game state described above when the game state is "normal", and Figure 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the full game stop processing performed in the full game stop processing for each game state described above when the game state is "normal".

(Lever operation in "normal" mode)
In the normal lever operation shown in Figure 95, the main control means 100 first determines whether or not a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa20). If a Type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 adds "1" to the value of the normal game counter stored in the RWM 63 (hereinafter also simply referred to as "RWM") of the main control board 60 (step Sa21). This normal game counter is a counter for counting the number of games played in "normal" mode.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether a evasion role was won in the internal lottery performed in step Sa2 of the game progression process shown in Figure 94 (i.e., any of the condition devices for winning - G1 to G24 and H1 to H24 were activated) (step Sa22). If any of the evasion roles was won, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 then determines whether the condition device for type 2 BB is activated (i.e., type 2 BB is in progress) (step Sa23). If the condition device for type 2 BB is activated, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether a watermelon was won in the internal lottery performed in the previous game (i.e., the condition device for winning - B was activated) (step Sa24). If a watermelon was not won, the determination result of step Sa24 is NO, and the evasion button sequence corresponding to the won evasion role is announced (step Sa25), and the state of the regular flag stored in RWM is turned off (step Sa26). This regular flag indicates whether or not the avoidance button sequence was announced in a game where the avoidance role was won.

In the decision process of step Sa23, if the condition device for type 2 BB was not activated, the decision result is NO, and the main control means 100 turns on the state of the regular flag described above (step Sa27). Also, in the decision process of step Sa24, if a watermelon was won in the internal lottery performed in the previous game, the decision result is YES, and the main control means 100 turns on.
Proceed to step 00 Sa27 and turn on the regular flag.

The main control means 100, after turning off the normal flag in step Sa26 or turning it on in step Sa27, then determines whether the value of the normal game counter has reached 700 (step Sa28). If the value of the normal game counter has reached 700, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 turns on the SBN transition flag stored in the RWM (step Sa29), ending the normal lever processing shown in Figure 95. This SBN transition flag indicates whether or not the processing (described later) for transitioning the game state from "normal" to "sub-bonus" should be performed, and is initially off. If the normal game counter value has not reached 700 in the determination process of step Sa28, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 ends the normal lever processing shown in Figure 95 with the SBN transition flag still off.

Next, in the judgment process of step Sa20 described above, if two types of BB games were being played, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the SBN lottery flag is ON or OFF (step Sa30). This SBN lottery flag indicates whether or not a sub-bonus lottery can be performed, and the ON/OFF control of the flag is performed in the normal full stop process described next. If the SBN lottery flag is ON, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not a rare role was won in the internal lottery performed in step Sa2 of the game progression process shown in Figure 94 (i.e., one of the condition devices A to E was activated) (step Sa31).

In contrast, if the SBN lottery flag is OFF in the judgment process of step Sa30, and if a rare role was not won in the judgment process of step Sa31, the judgment result is NO in both cases, and the main control means 100 terminates the normal lever processing shown in Figure 95. On the other hand, if a rare role was won in the judgment process of step Sa31, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs a sub-bonus lottery to determine whether or not to transition the game state from "normal" to "sub-bonus" (step Sa32). Then, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus lottery was won (step Sa33), and if it was won, the judgment result is YES, and the process proceeds to step Sa29, where the main control means 100 turns on the SBN transition flag stored in RWM and then terminates the normal lever processing shown in Figure 95. In contrast, if the sub-bonus lottery was not won, the judgment result of step Sa33 is NO, and the normal lever processing shown in Figure 95 is terminated.

(Complete shutdown process under "normal" conditions)
In the normal full shutdown process shown in Figure 97, first, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa40). If a Type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not any combination of symbols from Type 2 BB 01 to 03 has lined up on the winning line in the current game (step Sa41). If any combination of symbols from Type 2 BB has lined up on the winning line, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the aforementioned regular flag is turned on (step Sa42). If the regular flag is turned on, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 updates the state of the SBN lottery flag stored in the RWM to turn on (step Sa43), performs processing to start a Type 2 BB game from the next game (step Sa44), and then terminates the normal full shutdown process shown in Figure 97.

In the judgment process of step Sa41, if any combination of two types of BB symbols is not lined up on the winning line, the judgment result will be NO, and the main control means 100 will determine whether or not the "medal" symbol is lined up on the upper horizontal line, the middle horizontal line, or the lower horizontal line.
Step Sa45). If the "medal" pattern is aligned on any of the horizontal lines in the upper, middle, or lower rows, the result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the regular flag is turned on or not (Step Sa46).

If the regular flag is turned on, the result of the judgment in step Sa46 will be YES, and a V-reserve acquisition lottery will be performed to determine whether or not the aforementioned V-reserve can be acquired (step Sa47). Then, it will be determined whether or not the V-reserve acquisition lottery was won (step Sa48). If it was won, the result of the judgment will be YES, and "10" will be added to the value of the V-reserve counter stored in the RWM of the main control board 60 (step Sa49). Here, the value of the V-reserve counter indicates the number of V-reserves that have been accumulated.

In this case, the fact that the regular flag is on means that when any avoidance role was won, the avoidance button sequence was not announced. If the "medal" symbols lined up in this state, it means the player accidentally stopped the stop switch in the avoidance button sequence. In other words, it means that the opportunity for the sub-bonus lottery to be executed in the two-type BB game was missed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a V-reserve acquisition lottery is performed as a compensatory measure in such cases.

After the process in step Sa49, the main control means 100 then determines whether the aforementioned SBN transition flag is on (step Sa50). If the SBN transition flag is on, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs an AT transition game count lottery and stores the number of games determined by the lottery in the RWM (step Sa51). This AT transition game count lottery determines the number of games required to confirm the transition to "AT game" in the "sub-bonus" game state, and is determined within the range of 20 to 80 games. In this embodiment, since the termination condition of the "sub-bonus" game state is defined by the difference in the number of tokens, the number of games that can be played in the "sub-bonus" is not fixed. Therefore, if more games than the number of games determined by the AT transition game count lottery are played in the "sub-bonus," a V reserve is granted as a bonus.

Next, the main control means 100 clears the values of the SBN game counter and AT lottery right counter stored in the RWM (sets them to "0") (step Sa 52). Here, the SBN game counter is a counter for counting the number of games played in the "sub-bonus," and the AT lottery right counter is a counter for counting the number of rights (described later) required to perform the AT lottery in the "sub-bonus." After performing the process in step Sa 52, the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "normal" to "sub-bonus" (step Sa 53), and terminates the normal state full stop process shown in Figure 96. Note that if the SBN transition flag was off in the judgment process in step Sa 50, the judgment result is NO, and the normal state full stop process shown in Figure 96 terminates immediately.

In the judgment process of step Sa46 described above, if the regular flag is off, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 adds "1" to the value of the CZ transition counter stored in the RWM (step Sa54) to determine whether the value of the CZ transition counter has reached "6" (step Sa55). This value of the CZ transition counter is referenced when determining whether to transition the game state from "normal" to "chance zone". If the value of the CZ transition counter reaches "6", the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "normal" to "chance zone" (step Sa56) and then terminates the normal state full stop process shown in Figure 96. On the other hand, if the value of the CZ transition counter has not reached "6", the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the normal state full stop process shown in Figure 96 while maintaining the game state in "normal".

In the judgment process of step Sa40 described above, if a Type 2 BB game is currently being played, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the total number of medals dispensed in the Type 2 BB game exceeds 11 (step Sa57). If the total number of medals exceeds 11, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 terminates the Type 2 BB game (step Sa58), ending the normal full-stop process shown in Figure 96. In this case, the game will start under conditions where the Type 2 BB condition device is not activated from the next game. On the other hand, if the total number of medals does not exceed 11, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the normal full-stop process shown in Figure 96 while continuing the Type 2 BB game.

In this embodiment, the bonus game (Type 2 BB game) is not particularly attractive as a reward for the player, as the number of medals paid out when a minor role is achieved is only 1 or 2, compared to the predetermined number of medals being 2. Therefore, by providing a chance to transition to a "sub-bonus" when a predetermined condition is met in the Type 2 BB game (in this embodiment, a rare role is won), the enjoyment of the game can be improved without diminishing the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since there are no missed combinations of symbols in the Type 2 BB 01-03 groups (PB=1), the player can transition to the Type 2 BB game without having to manually stop the reels.

<Lever operation and full stop operation in "sub-bonus">
When the game state is "sub-bonus," the game state-specific lever processing performed in step Sa4 of the game progress control processing shown in Figure 94 and the game state-specific full stop processing performed in step Sa7 will be explained with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Figure 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sub-bonus lever processing performed in the game state-specific lever processing described above when the game state is "sub-bonus," and Figure 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sub-bonus full stop processing performed in the game state-specific full stop processing described above when the game state is "sub-bonus."

(Lever operation in "sub-bonus")
In the sub-bonus lever processing shown in Figure 97, the main control means 100 first determines whether or not a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa70). If a Type 2 BB game is being played, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 terminates the sub-bonus lever processing shown in Figure 97. On the other hand, if a Type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 subtracts a predetermined number from the value of the difference counter stored in the RWM (step Sa71). Here, the predetermined number is "2" for Type 2 BB games and "3" for games other than Type 2 BB games.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether a minor prize has been won (i.e., whether a condition device related to winning has been activated) through the internal lottery described above (step Sa72). If any condition device related to winning has been activated, the value of the highest number of payouts among the number of payouts specified for the minor prize symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device is added to the value of the difference counter (step Sa73). The number of medals to be added to the value of the difference counter is determined not by the number of medals actually paid out, but by the number of payouts specified for the minor prize symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device. Next, the main control means 100 determines whether a push-order prize has been won, that is, whether any of the condition devices for winning - I1 to I12, J1 to J12, and K1 to K12 have been activated (step Sa74). If any of the push-order prizes have been won, the determination result is YES, and the player is notified of the push-order sequence in which the symbol combination that pays out the most medals will line up on the winning line (step Sa75). Here, the main control means 100 notifies the button press sequence for aligning a three-symbol combination on the winning line when the condition devices for winning I1 to I12 are activated, and notifies the button press sequence for aligning a twelve-symbol combination on the winning line when the condition devices for winning J1 to J12 and K1 to K12 are activated.

Next, the main control means 100 adds "1" to the value of the SBN game counter mentioned above (step Sa76). If a minor role was not won in the judgment process of step Sa72, or if a push-order role was not won in the judgment process of step Sa74, the judgment result is NO and the process proceeds to step Sa76, where "1" is added to the value of the SBN game counter. After the process of step Sa76 is performed, the main control means 100 determines whether the state of the AT flag stored in the RWM is ON or OFF (step Sa77). The AT flag is a flag that the main control means 100 refers to when deciding whether to proceed to "AT game" or "normal" when the termination condition of "sub-bonus" is met.

In the decision process of step Sa77, if the AT flag was off, the decision result is NO, and it is determined whether the value of the SBN game counter is greater than or equal to the value of the AT transition game count lottery process in step Sa51 of Figure 96 (step Sa78). If the value of the SBN game counter is greater than or equal to the value of the AT transition game count, the decision result is YES, and the main control means 100 updates the state of the AT flag stored in the RWM to ON (step Sa79). After the process of step Sa79 is completed, or if the decision result of step Sa77 is YES (the AT flag was on), the main control means 100 determines whether the result of the internal lottery was a loss (step Sa80). If it was not a loss, the decision result is NO, and a V reserve acquisition lottery is performed (step Sa81). Then, the value determined by the V reserve acquisition lottery (however, it may be 0) is added to the value of the V reserve counter mentioned above (step Sa82), and the sub-bonus lever process in Figure 97 is terminated. Furthermore, if the result of the internal lottery in step Sa80 is a loss, the judgment result becomes YES, and the sub-bonus lever processing shown in Figure 97 ends there.

In the judgment process of step Sa78 described above, if the value of the SBN game counter is less than the number of games until AT transition, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether a rare role has been won through internal lottery (that one of the condition devices A to E for winning has been activated) (step Sa83). If a rare role has been won, the judgment result is YES, and "3" is added to the value of the AT lottery right counter mentioned above (step Sa84). On the other hand, if a rare role has not been won, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether a 3-coin role has been won through internal lottery (that one of the condition devices I1 to I12 for winning has been activated) (step Sa85). If a 3-coin role has not been won, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the sub-bonus lever processing shown in Figure 97.

If a three-coin combination is achieved, the result of the judgment in step Sa85 is YES, and "1" is added to the value of the AT lottery right counter (step Sa86). Next, it is determined whether or not a three-coin combination has been achieved for four or more consecutive games (step Sa87). If a three-coin combination has been achieved for four or more consecutive games, the result of the judgment is YES, and another "1" is added to the value of the AT lottery right counter (step Sa88). Then, it is determined whether or not a three-coin combination has been achieved for five or more consecutive games (step Sa89). If a three-coin combination has been achieved for five or more consecutive games, the result of the judgment is YES, and another "1" is added to the value of the AT lottery right counter (step Sa90).

When the processing in step Sa84 or Sa90 is completed, or when the judgment result in step Sa87 or Sa89 is NO, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the AT lottery right counter exceeds "9" (step Sa91). If the value of the AT lottery right counter does not exceed "9", the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the sub-bonus lever processing shown in Figure 97. On the other hand, if the value of the AT lottery right counter exceeds "9", the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 clears the value of the AT lottery right counter to "0" (step Sa92), and then performs an AT lottery to determine whether to proceed to AT game when the termination condition for the "sub-bonus" is met (step Sa93). Then, it determines whether or not the AT lottery was won (step Sa94), and if the AT lottery was not won, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the sub-bonus lever processing shown in Figure 97. If the AT lottery is won, the result is YES, and after updating the state of the AT flag stored in RWM to ON (step Sa95), the sub-bonus lever processing shown in Figure 97 is terminated.

(Complete shutdown process in "Sub-Bonus")
In the sub-bonus full stop process shown in Figure 98, first, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa100). If a Type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the difference counter stored in the RWM exceeds "88" (step Sa101). If the value of the difference counter does not exceed "88", the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the sub-bonus full stop process shown in Figure 98. On the other hand, if the value of the difference counter exceeds "88", the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the AT flag stored in the RWM is ON (step Sa102).

In the decision process of step Sa102, if the AT flag is off, the decision result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the SBN game counter stored in the RWM is less than "20" (step Sa103). If the value of the SBN game counter is "20" or more, the decision result is NO, and the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "sub-bonus" to "normal" (step Sa104), and then terminates the sub-bonus full stop process shown in Figure 98.

In contrast, if the judgment result in step Sa102 is YES (AT flag is ON) or if the judgment result in step Sa103 is YES (SBN game counter value is less than "20"), the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "Sub-Bonus" to "AT Game" (step Sa105). Thus, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in "Sub-Bonus" is less than 20, and the maximum possible difference in tokens is achieved within the range of not exceeding 100 tokens (i.e., the termination condition for "Sub-Bonus" is met), the game transitions to "AT Game" even if the AT flag was OFF. Therefore, if the termination condition for "Sub-Bonus" is met with a small number of games (less than 20) in "Sub-Bonus," the game is controlled to always transition to "AT Game" as a compensatory measure.

After completing step Sa105, the main control means 100 sets the initial value of the AT game counter stored in the RWM to "10" (step Sa106). This value of the AT game counter indicates the number of games that can be played in "AT game." In this embodiment, it is "10," but it is not limited to this; the initial value of the AT game counter may be determined by lottery to any number of games. Next, the main control means 100 performs a continuation condition reel lottery to determine the continuation condition reels in the [First Chance] and [Second Chance] shown in Figure 93 (step Sa107).

This lottery determines two continuation condition reels (one of three combinations: left reel and middle reel, middle reel and right reel, or left reel and right reel) for each of the [First Chance] and [Second Chance] displayed in the right-hand display area G2 shown in Figure 93. As a result, when transitioning to "AT gameplay," a "V" mark is displayed in the squares corresponding to the determined continuation condition reels among the "left," "middle," and "right" squares displayed in the right-hand display area G2 of the image display device 11. Additionally, a "-" mark is displayed in the squares corresponding to reels that did not become continuation condition reels (hereinafter also referred to as "non-continuation condition reels").

When the process in step Sa107 is performed, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the V-reserve counter stored in the RWM is "1" or greater (step Sa108). If the value of the V-reserve counter is "0", the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 displays a "V" mark in the square corresponding to the non-continuation condition reel in [Second Chance] (step Sa109), and terminates the sub-bonus full stop process shown in Figure 98. Thus, in this embodiment, even if the number of V-reserves is "0" when the termination condition for the "sub-bonus" is met, one V-reserve will always be assigned. Furthermore, in this case, the V-reserve is always used in the [Second Chance]. Therefore, for example, if the first stop reel in the [First Chance] matches the combination of 12 symbols in the specified order, and the continuation condition reel determined by the continuation condition reel lottery in step Sa107 matches (i.e., the continuation condition is met), the V-reserve granted by the processing in step Sa109 is not consumed and is carried over to the next "Continuation Chance."

In the decision process of step Sa108, if the value of the V-reserve counter is "1" or greater, the decision result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the V-reserve counter stored in the RWM is "1" or not (step Sa110). If the value of the V-reserve counter is "1", the decision result is YES, and a V-reserve distribution lottery is performed to determine whether to apply the V-reserve to [First Chance] or [Second Chance] (step Sa111). Then, after applying the V-reserve to the non-continuation condition reel determined by the V-reserve distribution lottery between [First Chance] and [Second Chance] (step Sa112), the value of the V-reserve counter is cleared to "0" (step Sa113), and the sub-bonus full stop process shown in Figure 98 is terminated.

In the decision process of step Sa110, if the value of the V-hold counter is not "1", the decision result is NO, and the main control means 100 applies the V-hold to the non-continuation condition reels in both the [First Chance] and [Second Chance] (step Sa114). Then, "2" is subtracted from the value of the V-hold counter (step Sa115), and the sub-bonus all-stop process shown in Figure 98 is terminated. Also, in the decision process of step Sa100 described above, if a Type 2 BB game is currently being played, the decision result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the total number of medals paid out in the Type 2 BB game exceeds 11 (step Sa116). If the total number of medals exceeds 11, the decision result is YES, and the main control means 100 terminates the Type 2 BB game (step Sa117), and the sub-bonus all-stop process shown in Figure 98 is terminated. In this case, the game will start with the Type 2 BB condition device not activated from the next game. If the total number of medals does not exceed 11, the result is NO, and the main control means 100 continues the two types of BB gameplay while ending the sub-bonus complete stop process shown in Figure 98.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the number of games played in the "Sub-Bonus" equals or exceeds the number of games required to transition to the AT (AT) determined by the AT transition game count lottery, the game will always transition to "AT Game" (Step Sa78, YES → Sa79 in Figure 97). Furthermore, if the number of games played in the "Sub-Bonus" ends before 20 (hereinafter, this number of games (20) is also referred to as the "minimum number of games"), the game will always transition to "AT Game" (Step Sa103, YES → Sa105 in Figure 98). Therefore, if the number of games required to transition to the AT is determined to be "20" by the AT transition game count lottery, the transition to "AT Game" is confirmed if the termination condition for the "Sub-Bonus" is met before 20 games, and the transition to "AT Game" is also confirmed if the termination condition for the "Sub-Bonus" is met after 20 games or more. In other words, regardless of the number of games played in the "Sub-Bonus," the game will always transition to "AT Game."

As a result, when the termination condition for the "sub-bonus" is determined by the difference in the number of tokens, the transition to "AT game" may be confirmed regardless of the number of games played, so players should be aware of this.
This can create anticipation regarding the transition to "AT gameplay" and provide a sense of security upon confirmation of the transition to "AT gameplay". Therefore, in order to obtain such effects, it is desirable that the minimum number of games and the number of games to transition to AT match. In this embodiment, the minimum number of games was fixed at 20 games, and the number of games to transition to AT was determined by the AT transition game number lottery in step Sa51 of Figure 96. However, conversely, the minimum number of games may be determined by lottery between, for example, 20 and 80 games, and the number of games to transition to AT may be fixed at, for example, 80 games.

<Lever operation and full stop operation in "AT gameplay">
When the game state is "AT game," the game state-specific lever processing performed in step Sa4 of the game progress control processing shown in Figure 94 and the game state-specific full stop processing performed in step Sa7 will be explained with reference to Figures 99 and 100. Figure 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the AT game lever processing performed in the game state-specific lever processing described above when the game state is "AT game," and Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the AT game full stop processing performed in the game state-specific full stop processing described above when the game state is "AT game."

(Lever operation in "AT gameplay")
In the AT game lever processing shown in Figure 99, first, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa130). If a Type 2 BB game is being played, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 terminates the AT game lever processing shown in Figure 99. On the other hand, if a Type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game counter stored in the RWM (step Sa131).

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether a winning combination has been achieved through the internal lottery described above, that is, whether any of the condition devices for winning – I1 to I12, J1 to J12, and K1 to K12 have been activated (step Sa132). If none of the winning combinations have been achieved, the determination result is NO and the main control means 100 terminates the AT game lever processing shown in Figure 99. On the other hand, if any of the winning combinations have been achieved, the determination result is YES and the player is notified of the sequence of buttons that will result in the highest payout of symbols being aligned on the winning line (step Sa133). Here, if the condition devices for winning – I1 to I12 have been activated, the main control means 100 notifies the player of the sequence of buttons that will result in a 3-coin winning combination being aligned on the winning line, and if the condition devices for winning – J1 to J12 and K1 to K12 have been activated, the main control means 100 notifies the player of the sequence of buttons that will result in a 12-coin winning combination being aligned on the winning line. Then, upon notifying the aforementioned button press sequence, the main control means 100 terminates the AT game lever processing shown in Figure 99.

(Complete shutdown process in "AT gameplay")
In the AT game stop process shown in Figure 100, first, the main control means 100 determines whether a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa 140). If a Type 2 BB game is being played, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the total number of medals dispensed in that Type 2 BB game exceeds 11 (step Sa 141). If the total number of medals exceeds 11, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 terminates the Type 2 BB game (step Sa 142), ending the AT game stop process shown in Figure 100. In this case, the next game will start with the Type 2 BB condition device not activated. On the other hand, if the total number of medals does not exceed 11, the determination result in step Sa 141 is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the AT game stop process shown in Figure 100 while continuing the Type 2 BB game.

On the other hand, in the decision process of step Sa140, if the two types of BB games were not being played, the decision result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the AT game counter stored in the RWM is "0" or not (step Sa143). If the value of the AT game counter is not "0", the decision result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the AT game complete stop process shown in Figure 100. Conversely, if the value of the AT game counter is "0", the decision result is YES, and the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "AT game" to "continuation chance" (step Sa144), and then terminates the AT game complete stop process shown in Figure 100.

<Lever operation and full stop operation in "Continuation Chance">
When the game state is "Continuation Chance," the game state-specific lever processing performed in step Sa4 of the game progress control processing shown in Figure 94 and the game state-specific full stop processing performed in step Sa7 will be explained with reference to Figures 101 and 102. Figure 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation chance lever processing performed in the game state-specific lever processing described above when the game state is "Continuation Chance," and Figure 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation chance full stop processing performed in the game state-specific full stop processing described above when the game state is "Continuation Chance."

(Lever operation during "Continuance Chance")
In the lever processing during a continuation chance as shown in Figure 101, the main control means 100 first determines whether or not a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa 150). If a Type 2 BB game is being played, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 terminates the lever processing during a continuation chance as shown in Figure 101. On the other hand, if a Type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not a push-order combination has been won by internal lottery, that is, whether or not one of the condition devices for winning - I1 to I12, J1 to J12, or K1 to K12 has been activated (step Sa 151). If none of the push-order combinations have been won, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the lever processing during a continuation chance as shown in Figure 101.

In contrast, if any of the button-press sequence combinations are won, the judgment result in step Sa151 becomes YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not a 12-coin button-press sequence combination has been won, that is, whether or not the condition devices for winning J1-J12 and K1-K12 have been activated (step Sa152). If any of the 12-coin button-press sequence combinations are won, the judgment result becomes YES, and the main control means 100 adds "1" to the value of the continuation chance counter stored in the RWM (step Sa153). Here, the continuation chance counter is used to determine whether it is the [First Chance] or the [Second Chance] at the time of winning a 12-coin button-press sequence combination. That is, the initial value of the continuation chance counter is "0", a value of "1" means it is the [First Chance], and a value of "2" means it is the [Second Chance].

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the continuation chance counter is "1" (step Sa 154). If the value of the continuation chance counter is "1", the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the first stop reel (hereinafter also referred to as the "12-coin combination first stop reel") that can stop and display the 12-coin combination on the winning line matches one of the two continuation condition reels determined for the [first chance] (step Sa 155). If the 12-coin combination first stop reel matches one of the continuation condition reels, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 updates the state of the continuation flag stored in the RWM to ON (step Sa 156). This state of the continuation flag is referenced when the main control means 100 determines whether to transition the game state to "AT game" or "normal" when the termination condition for "continuation chance" is met.

Next, the main control means 100 starts a freeze animation (step Sa157). During this freeze animation, the main control means 100 reverses the rotation of the first stop reel for the 12-coin payout in the activated condition device (rotating in the opposite direction to the arrow shown in Figure 78). This freeze animation may be made cancelable by operating the MAX-BET switch 23. As an example of this freeze animation, for example, the cancellation operation is made effective after _T1 seconds (for example, 2 seconds) have elapsed since the freeze animation started, and during the period from _T1 seconds to _T2 seconds (for example, 2 to 3 seconds after the start of the reel animation) (first period), an animation is performed to build anticipation for which reel will rotate (for example, a reel action in which all reels start to rotate but stop instantly). At this stage, the first stop reel for the 12-coin payout in the activated condition device is not revealed, and it is not indicated whether or not the continuation condition has been met.

Furthermore, during the second period ( _T2 to _T3 seconds after the freeze animation begins, for example, from 3 to 6 seconds after the start of the reel animation), a continuation animation is performed to indicate whether or not the continuation condition has been met. For example, if the first stop reel for the 12-coin payout matches any of the continuation condition reels, a "V" mark image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11; if they do not match, the "V" mark image is not displayed. In addition, during the third period ( _T3 to _T4 seconds after the freeze animation begins, for example, from 6 to 9 seconds after the start of the reel animation), an animation image (push order navigation image) indicating the push order for matching the 12-coin payout symbols in the activated condition device is displayed on the image display device 11.

If the freeze animation is canceled during the first period described above, the freeze animation is terminated and the continuation animation is performed. If the freeze animation is canceled during the second period, the freeze animation is terminated, while the continuation animation remains in progress (or the continuation animation is terminated first) and the button press navigation image is displayed. If the freeze animation is canceled during the third period, both the freeze animation and the continuation animation are terminated, and the next animation to be performed is displayed while the button press navigation image remains displayed, or only the freeze animation may be canceled, maintaining the continuation animation and button press navigation image displayed on the image display device 11 (without changing anything about the animation).

Furthermore, in the judgment process of step Sa155, if the first stop reel for the 12-coin payout does not match any of the continuation condition reels, the judgment result is NO, and the process of step Sa157 is performed without performing step Sa156. Then, the main control means 100 notifies the push order that will result in the combination of symbols with the highest payout among the symbol combinations corresponding to the activated condition device lining up on the winning line (step Sa158), and the continuation chance lever process shown in Figure 101 is terminated. Furthermore, in the judgment process of step Sa152 mentioned above, if the 12-coin payout is not achieved, the judgment result is NO, and the process of step Sa158 is performed.

In the judgment process of step Sa154 described above, if the value of the continuation chance counter is not "1", the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether the 12-coin payout first stop reel matches one of the two continuation condition reels determined for the [second chance] (step Sa159). If the 12-coin payout first stop reel matches one of the continuation condition reels, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 proceeds with the processing from step Sa156 onwards described above. If the 12-coin payout first stop reel does not match one of the continuation condition reels, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 proceeds with the processing from step Sa157 onwards.

(Complete shutdown process during "Continuance Chance")
In the continuation chance full stop process shown in Figure 102, first, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa170). If a Type 2 BB game is being played, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 terminates the continuation chance full stop process shown in Figure 102. On the other hand, if a Type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the continuation flag stored in the RWM is ON (step Sa171). If the continuation flag is OFF, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the continuation chance counter stored in the RWM is "2" (step Sa172).

If the value of the continuation chance counter is "2", the judgment result in step Sa172 is YES, and the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "continuation chance" to "normal" (step Sa173), ending the continuation chance full stop process shown in Figure 102. Furthermore, if the value of the continuation chance counter in the judgment process of step Sa172 is not "2", the judgment result is NO, and the continuation chance full stop process shown in Figure 102 ends immediately.

In the decision process of step Sa171, if the continuation flag stored in the RWM is ON, the decision result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the process of determining the continuation condition reels for [First Chance] and [Second Chance] to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 11 in the next "AT game". First, it is determined whether the value of the continuation chance counter stored in the RWM is "1" (step Sa174). If the value of the continuation chance counter is "1", the continuation condition is met in [First Chance]. In this case, the decision result of step Sa174 is YES, and the continuation condition reel in [Second Chance] is set as the continuation condition reel for [First Chance] to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 11 in the next "AT game" (step Sa175). Then, the aforementioned continuation condition reel lottery is performed to determine the continuation condition reel in [Second Chance] (step Sa176).

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the V-reserve counter stored in the RWM is "1" or greater (step Sa177). If the value of the V-reserve counter is "1" or greater, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the V-reserve counter stored in the RWM (step Sa178), and applies the V-reserve to the non-continuation condition reel in [Second Chance] (step Sa179). As a result, in [Second Chance], which is displayed in the right-hand display area G2 of the display screen of the image display device 11 shown in Figure 93, a "V" mark will be displayed in the square corresponding to the non-continuation condition reel.

Then, the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "Continuation Chance" to "AT Game" (step Sa 180), and terminates the complete stop process during the Continuation Chance as shown in Figure 102. Furthermore, in the judgment process of step Sa 177, if the value of the hold counter is "0", the judgment result is NO, and the process proceeds to step Sa 180, where the game state transitions from "Continuation Chance" to "AT Game" before terminating the complete stop process during the Continuation Chance as shown in Figure 102.

In the decision process of step Sa174, if the value of the continuation chance counter stored in the RWM is not "1" (in this case, the value of the continuation chance counter is "2"), the decision result is NO, and the main control means 100 performs a continuation condition reel lottery to determine the continuation condition reels in the above-mentioned [First Chance] and [Second Chance] (step Sa181). Next, it is determined whether the value of the V-reserve counter stored in the RWM is "1" (step Sa182), and if the value of the V-reserve counter is "1", the decision result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs a V-reserve distribution lottery to determine whether to apply the V-reserve to the [First Chance] or the [Second Chance] (step Sa183). Then, after applying the V-reserve to the non-continuation condition reel of the [First Chance] or [Second Chance] determined by the V-reserve distribution lottery (step Sa184), the value of the V-reserve counter is cleared to "0" (step Sa185). Subsequently, the process proceeds to step Sa180, where the game state is transitioned from "Continuation Chance" to "AT Game," and then the "Continuation Chance" full stop process shown in Figure 102 is terminated.

In the decision process of step Sa182, it is determined whether the value of the V-reserve counter stored in the RWM is "1" (step Sa182). If the value of the V-reserve counter is not "1", the decision result is NO, and the main control means 100 then determines whether the value of the V-reserve counter is "2" or greater (step Sa186). If the value of the V-reserve counter is not "2" or greater, the decision result is NO, and the main control means 100 proceeds to the process of step Sa180, transitioning the game state from "Continuation Chance" to "AT Game", and then ending the continuation chance full stop process shown in Figure 102.

In response to this, in the decision process of step Sa186, if the value of the V-reserve counter is "2" or greater, the decision result is YES, and the main control means 100 applies the V-reserve to the non-continuation condition reels in both the [First Chance] and [Second Chance] (step Sa187). Then, after subtracting "2" from the value of the V-reserve counter (step Sa188), the process proceeds to step Sa180, transitioning the game state from "Continuation Chance" to "AT Game," and then ending the continuation chance full stop process shown in Figure 102.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a 12-coin payout is achieved during a "continuation chance," if the first stop reel in the sequence where the 12-coin payout symbols align on the winning line matches one of the two continuation condition reels predetermined by lottery, the game transitions back to "AT gameplay." Therefore, the probability of continuing gameplay in the advantageous "AT gameplay" mode is increased, thereby enhancing the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, if a V-reserve is acquired, the continuation of gameplay in "AT gameplay" is guaranteed. Therefore, the V-reserve can be used as compensation for the player (for example, the V-reserve acquisition lottery performed in step Sa47 of the normal all-stop processing in Figure 96) or as a bonus to the player (for example, the V-reserve acquisition lottery performed in step Sa81 of the sub-bonus lever processing in Figure 97).

[Third Embodiment]
The following description will explain the slot machine according to the third embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "third form slot machine") with additional reference to Figures 103 to 119. The following description will mainly focus on the features of the third form slot machine. The features described below are not limited to the third form slot machine and can be combined with other embodiments. Note that the third form slot machine shares or is similar in basic configuration to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and therefore their descriptions will be omitted. Furthermore, the control processes such as the role determination process and reel control process described in slot machine 1 can be applied to the third form slot machine in the same way, or with some modifications to the processing content.

The following describes the characteristic configuration of the slot machine in this embodiment. In the following description, "stopping operation" of the stop switch refers to the operation of pressing the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel.
≪Press Order Navigation≫
In this embodiment, during AT gameplay, the image display device 11 and speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, and 44b provide a button-pressing navigation display. These button-pressing navigation displays will be described below with reference to Figures 103 to 105. The button-pressing navigation display is controlled by the sub-control board 70, and when the button-pressing navigation display is performed, the main control board 60 also provides button-pressing navigation via a button-pressing indicator (for example, corresponding to the payout indicator lamp 46j in Figure 1).

<Changes in the button press order navigation display in response to game operation>
First, the changes in the image displayed on the screen 11a of the image display device 11 and the sounds output from the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, and 44b during the execution of the button-pressing navigation sequence will be explained with reference to Figure 103. Here, the button-pressing navigation sequence shown in Figure 103 instructs the player to press the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in the order of left → middle → right. In this embodiment, to avoid redundancy in the description, unless otherwise specified, "stop switch" refers to "stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c," and "speaker" refers to "speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, and 44b."

When a push-button navigation sequence is performed during AT gameplay, the player first inserts a specified number of tokens and operates the start lever 25. As shown in Figure 103(a), numbers indicating the order of pressing the stop switches are displayed on the lower left, lower center, and lower right sides of the AT gameplay sequence image (ATP) displayed on screen 11a. Simultaneously, the speaker outputs an audio message indicating the type of stop switch to be pressed first. Here, the number displayed on the lower left of the ATP sequence image indicates the order in which to stop the left stop switch 26a; the number displayed on the lower center indicates the order in which to stop the middle stop switch 26b; and the number displayed on the lower right indicates the order in which to stop the right stop switch 26c.

Here, the numerical images indicating the order in which each stop switch should be operated are called navigation numerical images NF. The navigation numerical images NF corresponding to each stop switch are displayed on screen 11a, superimposed on the navigation background image NB. The navigation numerical image NF showing the number "1" and its navigation background image NB are collectively referred to as the "first stop instruction image," the navigation numerical image NF showing the number "2" and its navigation background image NB are collectively referred to as the "second stop instruction image," and the navigation numerical image NF showing the number "3" and its navigation background image NB are collectively referred to as the "third stop instruction image." When referring to the first to third stop instruction images without distinction, they are simply called "stop instruction images."

The size of each stop instruction image is such that the first stop instruction image is the largest, the second stop instruction image is the second largest, and the third stop instruction image is the smallest. Furthermore, the second and third stop instruction images have transparency, with the third stop instruction image being more transparent than the second. By displaying the first stop instruction image at the largest size and without transparency, the visibility of the first stop instruction image is improved. This display method, which improves visibility, is called "emphasis display."

To avoid complicating the diagrams, the notation of the codes for the navigation digit image NF and navigation background image NB that constitute the second and third stop instruction images, respectively, is omitted in Figure 103(a). Similarly, for the same reason, the notation of the codes for the navigation digit image NF and navigation background image NB that constitute each stop instruction image in Figures 103(b) to (e) is also omitted.

In the button-pressing navigation prompt, the image shown in Figure 103(a) is displayed on screen 11a, and the speaker outputs the voice message "Left!" (indicating that the first stop operation is the left stop switch 26a). The images displayed on screen 11a for the button-pressing navigation prompt are as follows: the first stop instruction image is displayed in the lower left of screen 11a, the second stop instruction image is displayed in the lower center, and the third stop instruction image is displayed in the lower right.

When the start lever 25 is operated, all reels begin to rotate, the rotation speed of all reels reaches a constant speed (for example, 79.90 rpm), and all indices on each reel are detected by the corresponding index sensors (reel sensors), the stop switch is activated. At this time, the image of the push-button navigation display shown in image 11a is the navigation number image NF of the first to third stop instruction images, as shown in Figure 103(b).
The image is tilted diagonally, and its size is slightly larger. Additionally, the transparency of the second and third stop instruction images is set to 0, making them opaque, similar to the first stop instruction image (a display mode in which the AT gameplay image ATP is not visible through them).

When the player performs the first stop operation with the left stop switch 26a in this state, the image shown in Figure 103(c) is displayed on screen 11a, and the speaker outputs the voice message "Middle!" (indicating that the second stop operation is the middle stop switch 26b). In the push-button navigation image displayed on screen 11a, the first stop instruction image is erased and the second stop instruction image is highlighted. Furthermore, the display of the third stop instruction image is the same size and transparency as the second stop instruction image in Figure 103(a) mentioned above.

Next, when the player performs the second stop operation with the middle stop switch 26b, the image shown in Figure 103(d) is displayed on screen 11a, and the speaker outputs the voice message "Right!" (indicating that the third stop operation is the right stop switch 26c). In the push-button navigation image displayed on screen 11a, the second stop instruction image is erased and the third stop instruction image is highlighted. Finally, when the player performs the third stop operation with the right stop switch 26c, as shown in Figure 103(e), the second stop instruction image is erased, and the speaker outputs the voice message "Yes!" (indicating that the stop switches were stopped in the order indicated by the push-button navigation).

Furthermore, in the aforementioned push-order navigation presentation, the display of each stop instruction image changed when the stop switch operation became effective (Figure 103(b)), but such changes in display format may be omitted. Also, in the above push-order navigation presentation, the player was instructed to choose one of six possible push-orders (a so-called six-choice push-order), but a push-order navigation presentation that instructs a 12-choice push-order is also acceptable. In the case of a push-order navigation presentation that instructs a 12-choice push-order, for example, one of six possible push-orders is instructed, and at the same time, the player is instructed which of two symbols (one symbol is positioned outside the pull-in control range of the other symbol) should be targeted on the reel corresponding to the stop switch to be stopped first (6 push-orders × 2 types of symbols to target = 12 combinations). In this case, if the type of stop switch used for the first stop operation and the symbol pressed match the type of stop switch used for the second stop operation, the symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device that yields the highest payout will be matched. If they do not match, a single-coin payout or a losing symbol combination will be matched.

Another example of a push-button navigation system that guides the player through 12 possible button presses is one that instructs the player to choose one of six possible button presses, and also instructs the player which of two symbols (one of which is positioned outside the pull-in control range of the other) should be targeted on the reel corresponding to the stop switch to be stopped for the third stop operation. In this case, if the types of stop switches used for the first and second stops, and the symbols targeted for the third stop operation, match the information provided by the push-button navigation system, the combination of symbols that yields the highest payout among the combinations of symbols corresponding to the activated condition device will be matched. If they do not match, a combination of symbols that results in a single payout or a losing combination will be matched.

Alternatively, a button-press navigation system could be used to guide the user through a selection of 24 possible button presses. The 24 possible presses refer to the sequence of presses possible in a slot machine equipped with four reels and four corresponding stop switches for each reel. Specifically, there are four types of first-stop switches, three types of second-stop switches, and two types of third-stop switches, resulting in 4 x 3 x 2 = 24 possible presses. The button-press navigation system then guides the user through one of these 24 possible presses.

<Push-button navigation display when the push-button sequence is successful and when it is unsuccessful>
In this embodiment, when a stop switch is pressed during the execution of a button press order navigation sequence, each stop instruction image displayed on screen 11a shows a predetermined movement (action) depending on whether the stopped stop switch matches the button press order instructed by the button press order navigation sequence. Here, the movement of the stop instruction image when the stopped stop switch followed the button press order instructed by the button press order navigation sequence (successful stop operation) is called a "success action," and the movement of the stop instruction image when it did not follow the order (failed stop operation) is called a "failure action."

(Successful Actions)
The successful action in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 104. The successful action shown in this figure is executed when the left stop switch 36a is pressed as the first stop operation while the button press sequence navigation indicates that the buttons should be pressed in order (left → middle → right). Note that in this figure, the changes in the display of the first to third stop instruction images when the stop operation of the stop switch becomes effective (see Figure 103(b)) are not shown.

When the player inserts the prescribed number of tokens and operates the start lever 25, as shown in Figure 104(a), the first stop instruction image is displayed on the lower left of screen 11a, the second stop instruction image is displayed in the lower center, and the third stop instruction image is displayed on the lower right. The speaker also outputs the voice "Left!". After the stop switch operation becomes effective, when the player presses the left stop switch 26a, as shown in Figure 104(b), as a success action, the color of the navigation number image NF in the first stop instruction image turns red, and the navigation background image NB shows an explosion-like movement before disappearing. The speaker also outputs the voice "Middle!" indicating that the stop switch to be operated on for the second stop is the middle stop switch 26b. This voice output ("Middle!") when the first stop operation follows the sequence indicated by the executed push-order navigation is also called the "success voice".

After the success action and success sound are executed and output, the second stop instruction image is highlighted, as shown in Figure 104(c), and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change to be the same as the second stop instruction image shown in Figures 104(a) and (b). Subsequently, when the middle stop switch 26b is operated for the second stop, the success action is executed for the second stop instruction image, and the success sound "Right!" is output. Furthermore, when the right stop switch 26c is operated for the third stop, the success action is executed for the third stop instruction image. Here, during the third stop operation, after the third stop instruction image is erased, the sound "Yes!" shown in Figure 103(e) is output instead of the success sound.

In the example of the successful action described above, the highlighting of the second stop instruction image and the changes in size and transparency of the third stop instruction image occurred after the successful action of the first stop instruction image. However, the highlighting of the second stop instruction image and the changes in size and transparency of the third stop instruction image may also be performed simultaneously with the successful action of the first stop instruction image.

(Failed action)
The failure action in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 105. The failure action shown in this figure is executed when the left stop switch 26a is mistakenly pressed as the first stop operation while the reverse pressing sequence (right → middle → left) is instructed by the button press navigation display. Note that in this figure as well, the changes in the display of the first to third stop instruction images when the stop operation of the stop switch becomes effective (see Figure 103(b)) are not shown.

When the player inserts the prescribed number of tokens and operates the start lever 25, Figure 1
As shown in 05(a), the third stop instruction image is displayed on the lower left of screen 11a, the second stop instruction image is displayed in the lower center, and the first stop instruction image is displayed on the lower right. The speaker also outputs the voice "Right!". After the stop operation of the stop switch becomes effective, if the player accidentally presses the left stop switch 26a, as shown in Figure 105(b), as a failure action, the display of the first to third stop instruction images will each switch to a smoke-like image, and the speaker will output the voice "What are you doing!" as a failure voice.

Then, the smoke images displayed at the positions of the first to third stop instruction images fade out, and only the AT gameplay image (ATP) is displayed, as shown in Figure 105(c). However, the game continues, and it goes without saying that the middle reel 3b and the right reel 3c are still spinning.

Furthermore, regarding the aforementioned failure action, if the stop switch was stopped in a sequence different from the executed button press navigation, all stop instruction images displayed at that time would perform the failure action (switching to a smoke image and fading out). However, it may be possible to have only the stop instruction image corresponding to the stop switch performed the failure action when a stop switch different from the instructed sequence is stopped, and then the remaining stop instruction images be deleted.

<Press button sequence guidance when power is restored after an outage>
Next, referring to Figures 106 to 112, we will explain what state the button-pressing navigation display is in when the power is cut off during the button-pressing navigation display and then restored after the power is turned back on. In Figures 106 to 112, the diagrams shown above each figure show the events that occurred during gameplay in chronological order, and below them are the display on screen 11a and the content of the audio output from the speaker for the main events that occurred.

First, referring to Figure 106, we will explain the state of the button-pressing navigation animation when the first stop operation is successful, the power is cut off (also simply called "power outage") before the second stop operation is performed, and then the power is restored during gameplay. Furthermore, the following explanation uses the case where the button-pressing navigation animation instructs the player to press the buttons in the correct order as an example.

First, when the start lever 25 is operated, a push-order navigation animation is executed, instructing the player to press the buttons in the correct order, as shown in Figure 106(a). Then, after the stop switch operation becomes effective, when the player performs the first stop operation with the left stop switch 26a, the success action of the first stop instruction image is performed, as shown in Figure 106(b), and a success sound, "Middle!", is output from the speaker. Then, as shown in Figure 106(c), the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change. At this time, the middle reel 3b and the right reel 3c, which were not stopped, continue to rotate.

Here, if a power outage occurs before the second stop operation is performed, and then power is restored, the middle reel 3b and right reel 3c, which were rotating before the power outage, will start rotating again, and the successful action of the first stop instruction image will be performed on screen 11a, as shown in Figure 106(d). However, the success sound "Middle!" is not output. Then, as shown in Figure 106(e), the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change, indicating a standby state for the second stop operation.

Note that in Figure 106(d), the success voice message "It's in!" is not output from the speaker when the power is restored, but it may be configured to output the success voice message. Also, in the above explanation, when the power is restored, the success action of the first stop instruction image is performed, followed by the highlighting of the second stop instruction image and the change in size and transparency of the third stop instruction image (see Figures 106(d) and (e)). However, as shown in Figure 106(f), for example, the success action of the first stop instruction image, the highlighting of the second stop instruction image, and the change in size and transparency of the third stop instruction image may be performed at the same time, and then only the first stop instruction image may be erased.

Next, referring to Figure 107, we will explain the state of the button-pressing navigation sequence when the first stop operation fails and a power outage occurs before the second stop operation is performed, followed by a power restoration, in a game where a button-pressing navigation sequence instructing the player to press buttons in order is being executed. First, when the start lever 25 is operated, the button-pressing navigation sequence instructing the player to press buttons in order is executed, as shown in Figure 107(a). Then, after the stop switch operation becomes effective, when the player performs the first stop operation with the middle stop switch 26b, the failure actions shown in the first to third stop instruction images are performed, as shown in Figure 107(b). After a failure sound, "What are you doing!", is output from the speaker, the button-pressing navigation sequence ends, as shown in Figure 107(c). At this time, the left reel 3a and the right reel 3c, which were not stopped, continue to rotate.

Here, if a power outage occurs before the second stop operation is performed, and then power is restored, the left reel 3a and right reel 3c, which were rotating before the power outage, will start rotating again. However, as shown in Figure 107(d), the push-button navigation animation does not resume on screen 11a, and only the animation images ATP, which are executed during AT gameplay, are displayed.

Thus, in a game where a button-press navigation prompt is displayed, if a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is successful, the success action of the first stop instruction image is performed and the second stop instruction image is highlighted upon power restoration. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the button-press navigation prompt, the player can understand the content of the most recent stop operation performed before the outage upon power restoration. Conversely, if the most recent stop operation performed before the outage was unsuccessful, the button-press navigation prompt will not resume upon power restoration, thus reducing the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play immediately after power restoration.

Furthermore, in the case of power loss and subsequent power restoration during the execution of the button-press navigation sequence shown in Figure 107(a), if the power is restored after a failed stop operation (due to the middle stop switch 26b being pressed as the first stop operation), instead of executing the button-press navigation sequence as shown in Figure 107(d), the system may, for example, execute a failure action as shown in Figure 107(e) and then terminate the button-press navigation sequence as shown in Figure 107(f). In this configuration, if the most recent stop operation performed before the power loss failed, the failure action will be executed upon power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to know that the button-press navigation sequence was executed before the power loss, and to understand that the most recent stop operation before the power loss failed.

Next, while Figures 106 and 107 above described the case where the power was interrupted and restored after the first stop operation in a game where the button-pressing order navigation was performed, we will now refer to Figures 108 and 109 to describe the state of the button-pressing order navigation when the power is interrupted after the first stop operation is successful and the second stop operation is performed, but before the third stop operation is performed, and then the power is restored. Furthermore, the following explanation uses the case where the button-pressing order navigation instructs the player to press the buttons in the correct order as an example.

First, as shown in Figure 108(a), when the start lever 25 is operated, a push-order navigation animation is performed instructing the player to press the buttons in the correct order. Then, after the stop switch operation becomes effective, when the player performs the first stop operation with the left stop switch 26a, the success action of the first stop instruction image is performed, and after the success sound "Middle!" is output from the speaker, the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change (not shown). At this time, the middle reel 3b and the right reel 3c, which were not stopped, continue to rotate.

Next, when the player operates the middle stop switch 26b to the second stop, the successful action of the second stop instruction image is performed, as shown in Figure 109(b). After the success sound "Right!" is output from the speaker, the third stop instruction image is highlighted, as shown in Figure 109(c). Furthermore, the remaining right reel 3c continues to rotate.

Here, if a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, and then power is restored, the right reel 3c, which was rotating before the power outage, will start rotating again, and the successful action of the second stop instruction image will be performed on screen 11a, as shown in Figure 108(d). However, the success voice message "Right!" is not output. Then, as shown in Figure 108(e), the third stop instruction image is highlighted, and the system enters a standby state for the third stop operation.

In this manner, if a power outage occurs during a game where a push-button navigation sequence is displayed, after the first and second stop operations have been successfully completed, the success action for the second stop instruction image will be performed before the third stop instruction image is highlighted, rather than the success action for the first stop instruction image being performed upon power restoration. Since the success action for the second stop instruction image presupposes the success of the first stop operation, even if a power outage occurs during a push-button navigation sequence, the information provided to the player upon power restoration will be simplified as much as possible. This allows the player to understand the game's progress at the time of the power outage and the details of the most recent stop operation performed before the power outage.

Note that in Figure 108(d), the success voice message "Right!" is not output from the speaker upon power restoration, but it may be configured to output the success voice message. Also, in the above explanation, the third stop instruction image was highlighted after the success action of the second stop instruction image was performed upon power restoration (see Figures 108(d) and (e)). However, as shown in Figure 108(f), for example, the success action of the second stop instruction image and the highlighting of the third stop instruction image may be performed at the same time, and then only the second stop instruction image may be erased.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 108, the success action for the second stop instruction image was performed without executing the success action for the first stop instruction image upon power restoration. However, as shown in Figure 109, for example, the success action for the first stop instruction image may be executed first upon power restoration. That is, if a power outage occurs after the success of the second stop operation but before the third stop operation is performed, and then power is restored, the right reel 3c, which was rotating before the power outage, will start rotating again, and the success action for the first stop instruction image will be performed on screen 11a as shown in Figure 109(a). However, the success voice message "Right!" will not be output. Next, as shown in Figure 109(b), the first stop display is erased, the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image are changed, after which the success action for the second stop instruction image is performed as shown in Figure 109(c). After that, as shown in Figure 109(d), the third stop instruction image is highlighted, and the system enters a standby state for the third stop operation.

Thus, in a game where a button-press navigation prompt is displayed, if a power outage occurs after the first and second stop operations are successful, the success action for the second stop instruction image is performed before the third stop instruction image is highlighted, rather than the success action for the first stop instruction image being performed upon power restoration. Here, the fact that the success action for the second stop instruction image was performed upon power restoration means that at least the first stop operation was successful before the power outage. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during a button-press navigation prompt, by providing the player with the necessary information as simply as possible upon power restoration, the player can understand the game's progress at the time of the power outage and the content of the most recent stop operation performed before the power outage.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 109, by resuming the button press navigation animation upon power restoration and redisplaying the successful action during the first stop operation, the sequence of stop operations in a game where a power outage occurred can be clearly understood, and the remaining stop operations can be smoothly resumed after error recovery. In the example shown in Figure 109, the successful action during the first stop operation was displayed sequentially as follows: successful action during the first stop operation → highlighting of the second stop instruction image → successful action during the second stop operation → highlighting of the third stop instruction image. However, upon power restoration, the successful actions during the first and second stop operations, along with the highlighting of the third stop instruction image, may be displayed simultaneously. In this case, the load on image processing during power restoration can be reduced, and the player can easily understand the flow of the game leading up to the power outage.

Figure 109 above explained the case where the first stop operation was successful, followed by the second stop operation, but a power outage occurred before the third stop operation. Next, referring to Figure 110, we will explain the case where the first stop operation was successful, the second stop operation failed, and then a power outage occurred before the third stop operation. In the following explanation, we will use the case where the button press sequence navigation instructs a sequential pressing pattern (left → right → middle) as an example.

First, when the start lever 25 is operated, a push-order navigation sequence is executed, instructing the player to press the reels in a sequential manner. As part of this navigation sequence, the first stop instruction image is displayed on the lower left of screen 11a, the third stop instruction image is displayed in the lower center, and the second stop instruction image is displayed on the lower right. Additionally, the speaker emits the voice message "Left!" (not shown). After the stop switch operation becomes effective, when the player performs the first stop operation with the left stop switch 26a, as shown in Figure 109(a), the successful action of the first stop instruction image is performed, and the speaker emits the success voice message "Right!". Then, as shown in Figure 109(b), the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change. At this time, the middle reel 3b and the right reel 3c, which were not stopped, continue to rotate.

Next, when the player performs the second stop operation using the middle stop switch 26b, as shown in Figure 109(c), a failure action is performed for the displayed second and third stop instruction images, and after a failure sound "What are you doing!" is output from the speaker, the push-button navigation sequence ends. At this point, a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, and when the power is restored, the right reel 3c, which was rotating before the power outage, starts rotating again. Then, as shown in Figure 110(d), a success action for the first stop instruction image is performed on screen 11a, but the success sound "Middle!" is not output. After that, as shown in Figure 110(e), without outputting a failure sound, failure actions are performed for the second and third stop instruction images, and then, as shown in Figure 110(f), the push-button navigation sequence ends.

Thus, in a game where a button-press navigation sequence is displayed, if a power outage occurs when the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, upon power restoration, the successful action for the first stop instruction image is performed, followed by the successful action for the second stop instruction image, and then the button-press navigation sequence ends. Therefore, the player can clearly understand the game progression during the power outage, as well as which stop switches were successful and which were unsuccessful, at a glance.

In the example shown in Figure 110, the first stop operation was successful, but the second stop operation failed, and then a power outage occurred before the third stop operation could be performed. The explanation described the case where the button-press navigation sequence is resumed when the power is restored. However, as in the case shown in Figure 107(d), the button-press navigation sequence does not need to be resumed when the power is restored. In this way, if the most recent stop operation performed before the power outage failed, the button-press navigation sequence is not resumed when the power is restored, thus reducing the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play immediately after the power is restored.

Furthermore, regarding the execution of the button-pressing navigation sequence, in addition to the above cases, the following cases (1) to (10) are also possible when the power is restored in response to a power outage during the execution of the button-pressing navigation sequence.

(1) If a power outage occurs after all reels have started rotating but before the first stop operation, the first stop instruction image, second stop instruction image, and third stop instruction image (see Figure 103(a)) displayed when the start lever was operated will be displayed again upon power restoration. When redisplaying the images, the type of stop switch to be used for the first stop operation may be announced audibly again, and then the button press navigation sequence may be resumed. Alternatively, the button press navigation sequence may be resumed without announcing the type of stop switch to be used for the first stop operation (in this case, the audible button press instructions will resume after the first stop operation). With this configuration, since the button press navigation sequence resumes from the first stop operation upon power restoration, the risk of the player mistakenly stopping the stop switch in the wrong order and missing out on a favorable game result is reduced.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs after all reels have started rotating but before the first stop operation, the type of stop switch to be used for the first stop operation will be announced again by voice when the power is restored. However, if a power outage occurs after the first stop operation has been performed (including cases (2) to (9) described below), the system may be configured to resume the button press navigation without announcing the type of stop switch to be used next when the power is restored. Here, "the type of stop switch to be used next" will be the type of stop switch to be used for the second stop operation if the power outage occurs after the first stop operation but before the second stop operation. Also, if the power outage occurs after the second stop operation but before the third stop operation, it will be the type of stop switch to be used for the third stop operation.

(2) If a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation but before the second stop operation is performed, the failure action will be executed upon power restoration, and then the button-press navigation sequence will end. Similarly, if a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation, followed by the second stop operation but before the third stop operation, the failure action will be executed upon power restoration, and then the button-press navigation sequence will end. With this configuration, if a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation but before the second stop operation, and if a power outage occurs after a second stop operation in a game where the first stop operation failed but before the third stop operation, the failure action will be executed upon power restoration. Therefore, in the game resumed after power restoration, the player can clearly understand that they failed the stop operation in the game where the button-press navigation sequence was performed, and can recognize that they do not need to pay attention to the order of pressing the remaining stop switches.

(3) If a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation but before the second stop operation is performed, the button-press navigation sequence will end without executing the failure action upon power restoration. However, if a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation, followed by the second stop operation but before the third stop operation, the failure action will be executed upon power restoration before the button-press navigation sequence ends. With this configuration, if a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation but before the second stop operation, the failure action will not be executed upon power restoration, thus reducing the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play after power restoration. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation, followed by the second stop operation but before the third stop operation, the failure action will be executed upon power restoration. This allows the player to clearly understand that they failed the stop operation in a game where the button-press navigation sequence was executed upon power restoration.

(4) If a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation but before the second stop operation, the failure action will be executed upon power restoration, and then the button-press navigation sequence will end. However, if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation but before the third stop operation following a failure in the first stop operation, the button-press navigation sequence will end without executing a failure action upon power restoration. In this configuration, if a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation but before the second stop operation, the failure action will be executed upon power restoration. This allows the player to clearly understand that they failed a stop operation in a game where the button-press navigation sequence was executed, and to recognize that they do not need to pay attention to the order of the remaining stop switches. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation but before the third stop operation in a game where the first stop operation failed, the failure action will not be executed upon power restoration. This reduces the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play after power restoration.

(5) In both cases—when a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation but before the second stop operation, and when a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is performed but before the third stop operation is performed, the button press navigation sequence ends without executing a failure action upon power restoration. With this configuration, if a power outage occurs after a failure in the first stop operation but before the second stop operation, and if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation in a game where the first stop operation failed but before the third stop operation, the failure action is not executed upon power restoration. This reduces the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play after power restoration.

(6) If the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, the failure action will be executed upon power restoration, and then the button-press navigation sequence will end. Similarly, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then the third stop operation is performed, but a power outage occurs before it becomes possible to insert tokens for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), the failure action will be executed upon power restoration, and then the button-press navigation sequence will end. With this configuration, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, and if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then the third stop operation is performed, and then a power outage occurs before it becomes possible to insert tokens for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), the failure action will be executed upon power restoration. This has the effect of allowing the player to clearly understand that they failed a stop operation in the game where the button-press navigation sequence was performed when the game resumed after power restoration.

(7) If the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, the push-button navigation sequence will end without executing the failure action when the power is restored. However, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and the third stop operation is performed, and a power outage occurs before it becomes possible to insert tokens for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a re-play), the failure action will be executed when the power is restored before the push-button navigation sequence ends. With this configuration, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the failure action will not be executed when the power is restored, thus reducing the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play during the game after the power is restored. Furthermore, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then the third stop operation is performed, but before it becomes possible to insert tokens for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), a failure action will be executed when the power is restored. This allows the player to clearly understand that they failed the stop operation in the game where the push-button navigation was performed upon power restoration.

(8) If the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, the failure action will be performed when the power is restored, and then the push-button navigation sequence will end. However, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then the third stop operation is performed, and a power outage occurs before it becomes possible to insert tokens for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a re-play), the push-button navigation sequence will end without performing a failure action when the power is restored. With this configuration, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the failure action will be performed when the power is restored, so the player can clearly understand that they failed the stop operation in the game in which the push-button navigation sequence was performed when the power was restored. Furthermore, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then the third stop operation is performed, but a power outage occurs before it becomes possible to insert tokens for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), the failure action will not be executed when the power is restored. This reduces the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play after the power is restored.

(9) In both cases—when the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, and when the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, followed by the third stop operation, and then a power outage occurs before it becomes possible to insert tokens for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay)—the push-button navigation sequence ends without executing a failure action upon power restoration. With this configuration, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, and if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, followed by the third stop operation, and then a power outage occurs before it becomes possible to insert tokens for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay)—no failure action is executed upon power restoration. This reduces the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play after power restoration.

(10) If a power outage occurs and power is restored after the successful completion of the first to third stop operations, the push-button navigation sequence will be displayed in the following order upon power restoration: successful action for the first stop operation → highlighting of the second stop instruction image → successful action for the second stop operation → highlighting of the third stop instruction image → successful action for the third stop operation. Alternatively, the successful actions for the first to third stop operations may be executed simultaneously (in this case, the highlighting of each stop instruction image will be omitted). With this configuration, upon power restoration, the successful actions from the first to the third stop operations will be executed again. This allows the player to re-experience the satisfaction and sense of accomplishment of obtaining a favorable game result by stopping the stop switches in the order instructed by the push-button navigation sequence, thereby enhancing the player's motivation and interest in the game.

<Press button sequence guidance during error recovery>
Next, referring to Figure 111, we will explain the state of the button-press navigation animation when a recoverable error occurs during the button-press sequence animation, and then the cause of the error is resolved and the player recovers from the error by operating the reset switch. This figure illustrates the state of the button-press navigation animation when the first stop operation is successful in a game in which the button-press navigation animation is performed, and a recoverable error occurs before the second stop operation is performed, and then the player recovers from the error. Furthermore, the following explanation uses the case where the button-press navigation animation instructs the player to press the buttons in the correct order as an example.

First, when the start lever 25 is operated, a push-order navigation animation is performed, instructing the player to press the buttons in the correct order, as shown in Figure 111(a). Then, after the stop switch operation becomes effective, when the player performs the first stop operation with the left stop switch 26a, the success action of the first stop instruction image is performed, as shown in Figure 111(b), and a success sound "Middle!" is output from the speaker. Then, as shown in Figure 111(c), the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change. At this time, the middle reel 3b and the right reel 3c, which were not stopped, continue to rotate.

If a recovery error occurs before the second stop operation is performed, the AT gameplay animations and button-press navigation animations displayed on screen 11a will switch to an error message image (error screen) displaying "An error has occurred. Please call an attendant." as shown in Figure 111(d). Additionally, an audio message "An error has occurred" will be output from the speaker. The AT gameplay animations and button-press navigation animations displayed on screen 11a (hereinafter collectively referred to as "animation images") and the error screen image are displayed on different layers.

The error screen image layer (error screen layer) is positioned above the performance image layer (performance image layer), and the error screen layer is displayed superimposed on top of the performance image layer. Therefore, conceptually, even while the error screen shown in Figure 111(d) is displayed, the performance images and push-button navigation images during AT gameplay continue to be displayed on the performance image layer, but these performance images are obscured by the error screen.

After the error screen is displayed, once the cause of the error is removed and the system recovers from the error, the error screen disappears, and the performance screen (see Figure 111(c)) that was previously hidden by the error screen becomes visible again on screen 11a, as shown in Figure 111(e). In other words, when the system recovers from a recoverable error, a push-button navigation performance highlighting the second stop instruction image is displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the first stop operation was successful and to understand the content of the most recent stop operation performed before the error occurred.

Alternatively, contrary to the example shown in Figure 111(e), the button press sequence navigation may be restarted upon error recovery, and the successful action from the first stop operation may be displayed again. In this case, the sequence of stop operations in the game where the error occurred can be clearly understood, and the remaining stop operations can be smoothly resumed after error recovery.

<Push button navigation during power outage recovery when a rare role is won>
In Figures 103 to 111 described above, we explained an example of a push-order navigation performance that is executed when a condition device that dispenses the most medals when the stop switch is operated in a specific order, such as the condition device for winning prizes J1 to J12 in the second embodiment (see Figure 88), is activated by an internal lottery. Next, referring to Figure 112, we will explain the push-order navigation performance when a condition device for rare roles, such as winning prizes A to E in the second embodiment, is activated by an internal lottery.

First, when the start lever 25 is operated and the rare role condition device is activated by the internal lottery, as shown in Figure 112(a), rare role winning images are displayed on the lower left, lower center, and lower right of screen 11a. These images consist of a navigation background image NB and a rare role image NR indicating that the rare role condition device has been activated. These three rare role winning images are the same size and none of them are transparent. By displaying all rare role winning images similarly in this way, it is indicated that the order of button presses is irrelevant (the number of medals dispensed does not differ depending on the order of button presses).

Then, after the stop switch operation becomes effective, if the player performs the first stop operation, for example, by pressing the middle stop switch 26b, the rare role winning image displayed in the lower center of screen 11a will perform a success action, as shown in Figure 112(b). Specifically, the color of the rare role image NR will turn red, and its navigation background image NB will move as if it were exploding before being erased. Note that in the push-order navigation performance when the rare role condition device is activated, no success sound will be output from the speaker. Next, if the player performs the second stop operation, for example, by pressing the left stop switch 26a, the rare role winning image displayed in the lower left of screen 11a will perform a success action, as shown in Figure 112(c).

Here, if a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, and then power is restored, the right reel 3c, which was rotating before the power outage, will start rotating again, and the success action for the rare win image (corresponding to the middle stop switch 26b that was stopped in the first stop operation) displayed in the lower center of screen 11a, as shown in Figure 112(d), will be performed. Next, the success action for the rare win image (corresponding to the left stop switch 26a that was stopped in the second stop operation) displayed in the lower left of screen 11a, as shown in Figure 112(e), will be performed, and then, as shown in Figure 112(f), the third stop instruction image will be highlighted, and the system will enter a standby state for the third stop operation.

Thus, in the push-button navigation system of this embodiment, even if a power outage occurs during a game in which the rare role condition device has been activated, the game's progress up to the point of the power outage can be understood upon power restoration. Furthermore, in the push-button navigation system for rare role wins, instead of performing the actions shown in Figures 112(b) and (c) each time a stop switch is operated, it is also possible to simply erase the rare role win images corresponding to the stopped stop switches sequentially. In this case, upon power restoration, the actions associated with the stop operations shown in Figures 112(d) and (e) will not be performed, and the rare role win images will be erased in the order they were stopped. Alternatively, the image shown in Figure 112(a) may be displayed continuously until the third stop operation is performed, at which point all rare role win images may be erased simultaneously. In this case, upon power restoration, the image shown in Figure 112(a) may be redisplayed, and then all rare role win images may be erased simultaneously, or the push-button navigation system for rare role wins may not be performed upon power restoration.

≪Duplicate operation of multiple main switches≫
Next, we will explain how the reception status of the main switches changes when multiple main switches are operated (pressed), referring to Figures 113 to 117. Here, a main switch refers to a switch that outputs an on/off signal to the main control board 60, and in response to that on/off signal, the main control means 100 performs control related to the progress of the game. Specifically, the 1-BET switch 22, MAX-BET switch 23, settlement switch 24, start lever 25, and stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c shown in Figures 1 and 2 correspond to the main switches. In the following, when referring to the 1-BET switch 22 and the MAX-BET switch 23 together, we will simply refer to them as "BET switches".

On the other hand, a switch that outputs an on/off signal to the sub-control board 70, and in response to that on/off signal, the sub-control means 200 performs control related to the performance, etc., is called a sub-switch. Specifically, the selection button 54 and the confirmation button 55 shown in Figures 1 and 2 are sub-switches.

<1-Duplicate operation of the BET switch and MAX-BET switch>
(With the MAX-BET switch in the ON position, operate the 1-BET switch after powering on the device.)
First, referring to the timing chart shown in Figure 113(a), we will explain the operation acceptance state when the 1-BET switch 22 is operated after the power is turned on while the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated. First, when the power switch 81 (see Figure 2) is turned on while the MAX-BET switch 23 is in the ON state, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a (see Figure 1) lights up without inserting any more medals from the stored medals until a predetermined number is reached.

Here, the conditions for the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a to light up (in other words, the conditions under which it becomes possible to insert tokens by operating the BET switch) include: having at least the number of tokens stored equal to the specified number (e.g., 3 tokens) minus the number of tokens already inserted; the next game not being a re-play; all reels being stopped; the specified number of tokens not already inserted; and the stored tokens not being refunded. Therefore, if the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a lights up when the power is turned on, it can be said that the conditions for inserting tokens by operating the BET switch have been met.

If the MAX-BET switch 23 remains on after the power switch 81 is turned on, and the 1-BET switch 22 is then turned on, one medal will be inserted from the stored medals. Each time the 1-BET switch 22 is turned on, the number of inserted medals increases by one. Once three medals (the specified number) have been inserted, the game can begin, and the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a turns off. Alternatively, instead of operating the 1-BET switch 22, medals may be inserted into the medal slot 21 (see Figure 1).

Thus, when the MAX-BET switch 23 is turned on while the machine is in a state where medal insertion is possible via the BET switch, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a lights up to indicate that medal insertion is possible. Even if the MAX-BET switch 23 remains in the ON state, medals can still be inserted by operating the 1-BET switch 22.

Therefore, even if the MAX-BET switch 23 is accidentally operated by a person's hand or some object and the power is turned on, medals will not be inserted unintentionally. Furthermore, even in this state, medals can still be inserted by operating the 1-BET switch 22, thus minimizing disruption to the game's progress. Moreover, even if the MAX-BET switch 23 is in the ON position when the power is turned on, for example, if the operated part of the MAX-BET switch 23 becomes stuck in the depressed position due to a malfunction, or if the main control means 100 malfunctions and detects the MAX-BET switch 23 as ON even though it is not pressed, the BET switch indicator lamp 46a will light up, accurately indicating that medal insertion is possible.

(With the 1-BET switch in the ON position, operate the MAX-BET switch after powering on the device.)
Next, referring to the timing chart shown in Figure 113(b), we will explain the operation acceptance state when the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated after the power is turned on while the 1-BET switch 22 is being operated. First, when the power switch 81 is turned on while the 1-BET switch 22 is in the ON state, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a lights up without inserting a single medal from the stored medals.

If the MAX-BET switch 23 is turned on while the 1-BET switch 22 remains on after the power switch 81 is turned on, tokens will be inserted from the stored tokens until the predetermined number is reached. That is, for example, if there were 0 tokens inserted before the power cut, 3 tokens will be inserted; if there was 1 token inserted before the power cut, 2 tokens will be inserted. Once the predetermined number of tokens has been inserted, the game can begin, and the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a turns off.

Thus, when the 1-BET switch 22 is ON and the power is turned on while the BET switch is enabled, it indicates that the machine is ready to receive coins.
Even if the BET switch indicator lamp 46a is lit and the 1-BET switch 22 remains in the ON state, medals can still be inserted by operating the MAX-BET switch 23.

Therefore, even if the 1-BET switch 22 is accidentally operated by a person's hand or some object and the power is turned on, coins will not be inserted unintentionally. Furthermore, even in this state, coins can still be inserted by operating the MAX-BET switch 23, thus minimizing disruption to the game's progress. Moreover, even if the 1-BET switch 22 is in the ON position when the power is turned on, for example, if the operated part of the 1-BET switch 22 becomes stuck in the depressed position due to some malfunction, or if the main control means 100 malfunctions and detects the 1-BET switch 22 as ON even though it is not pressed, the BET switch indicator lamp 46a will light up, accurately indicating that coin insertion is possible.

<Duplicate operation of the settlement switch and BET switch>
Next, referring to the timing chart shown in Figure 114(a), we will explain the operation reception state when the BET switch is operated after the power is turned on while the settlement switch 24 is operated. First, when the power switch 81 is turned on while the settlement switch 24 is in the ON position, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a (see Figure 1) lights up, but the hopper 50 (see Figure 2) remains OFF and does not operate, so the stored tokens are not refunded (i.e., settled) to the token storage tray 42 (see Figure 1).

Furthermore, even if the MAX-BET switch 23 is turned on while the settlement switch 24 remains on after the power switch 81 is turned on, and despite the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a being lit, no tokens will be inserted from the stored tokens until the specified number is reached. Also, even if the 1-BET switch 22 is turned on in this state, no token will be inserted from the stored tokens.

Thus, when the payout switch 24 is turned on while the machine is in a state where medal insertion is possible via the BET switch, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a lights up, indicating that medal insertion is possible. However, medals cannot be inserted even by operating the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23. Furthermore, even if medals are inserted into the medal slot 21, they are not accepted and are returned to the game medal storage tray 42.

Therefore, even if the payout switch 24 is operated accidentally or due to a malfunction and the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent unintended payout of medals from the hopper. Furthermore, even if the payout switch 24 remains operated after the power is turned on, preventing medal insertion via the BET switch, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a remains lit. This allows the player to know that medals are being stored, preventing them from stopping playing and leaving their seat without claiming the stored medals.

In the example shown in Figure 114(a), if the settlement switch 24 was continuously operated after power-on, the BET switch prevented further medal insertion. However, it may be possible to enable medal insertion via the BET switch. The operation acceptance state of the MAX-BET switch 23 in this configuration will be explained with reference to the timing chart shown in Figure 114(b). Here, in the example shown in Figure 114(b), the number of medals inserted before the power outage is assumed to be 0.

First, when the settlement switch 24 is ON and the power switch 81 is turned ON, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a lights up, but the hopper 50 remains OFF and does not operate, so the stored tokens are not refunded (i.e., settled) to the token storage tray 42. Then, if the settlement switch 24 remains ON after the power switch 81 is turned ON and the MAX-BET switch 23 is turned ON, three tokens are inserted from the stored tokens. After three tokens are inserted, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a turns OFF. Although not shown in the diagram, tokens can also be inserted using the 1-BET switch 22, and tokens inserted through the token slot 21 are also accepted.

Thus, when the payout switch 24 is ON while the system is powered on and medal insertion is possible via the BET switch, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a, which indicates that medal insertion is possible, lights up, and medal insertion via the BET switch becomes possible. This prevents unintended medal payouts from the hopper even if the payout switch 24 is operated accidentally or malfunctionally while the power is turned on. Furthermore, even if the payout switch 24 continues to be operated after the power is turned on, medals can still be inserted via the BET switch, minimizing disruption to the game's progress.

<Multiple stop switches being operated simultaneously>
Next, referring to the timing chart shown in Figure 115, the stop operation reception state of the stop switches when multiple stop switches are operated will be explained. First, when all reels are rotating and the left stop operation reception lamp 46ka, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb, and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc are lit (i.e., the stop operation of all stop switches is active), the left stop switch 26a is stopped, and the left reel 3a is controlled to stop. Here, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc are also turned off for a very short time while the left stop switch 26a is stopped, but they light up again when the stop operation of the left stop switch 26a is completed. In contrast, the left stop operation reception lamp 46ka remains off even after the stop operation of the left stop switch 26a is completed because the rotation of the corresponding left reel 3a has stopped.

Subsequently, when the power switch 81 is turned off, the respective stop operation reception lamps turn off, and the rotation of the middle reel 3b and the right reel 3c also stops. In this state, for example, if the power switch 81 is turned on while the middle stop switch 26b is stopped, the middle reel 3b and the right reel 3c will start rotating again, but the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc will remain off. Therefore, even if the right stop switch 26c is stopped, the right reel 3c will not be stopped. On the other hand, once the stop operation of the middle stop switch 26b is completed, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc light up, and the stop operations of the middle stop switch 26b and the right stop switch 26c become effective.

In this state, if the left stop switch 26a, which has already been stopped, is stopped, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc will turn off. While the left stop switch 26a is stopped, stopping the middle stop switch 26b and the right stop switch 26c will not control the stopping of the middle reel 3b and the right reel 3c. Then, once the stopping operation of the left stop switch 26a is completed, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc will light up again, and the stopping operations of the middle stop switch 26b and the right stop switch 26c will become effective.

When the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc are lit, for example, if the middle stop switch 26b is stopped, the middle reel 3b is controlled to stop, and while the stop operation is in progress, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc turn off. At this time, the right reel 3c continues to rotate. Then, if the middle stop switch 26b is stopped, and the right stop switch 26c, which has not yet been stopped, is also stopped, and then the operation to stop the middle stop switch 26b is terminated while only the operation to stop the right stop switch 26c continues, the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc remains off, and the right reel 3c continues to rotate without any stop control being performed.

When the right stop switch 26c is stopped, the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc lights up again, and the stop operation of the right stop switch 26c becomes active. Then, when the right stop switch 26c is stopped again, the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc turns off, and the stop control of the right reel 3c is initiated.

As mentioned above, even if the power is turned on while stopping the stop switch corresponding to a reel that is rotating before a power outage, the rotation of that reel will not stop. Furthermore, the stop operation confirmation lamps corresponding to other stop switches are off, and stopping those other stop switches will not stop the rotation of the corresponding reels. Therefore, even if the power is turned on while a stop switch is accidentally stopped, the reels will not stop unintentionally, preventing the player from missing out on winning combinations from the internal lottery and thus causing disadvantage.

Next, in the example shown in Figure 115, when a stop switch that has already been stopped is stopped again, the stop operations of other stop switches that have not yet been stopped are disabled. However, the operations of other stop switches that have not yet been stopped may be enabled. The stop operation acceptance state of the stop switches in such a case will be explained below with reference to Figure 116.

In Figure 116, first, when all reels are rotating and the left stop operation reception lamp 46ka, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb, and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc are lit (i.e., all stop switches are activated), the left stop switch 26a is activated, and the left reel 3a is stopped. While the left stop switch 26a is activated, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc are also turned off, but they light up again when the left stop switch 26a operation is completed. In contrast, the left stop operation reception lamp 46ka remains off even after the left stop switch 26a operation is completed, because the rotation of the corresponding left reel 3a has stopped.

Here, even if the left stop switch 26a, which has already been stopped, is stopped again, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc remain lit, maintaining the effective stop operation state of the middle stop switch 26b and the right stop switch 26c. Therefore, if the left stop switch 26a is stopped and, for example, the middle stop switch 26b is stopped, the middle reel 3b will be stopped. Also, while the left stop switch 26a and the middle stop switch 26b are stopped, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc remain off.

Furthermore, even if the stopping operation of the middle stop switch 26b is terminated in this state and only the stopping operation of the left stop switch 26a is continued, the middle stop operation reception lamp 46kb and the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc remain off, and the stopping operation of the right stop switch 26c, which has not yet been stopped, is invalidated. When all stop switches are not stopped, the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc, which corresponds to the right reel 3c that is still rotating, lights up, and the stopping operation of the right stop switch 26c becomes effective. Then, when the right stop switch 26c is stopped, the right stop operation reception lamp 46kc turns off, and the stopping control of the right reel 3c is performed.

Thus, when there are multiple stop switches with enabled stop functions, if one stop switch is deactivated, the stop functions of the other stop switches are deactivated for as long as that stop function remains active. Therefore, the game's progress can be halted during that time. For example, if a game is progressing in stages with each stop operation, and you want to ensure you see the current stage of the game, continuing to deactivate the stop function will allow you to maintain the current stage of the game even if other stop switches are unintentionally deactivated, and there is no risk of unintended reel stops.

Furthermore, even if a stop switch that has already been stopped is stopped again, the stop operations of other stop switches will not be invalidated, thus minimizing disruption to the game's progress. Additionally, if a stop switch that is already stopped is stopped, and both stop switches have already been stopped, the stop operations of the remaining stop switches will not become effective until both stop switches have been stopped. This allows for a clearer and more controlled approach to stopping the remaining stop switches by the player.

<Duplicate operation of other main switches while the settlement switch is being operated>
In this embodiment, the main switches change between being enabled and disabled depending on the progress of the game. Specifically, as shown in the "Game Progression,""Enabled Main Switches," and "Disabled Main Switches" columns of the table in Figure 117, while all reels have stopped and the game has ended and the machine is in a game standby state, the 1-BET switch 22, MAX-BET switch 23, and settlement switch 24 are enabled, while the start lever 25 and stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are disabled. Furthermore, when a predetermined number of tokens are inserted in the game standby state, the start lever 25 becomes enabled in addition to the settlement switch 24, but the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c remain disabled.

Then, after the prescribed number of tokens have been inserted, the start lever 25 is operated and reels 3a, 3b, and 3c begin to rotate. At this point, the stop switches corresponding to the rotating reels become active, and the stop switches corresponding to already stopped reels become inactive. Furthermore, while even one reel is rotating, the operation of the settlement switch 24 and the start lever 25 is also disabled. As shown in Figures 115 and 116, while a stop switch with an active stop operation is being operated, all stop operation reception lamps turn off, and the stop operations of all stop switches become inactive.

More specifically, while the first stop switch remains in the stopped state, the other two stop switches are disabled. Furthermore, when the second stop operation is performed, the first stop switch is already disabled, and while the second stop switch remains in the stopped state, the stop switch corresponding to the last rotating reel is disabled.

Furthermore, if the stop switch that has been stopped in the third stop operation remains stopped, the operation of the 1-BET switch 22, MAX-BET switch 23, settlement switch 24, and start lever 25 becomes invalid. Here, during the period from when all reels start rotating until all reels stop, when the first to third stop operations are valid, as long as the stop switch is stopped, even if the setting key type switch 83 (see Figure 2) is turned on, it is not possible to transition to the setting confirmation mode described in other embodiments. However, if the setting key type switch 83 is turned on while the stop switch that has been stopped in the third stop operation remains stopped, it may be configured to transition to the setting confirmation mode when the stop operation of the stop switch that has been stopped in the third stop operation is completed (at which time the setting key type switch 83 remains in the ON state).

In this embodiment, when the reset switch 82 (see Figure 2) is turned ON, the main switches, which become active as the game progresses, are disabled while the reset switch 82 is ON. Therefore, as a result, all main switch operations are disabled while the reset switch 82 is ON. On the other hand, even while the reset switch 82 is operated, if the setting key type switch 83 is turned ON, the system can transition to the setting confirmation mode described in other embodiments. For example, in a situation where the system can transition to the setting confirmation mode by turning on the setting key type switch 83, the system can transition to the setting confirmation mode even while the reset switch 82 is ON if the setting key type switch 83 is turned ON.

Furthermore, if the reset switch 82 is turned ON after the third stop operation of the stop switch is performed, but before the stop control for the last rotating reel begins, and the setting key type switch 83 is turned ON after the stop control for the last rotating reel has finished (while the reset switch 82 remains ON), it is also possible to transition to the setting confirmation mode. However, conversely, if the reset switch 82 is turned ON after the third stop operation of the stop switch, but before the stop control for the last rotating reel begins, and the setting key type switch 83 is turned ON after the stop control for the last rotating reel has finished, the system may be configured so that it is not possible to transition to the setting confirmation mode.

Thus, while the stop switch (which is enabled for stopping) is being operated, or while the reset switch 82 is being operated, all main switches are disabled. This eliminates the influence of main switch operations on high-priority processes, such as reel stop control (which affects the game outcome) and recovery from recoverable errors. Furthermore, even while the reset switch 82 is being operated, the system can enter setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even in situations where the reset switch 82 remains on due to a malfunction and cannot be turned off, the setting values can still be checked.

Stage production and stage change production
Next, referring to Figures 118 and 119, the stage effects and stage change effects performed by images displayed on the screen 11a of the image display device 11 of the slot machine 1 will be described. The stage effects performed in this embodiment are effects that are performed when the game is not in a state advantageous to the player, such as a bonus game or AT game. In the stage effects of this embodiment, multiple types of scenes (stages) that serve as the setting for the performance by characters and the like are prepared in advance, and the stages are switched based on predetermined conditions (for example, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the performance lottery performed by the internal lottery or the sub-control means 200). The stage change effect is an effect that is performed when the stage changes in the stage effects.

An example of a stage change animation is shown in Figure 118. This figure illustrates a transition from a stage named "Beach Stage" to a stage named "City Stage." Figure 118(a) shows the animation screen for the Beach Stage. In this figure, screen 11a displays the animation image STG1 for the Beach Stage. The upper left of screen 11a is the stage name display area STGN, where the stage name is displayed; the lower left is the stored coin count display area CRD, where the stored coin count is displayed; and the lower right is the payout count display area PY, where the number of coins dispensed is displayed.
The stage name display area STGN, the stored number display area CRD, and the payout number display area PY are collectively referred to as the UI display.

Here, as shown in the stage change animation diagram 118(b), when displaying a bonus animation image (such as a message like "777 Confirmed" or an image with converging lines) indicating that a bonus game has been confirmed on the animation image STG1 of the beach stage, the UI display is displayed in a way that prevents it from being obscured by the bonus animation image. When the stage change animation begins in the "beach stage," as shown in Figure 118(c), the visible area VA of the screen 11a, where the animation image STG1 and the UI display are visible, gradually narrows. The blank areas of this visible area VA are filled with black, and as the visible area VA narrows, the UI display is also hidden by the black blank areas of the visible area VA.

Eventually, as shown in Figure 118(d), the UI display is completely hidden in the black margin, and finally, as shown in Figure 118(e), the entire screen 11a becomes solid black, completely hiding the beach stage screen. Next, as shown in Figure 118(f), a visible area VA reappears in the center of screen 11a, displaying the central part of the city stage's presentation image STG2. Then, as shown in Figure 118(g), the area of the visible area VA gradually expands, and finally, when the entire screen 11a is filled with the city stage's presentation image STG2, the stage change animation ends.

In this way, the UI display is temporarily hidden during the stage change animation, allowing players to focus their attention on the stage transition rather than the UI content. Furthermore, if the UI display items differ between the previous and subsequent stages, the UI display in the previous stage animation image is hidden, making the transition less jarring to the subsequent animation image.

Next, referring to Figure 119, we will explain the timing of the end of the stage change animation and the volume of the sound effects output during the stage change animation. Here, Figure 119 shows the situation when the stage animation of the beach stage is being performed and the game is played for the minimum play time (4.1 seconds) mentioned above. First, at time _t1 , the start lever 25 is operated, and at time _t2 , the minimum play time is started to be measured and all reels begin to rotate. After all reels have started to rotate, for example, when all reels are rotating at a constant speed and the index of each reel is detected, the stop operation of the stop switch becomes effective, and as a result of the first to third stop operations, all reels stop rotating and the result of the game is determined.

Then, when the prescribed number of tokens are inserted to play the next game, and the start lever 25 is operated at time _t3 , an internal lottery is performed, and if it is determined that the stage will change from the beach stage to the town stage, the stage change animation will begin at time _t3 . At this time, the volume of the background music in the stage change animation will be louder than the volume of the background music in the beach stage.

If the elapsed time from time _t2 has not reached 4.1 seconds when the start lever 25 is operated, a wait process is performed, and when 4.1 seconds have been reached at time _t4 , all reels begin to rotate. After all reels have started to rotate, for example, if all reels are rotating at a constant speed and the index of each reel has been detected, and the stop switch operation becomes effective at time _t5 , then the stage change animation will have finished at least before time _t5 , and the transition to the town stage will be completed. Therefore, when the stop switch operation becomes effective, the UI display can be seen on screen 11a. Note that the volume of the background music in the town stage is lower than the volume of the background music in the stage change animation.

Thus, even when playing for the minimum time, the stage change animation finishes between the operation of the start lever 25 and the activation of the stop switch. Therefore, if the stop switch is activated during a stage transition, there is no risk of confusion regarding which stage the game was played on.

Furthermore, the volume of the background music (BGM) output during the stage change animation is louder than the BGM volume in the stage before the stage change animation began (the beach stage in Figure 119), thus directing the player's attention to the stage change animation. In addition, for example, if the system is to notify the player that they are in a favorable game state by replacing one phrase of the BGM with a special phrase different from the normal phrase, it becomes less likely that the player will miss the BGM containing that special phrase.

Furthermore, while the aforementioned stage change effect involved the visible area (VA) gradually decreasing and then increasing again as the stage switched, other effects could also be used. For example, the process of sand accumulating on the screen could be displayed, with the entire screen covered in an image of accumulated sand, and then the sand falling to the bottom of the screen; a door could close, covering the entire screen, and then reopen; a flash of light could appear on the screen, turning the entire screen completely white, and then gradually becoming white again; or the screen could be covered in a black vortex, which would then gradually fade away.

Furthermore, the UI display may be the number of medals inserted or decorative images displayed on the screen (for example, an image displayed as a border around the screen, like a picture frame). Also, as shown in Figure 119, instead of completing the stage change animation in the game in which the start of the stage change animation is decided, the stage change animation may be made to end before the top switch stop operation becomes effective in the next game. For example, in Figure 119, if the start of the stage change animation is decided by the star lever operation at time _t1 , the stage change animation may be started at the time of the third stop operation or when all reels stop in that game, or when medals are inserted for the next game, and the stage change animation may be completed before the stop switch stop operation becomes effective in the next game (i.e., by time _t5 ). In addition, the volume of the background music in the stage animation immediately before the start of the stage change animation may be 0 (zero), i.e., silent.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The following describes the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "fourth embodiment slot machine") with additional reference to Figures 120 to 132. First, the basic configuration of the fourth embodiment slot machine will be described with reference to Figures 120 to 122. In this description, the directions indicated by the arrows in Figure 121 will be described as the up/down direction, the front/back direction, and the left/right direction, respectively. The fourth embodiment slot machine has a basic configuration that is common or similar to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and some of their descriptions will be omitted. In addition, the control processes such as the role determination process and reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the fourth embodiment slot machine in the same way or with some modifications to the processing content.

<External Configuration of a Slot Machine>
As shown in Figures 120 to 122, the slot machine 601 according to this embodiment comprises a box-shaped housing 605 (main body member) with an open front, and a front door 602 that is attached to the front opening of the housing 605 so as to be openable and closable. In a front view, the front door 602 is attached to the front opening of the housing 605 so as to be able to open and close to the side using hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c disposed at the front of the left side plate 605a of the housing 605.

As shown in Figures 120 to 121, the front of the front door 602 is fitted with, from top to bottom, an upper panel assembly 610, a middle panel assembly 620, a lower panel assembly 630, and a tray assembly 640. The display screen 611a of the liquid crystal display device 611, located on its rear side, is positioned in the center of the upper panel assembly 610, facing forward. The first indicator lamp 612 and the second indicator lamps 613a and 613b are positioned around it. A pair of upper speakers 615a and 615b are positioned to the left and right of the lower front of the display screen 611a, and a decorative member 616 with a predetermined decoration is positioned in the center of the lower front of the display screen 611a.

The central part of the middle panel assembly 620 is provided with a reel window W that faces the surfaces of the three reels 603a, 603b, and 603c, which are arranged side-by-side within the housing 605. Below the reel window W, on the upper side of the operation panel 621, are mounted a coin slot 622 for inserting game tokens (game media), a BET switch unit 623 for betting game tokens within the credited range, and an effect switch unit 624 for operating effects. On the front side of the operation panel 621 are mounted a start lever (start switch) 625, which is operated to start the rotation of all reels 603a to 603c, three stop switches 626a, 626b, and 626c for individually stopping the rotation of each reel 603a, 603b, and 603c, and a reject switch 627 for returning game tokens that have been inserted through the coin slot 622 and remain in place.

The inside of the medal slot 622 is branched into a receiving passage (leading to the hopper 651 described later) through which inserted game medals pass when they are validly accepted, and a return passage (leading to the game medal payout outlet 641 described later) through which inserted game medals pass when they are not validly accepted. A blocker is provided at this branching point. This blocker is configured to selectively open one passage and close the other, so that during periods when inserted game medals are validly accepted, it guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 622 into the receiving passage, and during other periods, it guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 622 into the return passage.

Furthermore, inside the coin slot 622, there are two coin insertion sensors for detecting game coins that have been inserted into and effectively received by the coin slot 622, and a coin passage sensor for monitoring the game coins inserted into the coin slot 622. The first coin insertion sensor is a transmissive optical sensor capable of detecting game coins and is located downstream of the blocker (closer to the hopper 651 described later). The second coin insertion sensor is also a transmissive optical sensor capable of detecting game coins and is located downstream of the first coin insertion sensor. The coin passage sensor is a contact-type sensor capable of detecting game coins and is located downstream of the blocker, closest to the coin slot 622 (upstream of the two coin insertion sensors).

If the first and second medal insertion sensors detect the passage of game tokens in this order, it means that game tokens have been inserted into the medal insertion slot 622 and that the inserted game tokens have been validly accepted. Conversely, if the first and second medal insertion sensors detect the passage of game tokens in the reverse order (second, then first), it means that an abnormal passage has occurred, such as a reverse flow of game tokens. Furthermore, if the medal passage sensor (or at least one of the two medal insertion sensors) continuously detects game tokens for a predetermined period of time, it means that game tokens have been retained in the receiving passage, or that an abnormality has occurred, such as a foreign object (such as a tool for fraudulent activity) being inserted into the receiving passage from the medal insertion slot 622.

The reel window W is configured so that when all three reels 603a to 360c have stopped, three symbols for each reel, for a total of nine symbols, are displayed for the player to see. The winning line 629, which connects the middle symbol display areas of each reel 603a to 603c horizontally (in a straight line), is activated when a specified number of game tokens are bet. The system is configured so that the presence or absence of a winning combination is determined by the combination of symbols displayed on the activated winning line 629.

Furthermore, the slot machine 601 is equipped with various indicator lamps, such as LED lamps. In this embodiment, the indicator lamps include a MAX-BET switch indicator lamp (not shown), a BET number indicator lamp 646b, an INSERT indicator lamp 646c, a START indicator lamp 646d, a REPLAY indicator lamp 646e, a GAME OVER indicator lamp 646f, a CREDIT indicator lamp 646h, and a PAYOUT indicator lamp 646j. These indicator lamps are configured to be controlled by the main control board 710, which will be described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp (not shown) illuminates when it is possible to bet game tokens. It is located inside the MAX-BET switch (not shown) in the BET switch unit 623, and when illuminated, it partially or entirely illuminates the MAX-BET switch. Other indicator lamps are located on the side or bottom of the reel window W in the middle panel assembly 620.

The BET count indicator lamp 646b displays the number of game tokens bet. It consists of a 1-BET indicator lamp 646bC, which lights up when 1 token is bet; a 2-BET indicator lamp 646bB, which lights up when 2 tokens are bet; and a 3-BET indicator lamp 646bA, which lights up when 3 tokens are bet. The ready-to-insert indicator lamp 646c lights up when game tokens can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 646d lights up when the game can be started by operating the start lever 625. The re-play indicator lamp 646e lights up when a re-play combination is achieved in any game and game tokens are automatically bet by the automatic betting process.

The status indicator lamp 646f illuminates when betting and/or storing game tokens are settled. The stored token count indicator lamp 646h displays the number of stored (credited) game tokens using a 7-segment display, and the payout indicator lamp 646j displays the number of game tokens paid out when a minor win (a game win configured to pay out a predetermined number of game tokens upon its occurrence) is achieved using a 7-segment display.

Furthermore, the payout indicator lamp 646j is configured to display letters (alphabetical characters) or numbers indicating the type of error that occurs in the slot machine 601. In addition, the payout indicator lamp 646j also has a function to display navigation numbers (symbols or numbers) indicating the operation order (pressing order) of the stop switches 626a to 626c.

A transparent lower panel cover 631 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 630, and a pair of lower speakers 632a and 632b are positioned on either side of it. A translucent lower panel base and a lower panel light (neither of which are shown) with a predetermined pattern are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 631, and by turning on this lower panel light, the pattern on the lower panel base is illuminated from the rear side.

The receiving tray assembly 640 has a game token dispensing opening 641 for dispensing game tokens, and a game token storage tray 642 for storing game tokens is provided facing the game token dispensing opening 641. An ashtray 643 is provided on the left side of the game token storage tray 642.

<Internal structure of a slot machine>
As shown in Figure 122, a medal dispensing device 650 is provided in the lower part of the housing 605 (on the bottom plate 605d) to dispense game medals that are won when a predetermined winning pattern is achieved as a result of playing the game. The medal dispensing device 650 has a medal detection unit (not shown) for detecting game medals and a hopper 651 for physically storing (retaining) the game medals that have been inserted and effectively received. Near the medal dispensing device 650, an auxiliary storage compartment 653 is provided for storing game medals that overflow from the hopper 651, and a fullness detection unit (not shown) is provided to detect whether the auxiliary storage compartment 653 is full (a state in which game medals may overflow from the auxiliary storage compartment 653). Also, to the left of the medal dispensing device 650, a power supply unit 655 is provided to supply power to various devices mounted on the slot machine 601.

A central plate 605f is provided within the housing 605, spanning the left and right side plates 605a and 605b. A reel unit 660 is mounted on this central plate 605f. The reel unit 660 comprises the three reels 603a, 603b, and 603c, and three stepping motors (not shown) that rotate each of these reels 603a to 603c. Each of the reels 603a to 603c is made of a translucent material, and translucent reel tapes displaying multiple patterns are attached to their outer surfaces. Furthermore, backlights (not shown) are provided on the inner surfaces of each of the reels 603a to 603c.

A main control unit 700 is located in the upper part of the enclosure 605 (the upper inner surface of the back panel 605e), which performs the main controls related to the progress of the game (including drive control of reels 603a to 603c and role determination processing). A sub-control unit (not shown) is located on the rear surface of the front door 602, which performs various effects controls (such as display control of effects images using the liquid crystal display device 611 and sound generation control using speakers such as upper speakers 615a and 615b) to enhance the enjoyment of the game according to the game situation. The sub-control unit includes a sub-control board (not shown). The main control unit 700 and the sub-control unit are connected electrically via a cable harness, and information transmission between these devices is unidirectional, from the main control unit 700 to the sub-control unit.

<Configuration of the main control unit>
Next, the configuration of the main control device 700 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 123 to 131. As shown in Figures 125 to 127, the main control device 700 is configured to include a main control board 110 and a main board case 810 that houses the main control board 710. As shown in Figure 126, the main control board 710 is configured to include a control chip 721, an information display lamp 756, a plurality of electrical connectors such as a main board side connector 761, and a printed circuit board 711 on which these are mounted. Details of the main control board 710 will be described later.

As shown in Figures 125 to 127, the main board case 210 has a case body 811 and a case lid 821, and is configured to house the main control board 710 inside the case formed by joining the case body 811 and the case lid 821. As shown in Figure 126, the case body 811 is formed from a transparent resin material in a substantially rectangular box shape with an opening at the front, and a plurality of coupling grooves 812 are formed in the upper and lower walls, respectively. These coupling grooves 812 are L-shaped grooves consisting of an insertion groove portion that opens at the front and a locking groove portion that extends to the right from the rear of the insertion groove portion. The case lid 821 is formed from a transparent resin material in a substantially rectangular box shape with an opening at the rear, and a plurality of engaging protrusions (not shown) are formed on the inner surfaces of the upper and lower walls at positions corresponding to the coupling grooves 812. The engaging projection is inserted from the front into the insertion groove of the coupling groove 812 of the case body 811, and the case lid 821 is slid to the right relative to the case body 811 to insert the engaging projection into the locking groove of the coupling groove 812. This restricts the forward, backward, up, down, and rightward movement of the case lid 821 relative to the case body 811, thereby connecting the case body 811 and the case lid 821.

As shown in Figures 126 and 128, the right side of the case body 811 has a body-side coupling portion 813 and a first body-side sealing portion 814 to which the sealing cover 841 is attached. A lid crimping member (not shown) with locking claws is fitted inside the body-side coupling portion 813. Two case mounting protrusions 819 protruding to the right are formed on the right side of the first body-side sealing portion 814. The left side of the case body 811 has a body-side temporary engagement portion 815, which allows the used body crimping member 940 (see Figure 129) to be engaged when retrieving the main board case 810. A second body-side sealing portion 816 is formed at the bottom of the case body 811. A board support protrusion 817 is formed on the left front side of the case body 811 to support the main control board 710 so that it does not bend.

As shown in Figures 125 and 126, the right side of the case lid 821 has a lid-side coupling portion 823 that connects to the body-side coupling portion 813 of the case body 811 when the case body 811 and the case lid 821 are coupled as described above, and a first lid-side sealing portion 824 that connects to the first body-side sealing portion 814 of the case body 811. When the body-side coupling portion 813 and the lid-side coupling portion 823 are coupled, the locking claw of the lid crimping member (not shown) installed in the body-side coupling portion 813 is inserted into the locking groove in the lid-side coupling portion 823. This restricts the sliding movement of the case lid 821 to the left (in the direction of removing the case lid 821) relative to the case body 811, and fixes the case lid 821 so that it cannot be removed from the case body 811. Furthermore, a sealing seal 842 is affixed across the first main body side sealing portion 814 and the first lid side sealing portion 824. A sealing cover 841 is slid onto the first main body side sealing portion 814 and the first lid side sealing portion 824 from the right, covering the sealing seal 842. After the sealing cover 841 is attached to the first main body side sealing portion 814 and the first lid side sealing portion 824, a cutter member 843 is attached, with the cutting portion of the cutter member 843 positioned inside the sealing cover 841. Therefore, when the sealing cover 841 is slid to the left to remove it, the sealing seal 842 is cut by the cutting portion of the cutter member 843.

On the left side of the case lid 821, a cover portion 825 is formed to house and cover the temporary engagement portion 815 on the body side of the case body 811 when the case body 811 and the case lid 821 are joined as described above. On the upper part of the cover portion 825, an upper case fixing portion 825a is formed, which can engage with the body crimping member 940 (see Figure 129) described later and can also face the crimping type member 945 (see Figure 129) described later. On the lower part of the cover portion 825, a lower case fixing portion 825b is formed, which can face the crimping type member 945 and can also engage with the body crimping member 940. In the middle of the cover portion 825, a lid-side temporary engagement portion 825c is formed, which allows the used body crimping member 940 to be engaged when it overlaps with the temporary engagement portion 815 on the body side of the case body 811.

An upper temporary fixing device 838a of the Nylatch type, which can be inserted into the upper temporary fixing hole 948a (see Figure 129) of the bracket member 930 described later, is formed at the upper left end of the case lid 821. An lower temporary fixing device 838b of the Nylatch type, which can be inserted into the lower temporary fixing hole 948b (see Figure 129) of the bracket member 930, is formed at the lower left end of the case lid 821. A second lid-side sealing portion 826 is formed at the lower part of the case lid 821, which is connected to the second body-side sealing portion 816 of the case body 811. When the second body-side sealing portion 816 and the second lid-side sealing portion 826 are connected, a laser device or the like prints across the second body-side sealing portion 816 and the second lid-side sealing portion 826, thereby sealing the main board case 810.

On the front left side of the case lid 821, a front-to-back connector exposure section 827 is formed to expose the main board-side connector 761 of the main control board 710 housed inside the case. A cable connector 792, provided at one end of the front door cable harness 791, can be mated and connected to the main board-side connector 761 exposed via the left-side connector exposure section 827 (see Figure 123).

A connector cover 846 is attached to the case lid 821, covering the left-side connector exposure portion 827 from the front. A groove-shaped first cover crimping mounting portion 829 is formed on the front surface of the case lid 821, allowing the first cover crimping member 828, which has locking claws, to be slid and attached to the first cover crimping mounting portion 829 from above. When the connector cover 846 is attached to the case lid 821, the first cover crimping member 828, mounted on the first cover crimping mounting portion 829, is positioned inside the connector cover 846, and the locking claws of the first cover crimping member 828 are inserted into the locking groove inside the connector cover 846. Therefore, the connector cover 846 cannot be removed from the case lid 821 unless the connector cover 846 is destroyed to release the locking state with the first cover crimping member 828.

On the lower front side of the case lid 821, there are first to fourth lower connector exposure sections 831 to 834 that penetrate from front to back to expose the reel connector 762, sub-board connector 763, setting change device connector 764, and verification device connector 765 of the main control board 710 housed inside the case. The reel connector 762 exposed via the first lower connector exposure section 831 can be connected to a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a reel control board (not shown). The sub-board connector 763 exposed via the second lower connector exposure section 832 can be connected to a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a sub-control board (not shown). The setting change device connector 764 exposed via the third lower connector exposure section 833 can be connected to a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a setting change device 950. The connector 765 for the matching machine, exposed via the fourth lower connector exposure portion 834, is designed to allow mating and connection of a connector from a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the matching machine (not shown).

A sticker attachment area 835 is formed in the center of the front surface of the case lid 821, where the crimping usage record sticker 848 is attached. The sticker attachment area 835 is formed as a rectangular recess that matches the outer shape of the crimping usage record sticker 848. The crimping usage record sticker 848 is a transparent sheet with printed characters or figures for recording the date the main board case 810 was sealed (hereinafter referred to as the crimping usage record).

In the portion of the case lid 821 that overlaps with the information display lamp 756 of the main control board 710, a recessed area 837 is formed on the inside of the case lid 821. As shown in Figures 125 to 127, the recessed area 837 consists of a bottom portion 837e that is lower in height than the top portion of the case lid 821, and an upper wall portion 837a, a lower wall portion 837b, and a left wall portion 837c that surround the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the front of the bottom portion 837e.
It has a right wall portion 837d. The bottom portion 837e is formed as a flat plate that extends substantially parallel to the information display lamp 756, overlapping with the information display lamp 756, near the front of the information display lamp 756. The upper wall portion 837a, the lower wall portion 837b, and the left wall portion 837c are formed as walls that extend in the front-rear direction. Of the upper, lower, left, and right wall portions 837a to 837d, the right wall portion 837d, which is located on the side furthest from the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c, is formed as a wall that slopes to the right (the side furthest from the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c) as it moves forward.

As shown in Figure 123, the main board case 810, which houses the main control board 710 inside the case, is attached to the upper part of the housing 605 (the upper inner surface of the back plate 605e) via the board case mounting mechanism 900. The board case mounting mechanism 900, as shown in Figures 129 and 130, consists of a left base member 910 attached to the upper left side of the back plate 605e, a right base member 920 attached to the upper right side of the back plate 605e, and a bracket member 930 that is pivotably attached to the left base member 910 in the front-rear direction. The main board case 810 is mounted facing forward inside the bracket member 930. The left end of the bracket member 930 is pivotably connected to the left base member 910 in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the right end of the bracket member 930 is configured to be fixed to the right base member 920 using a locking member 960. As a result, the main board case 810 is pivotably mounted to the upper part of the housing 605 via the board case mounting mechanism 900.

The left base member 910 is formed in a block shape extending vertically and is attached to the upper left side of the back plate 605e (near the bottom of the top plate 605c) of the housing 605 using mounting screws (not shown). The left base member 910 has three base-side engaging portions 911, 912, and 913 arranged vertically, each having a hinge hole that can engage with the bracket-side engaging portions 931, 932, and 933 of the bracket member 930. The right base member 920 is also formed in a block shape extending vertically and is attached to the upper right side of the back plate 605e (near the bottom of the top plate 605c) of the housing 605 using mounting screws (not shown). Furthermore, the right base member 920 is configured to be able to engage with a locking projection (not shown) provided on the right rear surface of the bracket member 930.

The bracket member 930 is formed from a transparent resin material into a roughly rectangular box shape with an opening at the front. The main board case 810 is mounted in its internal space and supported by this box. On the outer surface of the left side wall of the bracket member 930, three bracket-side engaging portions 931, 932, and 933 are formed vertically, each having a hinge axis that can rotatably engage with the base-side engaging portions 911, 912, and 913 of the left base member 910. As a result, the left end of the bracket member 930 is connected to the left base member 910 so that it can swing in the front-rear direction, with the base-side engaging portions 911, 912, and 913 and the bracket-side engaging portions 931, 932, and 933 engaged.

Within the bracket member 930, adjacent to the left-side wall, are formed upper and lower case crimping mounting portions 934 and 935, to which the main crimping member 940 and the crimping type member 945 are mounted. The upper case crimping mounting portion 934 is designed so that the main crimping member 940 (or the crimping type member 945), which has a locking claw, is inserted and mounted through an opening formed on the right side. The lower case crimping mounting portion 935 is designed so that the crimping type member 945 (or the main crimping member 940), which does not have a locking claw, is inserted and mounted through an opening formed on the right side.

An upper temporary fixing hole 948a is formed at the upper left end of the bracket member 930, into which the upper temporary fixing device 838a of the main board case 810 (case lid 821) can be inserted. A lower temporary fixing hole 948b is formed at the lower left end of the bracket member 930, into which the lower temporary fixing device 838b of the main board case 810 (case lid 821) can be inserted.
A cable clamp 936 capable of securing and holding the aforementioned front door cable harness 791 is formed in the lower left part of 30.

A locking member 960 for securing the bracket member 930 to the right-side base member 920 is attached to the upper right portion of the bracket member 930. Furthermore, two case mounting holes 939, 939, opening to the left, are formed vertically on the upper right portion of the bracket member 930. The case mounting protrusions 819, 819 of the main board case 810 (case body 811) can be inserted into the case mounting holes 039, 939 from the left.

To attach the main board case 810, which houses the main control board 710 inside the case, to the bracket member 930, the case mounting protrusions 819, 819 of the main board case 810 are inserted into the case mounting holes 939, 939 of the bracket member 930. Then, the upper and lower temporary fixing devices 838a, 838b of the main board case 810 are inserted into the upper and lower upper temporary fixing holes 948a, 948b of the bracket member 930, thereby inserting the main board case 810 into the bracket member 930. Once the main board case 810 is inserted into the bracket member 930, the main crimping member 940 attached to the upper case crimping mounting portion 934 is positioned inside the upper case fixing portion 825a of the main board case 810, and the locking claws of the main crimping member 940 are inserted into the locking grooves inside the upper case fixing portion 825a. Simultaneously, the crimping member 945 attached to the lower case crimping mounting portion 935 is positioned opposite to the lower case fixing portion 825b of the main board case 810. This secures the main board case 810 so that it cannot be removed from the bracket member 930 unless the upper case fixing portion 825a of the main board case 810 is destroyed and the locking state with the main body crimping member 940 is released.

In this way, the main board case 810 is attached to the bracket member 930 by engaging the right side of the main board case 810 with the bracket member 930, and then engaging the left side. Alternatively, the crimping member 945 can be attached to the upper case crimping mounting portion 934 and positioned opposite each other inside the upper case fixing portion 825a, and the main crimping member 940 can be attached to the lower case crimping mounting portion 935 and positioned inside the lower case fixing portion 825b, with the locking claws of the main crimping member 940 inserted into the locking grooves inside the lower case fixing portion 825b. This allows the main board case 810 to be attached to the bracket member 930 twice by swapping the vertical positions of the main crimping member 940 and the crimping member 945.

For example, when first attaching the main board case 810 to the bracket member 930, the main crimping member 940 is attached to the upper case crimping mounting portion 934, and the crimping type member 945 is attached to the lower case crimping mounting portion 935, so that the locking claws of the main crimping member 940 are inserted into the locking grooves in the upper case fixing portion 825a of the main board case 810. In this state, when removing the main board case 810 from the bracket member 930, the upper case fixing portion 825a of the main board case 810 is destroyed to release the locking state with the main crimping member 940. Next, when reattaching the removed main board case 810 to the bracket member 930, the crimping member 945 is attached to the upper case crimping mounting portion 934, and the main body crimping member 940 is attached to the lower case crimping mounting portion 935, so that the locking claws of the main body crimping member 940 are inserted into the locking grooves in the lower case fixing portion 825b of the main board case 810. Then, when removing the main board case 810 from the bracket member 930, the lower case fixing portion 825b of the main board case 810 is destroyed to release the locking state with the main body crimping member 940. Furthermore, when the manufacturer or the like collects the main board case 810 after it has been removed from the bracket member 930, the used main crimping member 940 removed from the lower case crimping mounting portion 935 (or the upper case crimping mounting portion 934) is engaged with the main body side temporary engagement portion 815 and the lid side temporary engagement portion 825c of the main board case 810. This restricts the sliding movement of the case lid 821 of the main board case 810 relative to the case body 811 to the left (in the direction of removing the case lid 821), and the case lid 821
It is possible to fix it in a way that prevents it from being removed from the case body 811.

Furthermore, in addition to mounting the main board case 810 to the bracket member 930, a setting change device 950 is also mounted thereon. Specifically, the setting change device 950 is mounted in the lower right part of the bracket member 930. To the left of the setting change device 950 in the lower right part of the bracket member 930, a cable cover 955 is mounted to cover a cable harness (not shown) that extends from the setting change device 950 to the main control board 710 (setting change device connector 764) inside the main board case 810. A groove-shaped second cover crimping mounting portion 938 is formed in the lower right part of the bracket member 930, and a second cover crimping member 937 having a locking claw can be attached to the second cover crimping mounting portion 938 by sliding it from the right. When the cable cover 955 is attached to the bracket member 930, the second cover crimping member 937, which is attached to the second cover crimping mounting portion 938, is positioned inside the cable cover 955, and the locking claws of the second cover crimping member 937 are inserted into the locking grooves inside the cable cover 955. Therefore, the cable cover 955 is fixed in such a way that it cannot be removed from the bracket member 930 unless the cable cover 955 is destroyed and the locking state with the second cover crimping member 937 is released.

The setting change device 950 is a device operated when changing the setting values (such as the probability of winning a game) of the slot machine 1, which determine the degree of advantage for the player. When the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key cylinder (not shown) provided on the setting change device 950 and rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise, and the power switch of the power supply unit 655 located at the bottom of the housing 605 is turned ON, the setting change mode (a mode in which the setting value can be changed) is started. Each time the setting change switch (not shown) is pressed, the setting change device 950 switches between the above six setting values from 1 to 6 and displays the setting value on the setting indicator lamp 751 (see Figure 131) provided on the main control board 710. Then, when the start lever 625 provided on the front of the front door 602 is operated, the above setting value is confirmed, and when the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting change mode ends and the machine returns to normal mode. Furthermore, in normal mode, when the setting change key inserted into the setting change key cylinder is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise, the main control board 710 enters setting confirmation mode and displays the current setting value on the setting indicator lamp 751 on the main control board 710. When the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting confirmation mode ends and the system returns to normal mode.

<Configuration of the main control board>
Next, the detailed configuration of the main control board 710 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 131. As shown in Figure 131, the main control board 710 is configured to include a control chip 721, a plurality of ICs (also referred to as "IC components" or "IC drivers"), a monitor lamp 741 also called a monitor LED, a setting indicator lamp 751 also called a setting display monitor, an information display lamp 756 also called a payout ratio monitor (corresponding to a performance display monitor in a pachinko game machine), a plurality of electrical connectors such as a main board side connector 761, and a printed circuit board 711 on which these are mounted. The main control board 710 is configured so that control of the game progress in the slot machine 601 is performed by the operation of each drive circuit, etc., according to the control program stored in the ROM of the control chip 721. Although detailed illustrations are omitted (some are illustrated with numbers as examples), the main control board 710 has multiple capacitors, including a film capacitor 771, a ceramic capacitor 772, an electrolytic capacitor 773, and a general-purpose capacitor 774, as well as multiple transistors 775, multiple diodes 776, multiple resistor arrays 777, and multiple resistors 778 mounted on the printed circuit board 711. The capacitors on the main control board 710 are used, for example, to stabilize the power supply of each IC. The transistors on the main control board 710 are used, for example, to drive each output circuit. The diodes on the main control board 710 are used, for example, to protect each IC from static electricity.

Each component mounted on the printed circuit board 711, excluding electrical connectors, such as the control chip 721, multiple ICs, monitor lamp 741, setting indicator lamp 751, and information indicator lamp 756, is covered by the case lid 821 of the main control board 710 when the main control board 710 is housed in the main board case 810. As mentioned above, the main board case 810 is made of a transparent resin material, and is configured to allow the control chip 721, multiple ICs, monitor lamp 741, setting indicator lamp 751, and information indicator lamp 756 to be visible from the outside of the case lid 821.

Furthermore, a rectangular seal application area AS is set on the upper central part of the main control board 710 (printed circuit board 711). The seal application area AS is an area that may overlap with the crimping usage record seal 848 attached to the seal application area 835 of the case lid 821 when viewed from the outside of the case lid 821. A rectangular solvent inflow area BS extending vertically is set on the right end of the main control board 710. The solvent inflow area BS is an area where, when attempting to peel off the sealing seal 842 of the main board case 810, the solvent used to peel off the sealing seal 842 may flow into the main control board 710 inside the case. To the left and below the seal application area AS on the main control board 710, an arrangement restriction area CS extending in a roughly L shape is set. The placement restriction area CS is close to the left side wall 821a and the lower side wall 821b of the case lid 821 (see Figure 126), and since visibility may be obstructed, the placement of the setting indicator lamp 751 and the information indicator lamp 756 is restricted in this area.

Furthermore, a drawing section 712 is provided on the upper right of the printed circuit board 711, where the name of the circuit board manufacturer is printed using a laser device or the like, to prove that the main control board 710 is not a fraudulent board. This drawing section 712 is also covered by the case lid 821 of the main circuit board case 810 when the main control board 710 is housed in the case lid 821, and is configured to be visible from the outside of the case lid 821. The drawing section 712, which displays the circuit board manufacturer's name, is positioned in a location that does not overlap with the sticker application area AS, making it easy to verify the circuit board manufacturer's name. Note that the circuit board manufacturer's name is not limited to being composed solely of text; for example, it may be a combination of text and a corporate mark, or it may include at least one of text and a graphic.

The information indicator lamp 756 (and the setting indicator lamp 751) has a thicker shape than other electrical elements, and if the drawing unit 712 is placed near the information indicator lamp 756 (and the setting indicator lamp 751), it may be obscured by the shadow of the information indicator lamp 756 (and the setting indicator lamp 751), potentially reducing its visibility. Therefore, the drawing unit 712 is placed at a distance from the information indicator lamp 756 (and the setting indicator lamp 751) such that its visibility is not obstructed when viewed from outside the case cover 821. The printing of the circuit board manufacturer's name is done after all electrical elements have been mounted on the printed circuit board 711. The soldered parts of the information indicator lamp 756 (and the setting indicator lamp 751) have a relatively heat-sensitive and brittle structure. Therefore, when printing the substrate manufacturer's name using a laser device, it is preferable to position the drawing unit 712 away from the information indicator lamp 756 (and setting indicator lamp 751) to prevent the laser heat from affecting the lamp.

The control chip 721 is configured to include a CPU that performs various calculations related to the game, a ROM which is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and a RAM which is a storage device that can write and read information. The control chip 721 is located to the right of the center of the printed circuit board 711, that is, the hinge mechanisms 606a to 60 on the printed circuit board 711
It is mounted on the side furthest from 6c. To make it easier to check whether or not the control chip 721 has been tampered with, the control chip 721 is positioned in a location that does not become the seal application area AS. Furthermore, to prevent adverse effects from the solvent, it is preferable that the control chip 721 is positioned in a location that does not become the solvent inflow area BS. In addition, the control chip 721 is positioned at a distance from the setting indicator lamp 751 and the information indicator lamp 756 that allows for the placement of the first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C.

The multiple ICs include the first and second oscillator ICs 731A to 731B, the first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C, and the first to eleventh main board ICs 733A to 733K. The first and second oscillator ICs 731A to 731B are electrically connected to the control chip 721 and are configured to generate the clock used by the control chip 721. The first and second oscillator ICs 731A to 731B are mounted to the right of the center of the printed circuit board 711. The first and second oscillator ICs 731A to 731B are positioned near the bottom of the control chip 721, in a location that does not become part of the sticker application area AS. However, the first and second oscillator ICs 731A to 731B may be positioned near the control chip 721 in a location that becomes part of the sticker application area AS. Unlike the control chip 721, there is less need to easily verify whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred.

The first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C are ICs for dynamic control of the lighting of the 7-segment LEDs: the stored quantity indicator lamp 646h, the payout quantity indicator lamp 646j, the setting indicator lamp 751, and the information indicator lamp 756. The first display control IC 732A is electrically connected to the control chip 721, as well as to the main board connector 761, the setting indicator lamp 751, and the information indicator lamp 756. The first display control IC 732A functions as a segment driver that sets (decodes) the numbers, etc. (numbers, letters, various symbols, etc.) displayed on the stored quantity indicator lamp 646h, the payout quantity indicator lamp 646j, the setting indicator lamp 751, and the information indicator lamp 756, according to the control signal transmitted from the control chip 721.

The second display control IC 732B is electrically connected to the control chip 721, as well as to the main board connector 761 and the setting indicator lamp 751. The second display control IC 732B functions as a digit driver, switching whether to display numbers (set by the first display control IC 732A, which is a segment driver) on any of the digits (each digit) of the stored coin count indicator lamp 646h, the payout count indicator lamp 646j, and the setting indicator lamp 751, in response to a control signal transmitted from the control chip 721. The third display control IC 732C is electrically connected to the control chip 721, as well as to the information indicator lamp 756. The third display control IC 732C functions as a digit driver, switching whether to display numbers (set by the first display control IC 732A, which is a segment driver) on any of the digits (each digit) of the information indicator lamp 756, in response to a control signal transmitted from the control chip 721.

The first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C are mounted to the left of the center of the printed circuit board 711, that is, on the side closer to the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c on the printed circuit board 711. The first display control IC 732A is positioned to the left of the eleventh main board IC 733K, in a location that will be the sticker application area AS. The second display control IC 732B is positioned below the first display control IC 732A, in a location that will not be the sticker application area AS. The third display control IC 732C is positioned above the first display control IC 732A, in a location that will be the sticker application area AS. Note that all of the first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C may be positioned in a location that will be the sticker application area AS. This is because, similar to the first and second oscillator ICs 731A to 731B, there is less need to easily verify whether or not fraud has occurred.

The other ICs, the first to eleventh main board ICs 733A to 733K, are mounted on various parts of the printed circuit board 711. For example, as shown in Figure 131, the main board ICs mounted on the right side of the printed circuit board 711 are designated as the first main board IC 733A, the second main board IC 733B, and the third main board IC 733C. Similarly, the main board ICs mounted on the upper central part of the printed circuit board 711 are designated as the fourth main board IC 733D, the fifth main board IC 733E, the sixth main board IC 733F, the seventh main board IC 733G, the eighth main board IC 733H, the ninth main board IC 733I, the tenth main board IC 733J, and the eleventh main board IC 733K.

The first main board IC 733A is positioned to the upper right of the control chip 721. The second main board IC 733B is positioned above the control chip 721 and to the left of the first main board IC 733A. The third main board IC 733C is positioned near the bottom of the control chip 721 and to the left of the first and second oscillator ICs 731A to 731B. Furthermore, the first to third main board ICs 733A to 733C are positioned in locations that do not fall within the sticker application area AS.

The fourth mainboard IC 733D is positioned to the upper left of the second mainboard IC 733B. The fifth mainboard IC 733E is positioned to the left of the fourth mainboard IC 733D. The sixth mainboard IC 733F is positioned below the fifth mainboard IC 733E. The seventh mainboard IC 733G is positioned below the sixth mainboard IC 733F. The eighth mainboard IC 733H is positioned below the seventh mainboard IC 733G. The ninth mainboard IC 733I is positioned to the left of the fifth mainboard IC 733E. The tenth mainboard IC 733J is positioned below the ninth mainboard IC 733I and to the left of the sixth mainboard IC 733F. The 11th main board IC 733K is positioned below the 10th main board IC 733J and to the left of the 7th main board IC 733G. The 4th to 11th main board ICs 733D to 733K are positioned in the area AS where the sticker will be applied.

The monitor lamp 741 consists of 20 LED elements 742 arranged in two rows of 10 on each side, and is designed to light up according to the operating status of each part of the slot machine 601. The monitor lamp 741 is used to check for malfunctions or other problems. For example, some of the 20 LED elements 742 that make up the monitor lamp 741 light up when each reel 603a to 603c of the reel unit 660 is not in (or is in) a predetermined rotation reference position. Also, for example, some of the other 20 LED elements 742 light up when the start lever 625 is not in operation (or is in operation). The monitor lamp 741 is mounted on the lower central part of the printed circuit board 711 (below the 4th to 11th main board ICs 733D to 733K). To make it easy to check the illumination status (on or off) of each LED element 742, the monitor lamp 741 is positioned in a location that is not part of the sticker application area AS. Furthermore, to prevent adverse effects from the solvent, it is preferable to position the monitor lamp 741 in a location that does not become part of the solvent inflow area BS. Also, since the monitor lamp 741 is electrically connected to the main board-side connector 761, it is preferable to position it near the main board-side connector 761.

The multiple electrical connectors include a main board side connector 761, a reel connector 762, a sub-board connector 763, a setting change device connector 764, and a verification device connector 765. The main board side connector 761 is mounted on the left end of the printed circuit board 711, that is, on the side closer to the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c than the first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C, the setting indicator lamp 751, and the information indicator lamp 756 on the printed circuit board 711. As described above, the main board side connector 761 can be mated with a cable connector 792 provided at one end of the front door cable harness 791 (see Figure 123).

The front door cable harness 791 is electrically connected to the central display board 796 (see Figure 124), which is located in the center of the rear side (back side) of the front door 602. As shown in Figures 123 and 124, the front door cable harness 791 is routed from the housing 605 to the front door 602 using the cable clamp 936 of the bracket member 930 and a plurality of cable clamps 794 located on the inner surface of the left side plate 605a of the housing 605 (located on the side where the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c are provided). At this time, the front door cable harness 791 is routed downward from the main board side connector 761 toward the cable clamp 936 of the bracket member 930 so as not to obstruct visibility by covering the front of the information display lamp 756 (and setting display lamp 751) located near the main board side connector 761. However, the front door cable harness 791 may obstruct the visibility of the first and second case crimping members 940, 945, etc., by covering the cover portion 825 of the case lid 821, which is located to the left of the main board side connector 761. Therefore, as mentioned above, it is preferable that the upper case fixing portion 825a, which can engage with the main body crimping member 940, is positioned above the cover portion 825 (above the lower case fixing portion 825b and the lid side temporary engagement portion 825c). In this embodiment, to facilitate explanation of the positional relationship with other components, the front door cable harness 791 is shown by a dashed line in Figures 123 and 124.

The central display board 796 is electrically connected to the left relay board 797 and the right relay board 798, which are located on the left and right rear sides of the reel window W. Various indicator lamps (BET number indicator lamp 646b, payout indicator lamp 646c, game start indicator lamp 646d, re-play indicator lamp 646e, status indicator lamp 646f, stored coins indicator lamp 646h, payout indicator lamp 646j, etc.) are mounted or electrically connected to the aforementioned reel window W. As a result, control signals for controlling the operation of the various indicator lamps are transmitted from the main control board 710 to the left relay board 797 and the right relay board 798 via the front door cable harness 791 and the central display board 796, and the operation of the various indicator lamps is controlled by the main control board 710.

Furthermore, as described above, the control signals for controlling the operation of the stored coin count indicator lamp 646h and the payout count indicator lamp 646j are configured to be output from the main board side connector 761 via the control chip 721, the first display control IC 732A, and the second display control IC 732B of the main control board 710. Similarly, the control signals for controlling the operation of the BET number indicator lamp 646b, the insertable indicator lamp 646c, the game start indicator lamp 646d, the re-game indicator lamp 646e, etc., are also configured to be output from the main board side connector 761 via the control chip 721, the first display control IC 732A, and the second display control IC 732B of the main control board 710.

The reel connector 762 is mounted on the lower left end of the printed circuit board 711. As mentioned above, the connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a reel control board (not shown) can be mated into the reel connector 762. The sub-board connector 763 is mounted in the center of the lower end of the printed circuit board 711. As mentioned above, the connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a sub-control board (not shown) can be mated into the sub-board connector 763. The setting change device connector 764 is mounted on the lower left end of the printed circuit board 711. As mentioned above, the connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a setting change device 950 can be mated into the setting change device connector 764. The verification device connector 765 is mounted on the lower left end of the printed circuit board 711, alongside the setting change device connector 764. As mentioned above, the connector 765 for the matching machine is designed to allow the connector of a cable harness (not shown) that is electrically connected to the matching machine (not shown) to be mated and connected.

As mentioned above, the setting indicator lamp 751 displays the setting value of the slot machine 601, which determines the player's advantage, using a 7-segment display. The setting indicator lamp 751 is constructed using a 7-segment LED capable of displaying a single digit. The setting indicator lamp 751 is mounted to the left of the center of the printed circuit board 711, that is, closer to the hinge mechanisms 606a-606c than to the control chip 721 on the printed circuit board 711. To make the displayed setting value easy to see, the setting indicator lamp 751 is positioned between the first display control IC 732A and the main board connector 761, in a location that does not fall within the sticker application area AS or the placement restriction area CS.

The information display lamp 756 displays information related to the bonus ratio using a 7-segment display. The information display lamp 756 is constructed using a 7-segment LED capable of displaying a 4-digit number or the like. As information related to the bonus ratio, for example, the information display lamp 756 can display a 4-digit number or the like, which is a combination of a 2-digit identifier symbol indicating the type of bonus ratio (bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, advantageous period ratio, etc.) and a 2-digit ratio corresponding to the identifier symbol. The information display lamp 756 is mounted to the left of the center of the printed circuit board 711, that is, closer to the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c than to the control chip 721 on the printed circuit board 711. To make it easy to check the information related to the bonus ratio displayed by the information display lamp 756, the information display lamp 756 is positioned between the first display control IC 732A and the third display control IC 732C, in a position that is not part of the sticker application area AS or the placement restriction area CS. Furthermore, since the information indicator lamp 756 may be obscured by the usage record sticker 848 when viewed from a diagonal front angle, it is undesirable for it to be positioned adjacent to the sticker application area AS. Therefore, it is preferable to position the information indicator lamp 756 to the left of the sticker application area AS, at a distance sufficient to allow it to be visible from a diagonal front-right angle without being obstructed by the crimped usage record sticker 848.

Furthermore, unlike the control chip 721, the information indicator lamp 756 (and the setting indicator lamp 751) is a reusable component. Therefore, when attempting to remove the sealing seal 842 from the main board case 810, if the solvent used to remove the seal 842 flows into the main control board 710 inside the case, it is preferable that the solvent does not adhere to the information indicator lamp 756 (and the setting indicator lamp 751). For this reason, the information indicator lamp 756 (and the setting indicator lamp 751) is positioned in a location that does not become a solvent inflow area BS.

In order to efficiently form a conductor pattern on the printed circuit board 711 (without making it complex), it is preferable to mount the information indicator lamp 756 on the path of the conductor pattern between the first and third display control ICs 732A and 732C and the main board side connector 761. Therefore, the information indicator lamp 756 is positioned near the first and third display control ICs 732A and 732C and near the main board side connector 761. The information indicator lamp 756 is electrically connected to the first and third display control ICs 732A and 732C, and is spaced so close to the first and third display control ICs 732A and 732C that no other electrical elements (ICs, etc.) on the main control board 710 are located near the information indicator lamp 756. If other electrical components (such as ICs) are located between the information indicator lamp 756 and the first and third display control ICs 732A and 732C or the main board connector 761, it becomes necessary to bypass them, making it difficult to efficiently form the conductor pattern.

As mentioned above, the first display control IC 732A is used as both the segment driver for the setting indicator lamp 751 and the segment driver for the information indicator lamp 756. In order to efficiently form a conductor pattern on the printed circuit board 711, it is preferable to mount the information indicator lamp 756 near the setting indicator lamp 751. For this reason, the information indicator lamp 756 is positioned above the setting indicator lamp 751. The information indicator lamp 756 is spaced so close to the setting indicator lamp 751 that no other electrical elements (ICs, etc.) on the main control board 710 are provided. However, in order to prevent the numbers displayed by the setting indicator lamp 751 and the information indicator lamp 756 from being mistaken for a series of (five-digit) numbers, it is preferable that the setting indicator lamp 751 and the information indicator lamp 756 are not positioned horizontally.

The light emitted by each LED element 742 of the monitor lamp 741 is relatively bright. Therefore, if the information display lamp 756 is placed near the monitor lamp 741, the light emitted from each LED element 742 may reach the information display lamp 756, potentially reducing the visibility of the information regarding the prize ratio displayed on the information display lamp 756. For this reason, the information display lamp 756 is placed at a distance from the monitor lamp 741 such that the light from each LED element 742 does not reach the information display lamp 756. If other electrical elements are placed to block the light from each LED element 742, the distance between the information display lamp 756 and the monitor lamp 741 may be such that the light from each LED element 742 can reach the information display lamp 756. It is also possible to place the information display lamp 756 near the monitor lamp 741, but in this case, the information regarding the prize ratio displayed on the information display lamp 756 and the illumination status of each LED element 742 can be viewed simultaneously, thus reducing the effort required for verification.

If the main board connector 761 is positioned above the information indicator lamp 756, the front door cable harness 791, which is electrically connected to the main board connector 761, may hang down and obstruct the view of the information indicator lamp 756. Therefore, the main board connector 761 is positioned near the left side of the information indicator lamp 756, excluding the area directly above it. Other electrical connectors, such as the reel connector 762, the sub-board connector 763, the setting change device connector 764, and the verification device connector 765, are also positioned excluding the area directly above the information indicator lamp 756 for similar reasons. Furthermore, even if the main board connector 761 and other electrical connectors are positioned excluding the area directly above the information indicator lamp 756, if the cable harness may obstruct the view of the lamp 756, it is preferable to position them in a location that avoids this obstruction.

The left portion of the main board case 810, where the main board-side connector 761 is exposed, is fixed to the bracket member 930 by first and second case crimping members 940 and 945. When attempting to release the locking state with the main crimping member 940 by destroying the upper case fixing portion 825a of the main board case 810 (for example, by burning it off with a hot cutter), it is preferable that the information indicator lamp 756 inside the case is not accidentally destroyed. Therefore, the information indicator lamp 756 is positioned to the right of the upper case fixing portion 825a of the main board case 810, at a distance sufficient to accommodate other electrical elements (such as the main board-side connector 761) on the main control board 710.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the connector cover 846 is attached to the case lid 821 of the main board case 810 by the first cover crimping member 828. When attempting to release the locking state with the first cover crimping member 828 by destroying the connector cover 846 (for example, by burning it off with a hot cutter), it is preferable that the information indicator lamp 756 inside the case is not accidentally destroyed. Therefore, the information indicator lamp 756 is positioned so that, when viewed from the outside of the case lid 821, it does not overlap with the first cover crimping mounting portion 829 of the case lid 821 (a position away from the first cover crimping member 828).

If the distance between the case lid 821 of the main board case 810 and the information indicator lamp 756 is too large, the visibility of the information indicator lamp 756 may decrease depending on the viewing angle due to the effects of light reflection on the case lid 821. Therefore, as mentioned above, a recess 837 is formed in the part of the case lid 821 of the main board case 810 that overlaps with the information indicator lamp 756. This recess 837 makes it possible to reduce the distance between the case lid 821 (recess 837) of the main board case 810 and the information indicator lamp 756, thereby suppressing the effects of light reflection on the case lid 821 and improving the visibility of the information indicator lamp 756. Also, as mentioned above, the right wall portion 837d of the recess 837 is formed as a wall that slopes to the right (the side furthest from the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c) as it extends forward. This right wall portion 837d allows the main board case 810 inside the housing 605 to be viewed from the right-front, diagonally forward side where the front door 602 opens, without interference with the top portion of the case lid 821, and the information indicator lamp 756 can be seen through the recess 837 (bottom portion 837e) of the case lid 821.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the gap between the bottom 837e of the recess 837 and the information indicator lamp 756 be approximately 0.5 mm. By ensuring this gap between the case lid 821 (recess 837) of the main board case 810 and the information indicator lamp 756, the visibility of the information indicator lamp 756 is ensured, while preventing actions such as attempting to damage the information indicator lamp 756 by pushing the case lid 821 from the outside or by generating static electricity. Also, if the gap between the bottom 837e of the recess 837 and the information indicator lamp 756 is approximately 0.5 mm, it is preferable that the length and width of the bottom 837e be approximately 1 mm larger on each side than the information indicator lamp 756 in order to ensure the visibility of the information indicator lamp 756.

In the main control device 700 configured as described above, to check the various parts of the main control board 710 housed in the main board case 810, the main board case 810 mounted inside the housing 605 is viewed from the front or diagonally to the right with the front door 602 open. At this time, since the information display lamp 756 is positioned in a location that does not become a seal application area AS on the main control board 710 (printed circuit board 711), the information regarding the bonus ratio displayed by the information display lamp 756 can be checked via the recess 837 (bottom 837e) of the case lid 821 without being obstructed by the crimping usage record seal 848. Similarly, since the setting display lamp 751 is also positioned in a location that does not become a seal application area AS on the main control board 710, the setting value displayed by the setting display lamp 751 can be checked via the case lid 821 without being obstructed by the crimping usage record seal 848. Since the monitor lamp 741 is positioned in a location that does not fall within the seal application area AS on the main control board 710, the illumination status of each LED element 742 constituting the monitor lamp 741 can be checked via the case cover 821 without being obstructed by the crimping usage record seal 848. Similarly, since the control chip 721 is also positioned in a location that does not fall within the seal application area AS on the main control board 710, it can be checked via the case cover 821 to determine whether or not the control chip 721 has been tampered with, without being obstructed by the crimping usage record seal 848.

<Different example>
In this embodiment, when a common main control board is used by multiple substrate manufacturers, the main control board may be provided with multiple drawing sections corresponding to the number of substrate manufacturers, and the system may be configured so that the drawing section bearing the name of the substrate manufacturer that actually manufactured the main control board is retained while other drawing sections are removed from the main control board. For example, as shown in Figure 132, when a common main control board 710A is used by two substrate manufacturers, two drawing sections 712A and 712B bearing the names of the two substrate manufacturers may be provided in the upper right part of the printed circuit board 711 using a laser device or the like.

The first and second drawing sections 712A and 712B are arranged side-by-side along the outer periphery of the main control board 710A (printed circuit board 711). The first and second drawing sections 712A and 712B are connected to the printed circuit board 711 via perforated joints, allowing them to be individually removed from the printed circuit board 711. This allows for the removal of one of the two drawing sections 712A and 712B from the main control board 710A, while retaining the drawing section bearing the name of the circuit board manufacturer that actually produced the main control board 710A. Therefore, even when a common main control board 710 is used by multiple (two) circuit board manufacturers, it is possible to provide the main control board 710A with a drawing section bearing the name of the circuit board manufacturer that produced the main control board 710A.

The first and second drawing sections 712A and 712B are positioned in a location that does not become a sticker application area AS, similar to the embodiment described above, so that the name of the substrate manufacturer can be easily identified. The first and second drawing sections 712A and 712B are positioned at a distance from the information indicator lamp 756 (and setting indicator lamp 751) such that the visibility of each drawing section is not obstructed when viewed from outside the case lid 821, similar to the embodiment described above. Furthermore, when removing one of the first and second drawing sections 712A and 712B from the main control board 710, it is preferable to position the first and second drawing sections 712A and 712B away from the information indicator lamp 756 (and setting indicator lamp 751) to prevent the force acting during the removal from affecting the information indicator lamp 756 (and setting indicator lamp 751).

The following describes other feature configurations applicable to the main control boards 710 and 710A described above, with additional reference to Figures 133 to 145. The following description uses a main control board 1010, distinct from the main control boards 710 and 710A, to explain its feature configuration. This main control board 1010 can be used in the slot machine 601 in place of the main control boards 710 and 710A. The feature configuration of the main control board 1010 described below is also applicable to the main control boards 710 and 710A. Furthermore, the configurations described above for the main control boards 710 and 710A can also be applied to the main control board 1010. Additionally, the feature configurations described below are not limited to the fourth form of slot machine and can be combined with other embodiments. In the following description, the directions indicated by the arrows in Figures 133 to 136 will be described as the up/down direction and the left/right direction, respectively. These directions correspond to the up/down and left/right directions indicated by the arrows in Figure 121.

<Pattern of lead wires of electrical components mounted on a circuit board>
The main control board 1010 is mainly composed of a printed circuit board 1011 and a plurality of electrical elements (electronic components) mounted on the surface portion (also called the "first surface portion") FS of the printed circuit board 1011. As shown in Figure 133, a predetermined area (the area within the rectangular frame FB10 shown by the solid line) on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011 is mounted with multiple types of electrical elements. Specifically, the multiple types of electrical elements mounted include one IC driver 1020A arranged horizontally (with the longitudinal direction of the component parallel to the left-right direction), four resistors 1030A arranged vertically (with the longitudinal direction of the component parallel to the up-down direction), two resistors 1030B arranged vertically, one control chip 1050A mounted on an IC socket 1040A in a horizontal position, and four ceramic capacitors 1060A arranged vertically.

In Figure 133, five rectangular frames FB11 to FB15 are shown, indicated by dashed lines. These rectangular frames FB11 to FB15 are drawn for convenience to illustrate the areas on the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 where electrical elements are mounted, and are not actually formed on the surface FS by printing or other means. Rectangular frame FB11 indicates the area where the IC driver 1020A is mounted, rectangular frame FB12 indicates the area where four resistors 1030A are mounted. Similarly, rectangular frame FB13 indicates the area where two resistors 1030B are mounted, rectangular frame FB14 indicates the area where the control chip 1050A is mounted via the IC socket 1040A, and rectangular frame FB15 indicates the area where four ceramic capacitors 1060A are mounted.

The IC driver 1020A comprises a rectangular parallelepiped package (also referred to as the "main body") 1021 and multiple lead wires (also referred to as "legs" or "terminals") 1022 extending from the package 1021 (in this example, 18 wires from each side along the longitudinal direction of the package 1021, for a total of 36 wires). Each lead wire 1022 is formed to be thinner at the tip than at the base (the part closer to the package 1021), and is inserted into a predetermined number of through-holes (not shown) formed on the printed circuit board 1011 and soldered. The resistors 1030A and 1030B comprise a cylindrical package 1031 and two lead wires 1032 extending from both longitudinal ends of the package 1031, with each lead wire 1032 inserted into a predetermined number of through-holes formed on the printed circuit board 1011 and soldered.

The control chip 1050A comprises a rectangular parallelepiped package portion 1051 and a plurality of lead wires 1052 extending from the package portion 1051 (in this example, 36 from each side along the longitudinal direction of the package portion 1051, for a total of 72). The IC socket 1040A comprises a receiving frame portion 1041 that receives the package portion 1051 of the control chip 1050A, and a plurality of lead wires 1042 extending from the receiving frame portion 1041 (72, the same number as the lead wires 1052 of the control chip 1050A) (see Figure 134). Each lead wire 1042 of the IC socket 1040A is electrically connected to each lead wire 1052 of the control chip 1050A and is inserted through a predetermined number of through-holes formed on the printed circuit board 1011 and soldered. The ceramic capacitor 1060A comprises an elliptical plate-shaped package portion 1061 and two lead wires 1062 extending from the package portion 1061. Each lead wire 1062 is inserted through a predetermined number of through-holes formed on the printed circuit board 1011 and soldered.

Figure 134 shows the main control board 1010 viewed from the back side RS (also referred to as the "second side") of the printed circuit board 1011. The rectangular frame FB20 shown as a solid line in Figure 134 corresponds to the rectangular frame FB10 shown in Figure 133 (representing the same position and size range on both the front side FS and the back side RS of the printed circuit board 1011). The five rectangular frames FB21 to FB25 shown as dashed lines in Figure 134 correspond to the five rectangular frames FB11 to FB15 shown in Figure 133. Rectangular frames FB21 to FB25, like rectangular frames FB11 to FB15, are drawn for convenience to illustrate the areas where electrical elements are mounted and are not actually formed on the back side RS by printing or other means.

As shown in Figure 134, numerous lead wires are soldered to the printed circuit board 1011 within the area within the rectangular frame FB20 on the back side RS of the printed circuit board 1011. Specifically, a total of 32 lead wires 1022 are soldered within the area within the rectangular frame FB21, a total of 8 lead wires 1032 are soldered within the area within the rectangular frame FB22, a total of 4 lead wires 1032 are soldered within the area within the rectangular frame FB23, a total of 72 lead wires 1042 are soldered within the area within the rectangular frame FB24, and a total of 8 lead wires 1062 are soldered within the area within the rectangular frame FB25.

The 32 lead wires 1022 within the area of the rectangular frame FB21 and the 8 lead wires 1032 within the area of the rectangular frame FB22 are arranged relatively close to each other in the left-right direction on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011. Furthermore, the 32 lead wires 1022 within the area of the rectangular frame FB21 are divided into upper and lower rows, with the lead wires 1022 in each row aligned in the left-right direction, and the 8 lead wires 1032 within the area of the rectangular frame FB22 are also divided into upper and lower rows, with the lead wires 1032 in each row aligned in the left-right direction; in this respect, the two are similar. However, the arrangement pitch (distance between adjacent lead wires 1022) of each lead wire 1022 arranged in the left-right direction within the area of the rectangular frame FB21 is different from the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1032 arranged in the left-right direction within the area of the rectangular frame FB22 (the former arrangement pitch is shorter than the latter arrangement pitch). Furthermore, the distance between lead wire 1022 located in the upper right corner of the region within the rectangular frame FB21 and lead wire 1032 located in the upper left corner of the region within the rectangular frame FB22 (also referred to as "the shortest distance between lead wire 1022 in the region within the rectangular frame FB21 and lead wire 1032 in the region within the rectangular frame FB22") is different from both the left-right arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1022 in the region within the rectangular frame FB21 and the left-right arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1023 in the region within the rectangular frame FB22 (the former distance is longer than the latter two arrangement pitches).

Furthermore, the vertical position of each lead wire 1022 arranged horizontally in the upper row within the area of the rectangular frame FB21 is different from the vertical position of each lead wire 1023 arranged horizontally in the upper row within the area of the rectangular frame FB22 (the former is positioned higher than the latter). Similarly, the vertical position of each lead wire 1022 arranged horizontally in the lower row within the area of the rectangular frame FB21 is different from the vertical position of each lead wire 1023 arranged horizontally in the upper row within the area of the rectangular frame FB22 (the former is positioned lower than the latter). Thus, based on the difference between the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1022 in the region within the rectangular frame FB21, the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1032 in the region within the rectangular frame FB22, and the shortest distance between the lead wire 1022 in the region within the rectangular frame FB21 and the lead wire 1032 in the region within the rectangular frame FB22, and also based on the difference between the vertical position of each lead wire 1022 arranged horizontally in each row within the region within the rectangular frame FB21 and the vertical position of each lead wire 1023 arranged horizontally in each row within the region within the rectangular frame FB22, it can be inferred that the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1022 in the region within the rectangular frame FB21 is different from the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1032 in the region within the rectangular frame FB22. By focusing on similar points, it can be inferred that the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1032 in the region within the rectangular frame FB23 is different from the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1022 in the region within the rectangular frame FB21, and different from the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1042 in the region within the rectangular frame FB24, and that the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1042 in the region within the rectangular frame FB24 is different from the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1062 in the region within the rectangular frame FB25.

As described above, the 32 lead wires 1022 within the rectangular frame FB21 are divided into two rows, upper and lower, with 16 lead wires 1022 in each row arranged horizontally. The arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1022 arranged horizontally is significantly shorter than the distance between the rows in the upper and lower sections. Furthermore, the tip of each lead wire 1022 protrudes linearly from the solder section (the part formed by hardened solder material) SLR by a predetermined length, in a position perpendicular to the back surface RS. Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1022 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, distance between rows of lead wires, lead wire shape (orientation), lead wire protrusion length, etc.), it is possible to infer from the RS side of the back of the printed circuit board 1011 that each lead wire 1022 soldered within the area of the rectangular frame FB21 belongs to an IC driver (IC driver 1020A in this example) arranged horizontally among several types of electrical elements.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the eight lead wires 1032 within the rectangular frame FB22 are also divided into two rows, upper and lower, with four lead wires 1032 in each row arranged horizontally. The arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1032 arranged horizontally is shorter than the distance between the two rows, but longer than the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1022 arranged horizontally within the rectangular frame FB21. From this, it can be inferred that the eight lead wires 1032 soldered within the rectangular frame FB22 are paired (sets) in the upper row and the lower row, and that the upper and lower pairs of lead wires 1032 belong to a single electrical element. Based on this inference, and focusing on the upper and lower pair of lead wires, the upper lead wire 1032 extends from the back surface RS for a predetermined length, bending diagonally downward to the left from the solder joint SLR, while the lower lead wire 1032 extends from the back surface RS for a predetermined length, bending diagonally upward to the left from the solder joint SLR. In other words, as shown in Figure 134, when viewing the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 from the front, the upper lead wire 1032 is inclined to the left by an angle of approximately 10° with respect to an imaginary line segment (not shown) connecting the base portion of the upper lead wire 1032 (the original portion extending from the solder joint SLR) and the base portion of the lower lead wire 1032, and the lower lead wire 1032 is also inclined to the left by an angle of approximately 10°.

Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1032 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, distance between rows of lead wires, lead wire shape (orientation), lead wire curvature, etc.), it is possible to infer from the RS side of the back of the printed circuit board 1011 that the eight lead wires 1032 soldered within the rectangular frame FB22 form pairs (sets) of lead wires 1032 in the upper row and lead wires 1032 in the lower row, and that each pair of lead wires 1032 belongs to a resistor (resistor 1030A in this example) arranged vertically among several types of electrical elements.

Furthermore, the four lead wires 1032 within the rectangular frame FB23 are divided into two columns, left and right, with two lead wires 1032 in each column arranged vertically. The arrangement pitch of each vertically arranged lead wire 1032 is shorter than the distance between the two columns, but longer than the arrangement pitch of each horizontally arranged lead wire 1022 within the rectangular frame FB21. From this, it can be inferred that the four soldered lead wires 1032 within the rectangular frame FB23 are paired (sets) in the left column and the right column, and that the left and right pairs of lead wires 1032 belong to a single electrical element. Based on this inference, and focusing on the pair of lead wires, the left lead wire 1032 extends from the solder joint SLR in a bent position downward and to the right, while the two lead wires 1032 in the right column extend from the solder joint SLR in a bent position downward and to the left. In other words, when viewing the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 from the front, with respect to an imaginary line segment (not shown) connecting the base of the left lead wire 1032 and the base of the right lead wire 1032, the left lead wire 1032 is inclined downward at an angle of approximately 10°, and the right lead wire 1032 is also inclined downward at an angle of approximately 10°.

Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1032 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, lead wire shape (orientation), lead wire curvature, etc.), it is possible to infer from the RS side of the back of the printed circuit board 1011 that the four lead wires 1032 soldered within the area of the rectangular frame FB23 form pairs (sets) of lead wires 1032 in the left column and lead wires 1032 in the right column, and that each pair of lead wires 1032 belongs to a resistor (resistor 1030B in this example) arranged horizontally among several types of electrical elements.

Furthermore, the 72 lead wires 1042 within the rectangular frame FB24 are divided into four rows, with 18 lead wires 1042 arranged in a horizontal direction in each row. The distance between the first and second rows from the top, and the distance between the third and fourth rows from the top, are significantly shorter than the distance between the second and third rows from the top. In addition, the lead wires 1042 in the first row from the top and the lead wires 1042 in the second row from the top are arranged alternately in a horizontal direction, and the lead wires 1042 in the third row from the top and the lead wires 1042 in the fourth row from the top are also arranged alternately in a horizontal direction. Moreover, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 1042 arranged horizontally in each row is significantly narrower than the distance between the second and third rows from the top. Furthermore, each lead wire 1042 (or its tip) protrudes linearly from the solder joint SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface RS, in a position perpendicular to the back surface RS. Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1022 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, distance between rows of lead wires, lead wire shape (position), lead wire protrusion length, etc.), it is possible to infer from the back surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011 that each lead wire 1042 soldered within the rectangular frame FB24 belongs to an IC socket (IC socket 1040A in this example), one of several types of electrical elements, and that a control chip (control chip 1050A in this example) is mounted on that IC socket.

Furthermore, the eight lead wires 1062 within the rectangular frame FB25 are divided into two rows, upper and lower, with four lead wires 1062 in each row arranged horizontally. The arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1062 arranged horizontally is narrower than the distance between the two rows, but wider than the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1022 arranged horizontally within the rectangular frame FB21. From this, it can be inferred that the eight lead wires 1062 soldered within the rectangular frame FB25 are paired (sets) in the upper row and the lower row, and that the upper and lower pairs of lead wires 1062 belong to a single electrical element. Based on this inference, and focusing on the upper and lower lead wires, the upper lead wire 1062 extends from the solder joint SLR in a way that it bends diagonally upward to the right, while the lower lead wire 1062 extends from the solder joint SLR in a way that it bends diagonally downward to the left. In other words, when viewing the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 from the front, with respect to an imaginary line segment (not shown) connecting the base of the upper lead wire 1062 and the base of the lower lead wire 1062, the upper lead wire 1062 is inclined to the right at an angle of approximately 160°, and the lower lead wire 1062 is inclined to the left at an angle of approximately 160°.

Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1062 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, distance between rows of lead wires, lead wire shape (orientation), lead wire curvature, etc.), it is possible to infer from the RS side of the back of the printed circuit board 1011 that the eight lead wires 1062 soldered within the rectangular frame FB25 form pairs (sets) of lead wires 1062 in the upper row and lead wires 1062 in the lower row, and that each pair of lead wires 1062 belongs to a ceramic capacitor (ceramic capacitor 1060A in this example) arranged vertically among several types of electrical elements.

As shown in Figure 135, multiple types of electrical elements are mounted in another predetermined area on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011 (the area within the rectangular frame FB30 shown by the solid line). Specifically, these multiple types of electrical elements include one information display lamp 1070A arranged horizontally, one resistor array 1080A arranged horizontally, and one independently arranged LED element 1090A.

In Figure 135, three rectangular frames FB31 to FB33 are shown, indicated by dashed lines. These rectangular frames FB31 to FB33 are drawn for convenience to illustrate the areas on the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 where electrical elements are mounted, and are not actually formed on the surface FS by printing or other means. Rectangular frame FB31 indicates the area where the information display lamp 1070A is mounted, rectangular frame FB32 indicates the area where the resistor array 1080A is mounted, and rectangular frame FB33 indicates the area where the LED element 1090A is mounted.

The information display lamp 1070A comprises a rectangular parallelepiped package portion 1071 (having a 7-segment LED on its front surface capable of displaying information such as a 4-digit number related to the odds of winning combinations) and a plurality of lead wires 1072 (12 in this example, see Figure 136) extending from the package portion 1021. Each lead wire 1072 is inserted into a predetermined plurality of through-holes (not shown) formed on the main control board 1010 and soldered. The resistor array 1080A comprises a rounded rectangular parallelepiped package portion 1081 and a plurality of lead wires 1082 (9 in this example, see Figure 136) extending from the package portion 1081, each lead wire 1082 is inserted into a predetermined plurality of through-holes formed on the printed circuit board 1011 and soldered. The LED element 1090A comprises a bullet-shaped, translucent package portion 1091 and two lead wires 1082 (see Figure 136) extending from the package portion 1091. Each lead wire 1092 is inserted into two predetermined through-holes formed on the printed circuit board 1011 and soldered.

Figure 136 shows the main control board 1010 viewed from the front side (RS) of the back surface (RS) of the printed circuit board 1011. The rectangular frame FB40, shown as a solid line in Figure 136, corresponds to the rectangular frame FB30 shown in Figure 135 (representing the same position and size on both the front surface (FS) and back surface (RS) of the printed circuit board 1011). The three rectangular frames FB41 to FB43, shown as dashed lines in Figure 136, correspond to the three rectangular frames FB31 to FB33 shown in Figure 135. Rectangular frames FB41 to FB43, like rectangular frames FB31 to FB33, are drawn for convenience to illustrate the areas where electrical elements are mounted and are not actually formed by printing or other means on the back surface (RS).

As shown in Figure 136, multiple lead wires are soldered to the printed circuit board 1011 within the area within the rectangular frame FB40 on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011. Specifically, a total of 12 lead wires 1072 are soldered within the area within the rectangular frame FB41, a total of 9 lead wires 1082 are soldered within the area within the rectangular frame FB42, and a total of 2 lead wires 1032 are soldered within the area within the rectangular frame FB43.

The twelve lead wires 1072 within the rectangular frame FB41 are divided into two rows, upper and lower, with six lead wires 1072 in each row arranged horizontally. The arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1072 in the horizontal direction is slightly narrower than the distance between the two rows. Furthermore, the tip of each lead wire 1072 protrudes linearly from the solder joint SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface RS, in a position perpendicular to the back surface RS. Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1072 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, distance between rows of lead wires, lead wire shape (orientation), lead wire protrusion length, etc.), it is possible to infer from the RS side of the back of the printed circuit board 1011 that each lead wire 1072 soldered within the area of the rectangular frame FB41 belongs to an information indicator lamp (in this example, an information indicator lamp 1070A) among several types of electrical elements, which are arranged in a horizontal position.

The nine lead wires 1082 within the rectangular frame FB42 are arranged in a single row in the left-to-right direction. The arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1082 is approximately the same as the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1072 arranged in the left-to-right direction within the rectangular frame FB41. In addition, of the nine lead wires 1082, the three lead wires 1082 on the left end and the three lead wires 1082 on the right end...
The lead wires 1082 protrude linearly from the solder joint SLR for a predetermined length, perpendicular to the back surface RS. On the other hand, of the nine lead wires 1082, the three central lead wires 1082 extend from the solder joint SLR for a predetermined length from the back surface RS in a position where they are bent upward or downward. More specifically, of the three central lead wires 1082, the two on the right extend from the back surface RS in a position where they are bent downward from the solder joint SLR, and the single lead wire 1082 on the left extends from the back surface RS in a position where it is bent upward from the solder joint SLR. Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1082 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, lead wire shape (orientation), lead wire curvature, etc.), it is possible to infer from the RS side of the back of the printed circuit board 1011 that the nine lead wires 1082 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame FB42 belong to a resistor array (resistor array 1080A in this example) arranged horizontally, among several types of electrical elements.

Furthermore, the two lead wires 1092 within the area of the rectangular frame FB43 are arranged in a single row in the vertical direction. The arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1092 is approximately the same as the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1072 arranged in the horizontal direction within the area of the rectangular frame FB41. In addition, the two lead wires 1092 extend from the solder portion SLR for a predetermined length in a position where they are bent to the right or downward. Specifically, of the two lead wires 1092, the upper lead wire 1092 extends from the back surface RS in a position where it is bent to the right from the solder portion SLR, and the lower lead wire 1092 extends from the back surface RS in a position where it is bent downward from the solder portion SLR. Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1092 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, lead wire shape (orientation), lead wire curvature, etc.), it is possible to infer from the RS side of the back of the printed circuit board 1011 that the two lead wires 1092 soldered within the area of the rectangular frame FB43 belong to an LED element (LED element 1090A in this example) among several types of electrical elements.

In this way, the main control board 1010 makes it possible to infer what type of electrical element is located where and in what orientation, based on the configuration of each lead wire soldered to the printed circuit board 1011 when viewed from the RS side of the back surface of the printed circuit board 1011. Therefore, by simply looking at the main control board 1010 from the back side and visually inspecting the configuration of each lead wire, it is possible to confirm the arrangement of various electrical elements mounted on the front surface. Furthermore, during inspection of the main control board 1010 (inspection performed before placing the main control board 1010 into the main board case or after removing it from the main board case), if a defect such as a crack in the solder joint is found in a predetermined area (location) on the RS side of the back surface of the printed circuit board 1011 when viewing the main control board 1010 from the back side, it is possible to quickly infer what type of electrical element is causing the defect by visually inspecting the configuration of each lead wire in that area, thereby enabling smooth repair work (for example, replacement of the electrical element). The examples of lead wire characteristics given are the number of lead wires, the lead wire arrangement pitch, the arrangement of lead wires, the distance between rows of lead wires, the shape (orientation) of the lead wires, the way the lead wires are bent, and the protruding length of the lead wires, but these are not limited to these. The characteristics of the lead wire may also include characteristics related to the strength of the lead wire, such as the lead wire thickness and cross-sectional shape (shape when the lead wire is viewed from the axial direction).

In some cases, three or more electrical elements of the same type and shape may be mounted in a row on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011. In such cases, even if the electrical elements are of the same type, the configuration of the lead wires of those electronic elements on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 may differ. For example, when three or more IC drivers of the same type are arranged in a row, the lead wires of the IC drivers located at both ends of the row may protrude linearly from the back surface RS by a predetermined length in a perpendicular orientation to the back surface RS, while the lead wires of the IC driver located in the center may protrude from the back surface RS at an inclined orientation. By taking these points into consideration, it becomes easier to infer what type of electrical elements are arranged in what position and orientation based on the configuration of the lead wires soldered to the printed circuit board 1011 when viewed from the back surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011.

<Relationship between the distance between conductive layers of the circuit board and the thickness of the game token>
Figure 137 schematically shows the layer structure (cross-sectional structure in the thickness direction of the substrate) of the printed circuit board 1011. As shown in the figure, the printed circuit board 1011 is a double-sided substrate (also referred to as a "two-layer substrate") and mainly consists of a substrate body portion 1012 made of an insulating board material, a first conductive layer 1013 formed of a conductive thin film material such as copper foil on the surface 1012a of the substrate body portion 1012, and a second conductive layer 1014 also formed of a conductive thin film material such as copper foil on the back surface 1012b of the substrate body portion 1012. The first conductive layer 1013 forms conductor patterns for wiring circuits and soldering lands formed around through holes on the surface 1012a of the substrate body portion 1012. Similarly, the second conductive layer 1014 forms conductor patterns for wiring circuits and soldering lands on the back surface 1012b of the substrate body portion 1012.

In Figures 137 to 139, the thicknesses of the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 are shown considerably larger than their actual proportions in order to make them easier to see. Furthermore, although solder resist layers, silk screen printing layers, etc., are actually formed on the surface 1012a and back surface 1012b of the substrate body 1012, these are omitted from the illustration. In this embodiment, the surface 1012a, the first conductive layer 1013, the solder resist layer, the silk screen printing layer, etc. of the substrate body 1012 are collectively referred to as the surface portion (first surface) FS of the printed circuit board 1011 (or main control board 1010). Similarly, the back surface 1012b, the second conductive layer 1014, the solder resist layer, the silk screen printing layer, etc., are collectively referred to as the back surface portion (second surface) RS of the printed circuit board 1011 (or main control board 1010).

As shown in Figure 137, the printed circuit board 1011 is configured such that the interlayer distance (shortest distance between the two layers) DS1 between the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 is greater than the thickness TH1 of a single game token ML (DS1 > TH1). Therefore, as shown in Figure 138, even if the side edge of a game token ML comes into contact with the edge of the printed circuit board 1011 during inspection of the main control board 1010, the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 will not become electrically connected through the game token ML. Thus, it is possible to prevent the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 from being electrically short-circuited through the game token ML, which could cause malfunctions in electrical elements, etc. Note that the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 are not usually formed to reach the edge of the printed circuit board 1011. However, if the printed circuit board 1011 is damaged and partially missing, or if a portion of the printed circuit board 1011 is removed (for example, if an unexpected crack occurs in the board when the aforementioned drawing area is removed), the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 may be exposed at the edges of the printed circuit board 1011.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 139, the interlayer distance DS1 between the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 on the printed circuit board 1011 is less than half the radius of curvature CR1 of the pachinko ball PCB. Therefore, even if the surface (outer periphery) of the pachinko ball PCB comes into contact with the edge of the printed circuit board 1011 during inspection of the main control board 1010, the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 will not become electrically connected through the pachinko ball PCB. Thus, it is possible to prevent electrical short circuits between the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 through the pachinko ball PCB, which could cause malfunctions in electrical elements. The same relationship may also hold true for token materials other than the game tokens ML used in the game, such as currency, and for spherical materials other than the pachinko ball PCB, and the same effect can be obtained in such cases as well.

<Position and protrusion height of lead wires of electrical components mounted on a circuit board on the back side of the circuit board>
Figure 140 illustrates several types of electrical elements mounted on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 of the main control board 1010, and also shows the orientation and protrusion height of the lead wires of each electrical element on the back side of the board. The illustrated electrical elements are an IC driver 1020B, a resistor 1030C, an IC socket 1040B with a control chip 1050B mounted on it, and a ceramic capacitor 1060B. These electrical elements are illustrated in a simplified manner in Figure 140. The double arrow line DL1 shown in Figure 140 indicates a direction perpendicular to the back surface RS (front surface FS) of the printed circuit board 1011.

The IC driver 1020B has lead wires 1022 (only two shown) extending from the package portion 1021, passing through predetermined through-holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 1011. These lead wires protrude from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 in a position that is approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS (perpendicular (90°) or within a few degrees of error from perpendicular (e.g., 5°)). That is, the axis of the lead wires 1022 in the portion protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 is approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS and approximately parallel to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

The resistor 1030C has two lead wires 1032 extending from both ends of the package portion 1031. These lead wires bend as they pass through predetermined through-holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 1011, protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 at a predetermined inclination angle TA1 (for example, an angle within the range of 20° to 85°) with respect to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS. In other words, the portion of the lead wire 1032 protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 is significantly inclined with respect to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

The IC socket 1040B, into which the control chip 1050B is mounted, has lead wires 1042 (only four shown) extending from the receiving frame portion 1041. These lead wires pass through predetermined through-holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 1011, protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 in a position approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS. That is, the axis of the lead wires 1042 protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 is approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS and approximately parallel to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

The ceramic capacitor 1060B has two lead wires 1062 extending from the package portion 1061, which bend as they pass through predetermined through-holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 1011. The lead wires protrude from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 at a predetermined inclination angle TA2 (for example, an angle within the range of 20° to 85°) with respect to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS. That is, the portion of the lead wires 1062 protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 is significantly inclined with respect to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

The lead wire 1022 of the IC driver 1020B is thicker and/or stronger than the lead wire 1032 of the resistor 1030C, the lead wire 1042 of the IC socket 1040B, and the lead wire 1062 of the ceramic capacitor 1060B, and/or is made of a high-strength material. Furthermore, the protrusion height OH1 of the lead wire 1022 of the IC driver 1020B from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 (the shortest distance from the back surface RS to the tip of the lead wire 1022) is greater than the protrusion height OH2 of the lead wire 1032 of the resistor 1030C, the protrusion height OH3 of the lead wire 1042 of the IC socket 1040B, and the protrusion height OH4 of the lead wire 1062 of the ceramic capacitor 1060B (in this example, OH
The order of magnitude is 1 > OH2 > OH3 > OH4, but the relative sizes of OH2, OH3, and OH4 are not limited to this.

Therefore, when the main control board 1010 is placed on an inspection table or the like during inspection, the lead wires 1022 of the IC driver 1020B will contact the inspection table before the lead wires of other electrical components, preventing the lead wires of other electrical components from contacting the inspection table. Furthermore, the contact of the lead wires 1022 of the IC driver 1020B with the inspection table allows the IC driver 1020B to support the main control board 1010, enabling the main control board 1010 to stand on its own. On the other hand, if lead wires that are relatively weaker, such as the lead wire 1032 of the resistor 1030C or the lead wire 1062 of the ceramic capacitor 1060B, and whose protruding portions from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 are significantly inclined relative to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS, are configured to contact the inspection table first, there is a risk that these lead wires (lead wires 1032 and 1062) may deform upon contact, causing malfunctions.

Furthermore, if the main control board 1010 is accidentally dropped during inspection, the lead wires 1022 of the IC driver 1020B are more likely to come into contact with the inspection table or floor before the lead wires of other electrical components. Therefore, while the lead wires 1022 of the IC driver 1020B are subjected to impact, the possibility of impact on the lead wires of other electrical components is reduced. Because the lead wires 1022 of the IC driver 1020B are highly durable, impact may cause cracks or other damage to the soldered portion, making it easier to visually identify a malfunction. On the other hand, if a less durable lead wire is subjected to impact, it may only deform, and the likelihood of cracks or other damage to the soldered portion is low. Therefore, there is a risk that the malfunction may be overlooked.

In this embodiment, the IC driver's lead wires are configured to make contact with the inspection table or floor surface before the lead wires of other electrical elements. However, the lead wires of other electrical elements may be configured to make contact before the lead wires of the other electrical elements. In that case, it is preferable that the lead wires of those other electrical elements have higher strength than the lead wires of the other electrical elements.

<Component names printed on the surface of the circuit board>
As shown in Figure 141, multiple types of electrical elements are mounted in a predetermined area on the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 (the area within the rectangular frame FB50 shown by the solid line). The rectangular frame FB50 indicates the same area as the area indicated by the rectangular frame FB30 in Figure 135, but Figure 141 shows more types of electrical elements mounted within the area than Figure 135. Specifically, in the area within the rectangular frame FB50 in Figure 141, in addition to the information display lamp 1070A, resistor array 1080A, and LED element 1090A shown in the area within the rectangular frame FB30 in Figure 135, the following are mounted: an IC driver 1020C arranged horizontally, a resistor 1030D arranged horizontally, a resistor 1030E arranged vertically, ceramic capacitors 1060D and 1060E arranged vertically, and a transistor 1110A.

On the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011, the component names for each mounted electrical element are printed in white by silk screen printing near the respective components to allow identification of each electrical element. Specifically, the component names "R15", "SEG2", "RA3", and "IC11" are printed near the resistor 1030D, information indicator lamp 1070A, resistor array 1080A, and IC driver 1020C, respectively. In addition, ceramic capacitor 1060D, ceramic capacitor 1060E, transistor 1110A, resistor 1030E, and LED element 10
Near each of the 90A components, the component names "C27,""C29,""Q7,""R22," and "LED1" are printed. The English letters in each component name indicate the type of electrical element or the type of component of that element. For example, "R" indicates a resistor, "SEG" indicates a segment lamp, "RA" indicates a resistor array, "IC" indicates an integrated circuit, "C" indicates a ceramic capacitor, "Q" indicates a transistor, and "LED" indicates an LED element. If multiple component names are printed near a particular electrical element, it is generally possible to determine that the component name printed closest to that electrical element and containing English letters that match the type of that electrical element is the component name for that element. The silk screen printing that forms the component names and the component outlines described later is applied only to the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 and not to the back surface RS. In addition, the silk screen printing is applied so that each component name does not overlap with others.

Figure 141 corresponds to a front view of the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 (main control board 1010). That is, Figure 141 corresponds to the view when the front door 602 (see Figure 124) of the slot machine 601 is open, and a worker, such as a game hall employee, views the main control board 1010 installed inside the casing 605 from the front without tilting their head from side to side. Therefore, in Figure 141, the up, down, left, and right directions from the worker's viewpoint (indicated in parentheses next to each arrow in Figure 141) coincide with the up, down, left, and right directions in space (indicated without parentheses next to each arrow in Figure 141). Here, the up, down, left, and right directions from the worker's viewpoint are defined as the direction in which the worker's two eyes are aligned (left is to the left), and the direction perpendicular to that left-right direction is up (up is towards the top of the worker's head).

As shown in Figure 141, when the surface surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 is viewed from the front, the component names "R15", "SEG2", "RA3", and "IC11" printed on the surface surface FS are arranged in a left-to-right order. In other words, when the surface surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 is viewed from the front, these component names are arranged horizontally (left-to-right) with the characters oriented from left to right. In contrast, the component names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1" printed on the surface surface FS are arranged in a bottom-to-top order. In other words, when the surface surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 is viewed from the front, these component names are arranged horizontally (bottom-to-top) with the characters oriented from bottom to top (a left-to-right horizontal arrangement of characters (strings) rotated 90° to the left (counterclockwise)). Thus, when the surface surface (FS) is viewed from the front, any part name printed on the surface surface (FS) is arranged such that the characters constituting the part name are either arranged from left to right or from bottom to top.

Therefore, when the front door 602 of the slot machine 601 is open and the operator views the main control board 1010 from the front without tilting their head from side to side, the names of the components "R15," "SEG2," "RA3," and "IC11" are arranged in a natural order, as shown in Figure 141, where the characters constituting these component names are read from left to right from the operator's perspective. Therefore, these component names are easy for the operator to read and to see. In contrast, the names of the components "C27," "C29," "Q7," "R22," and "LED1" appear to be arranged in a way that requires the operator to read from bottom to top from their perspective.

On the other hand, Figure 142 corresponds to the case where the front door 602 of the slot machine 601 is open, and the operator places their body on the open end of the front door 602 or the front side of the main control board 1010 (the front side of the housing 605), tilting their head to the left (towards the hinge end of the front door 602) (90°) from the operator's perspective while looking at the main control board 1010. Therefore, in Figure 142, the up, down, left, and right directions from the operator's perspective (the up, down, left, and right directions indicated in parentheses with each arrow in Figure 142) do not coincide with the up, down, left, and right directions in space (the up, down, left, and right directions indicated without parentheses with each arrow in Figure 142) (they are shifted by 90°).

When the front door 602 of the slot machine 601 is open, and an operator positions their body on the open end of the front door 602 or in front of the main control board 1010, and tilts their head to the left from the operator's perspective while viewing the main control board 1010, the component names "C27," "C29," "Q7," "R22," and "LED1" will appear, as shown in Figure 142, to be in a natural order, readable from left to right from the operator's perspective. Therefore, these component names are easy for the operator to read and to see.

The same applies when the main control board 1010 is installed on the rear side of the front door 602, facing the housing 605. That is, when the front door 602 is open and the worker looks at the main control board 1010 installed on the rear side of the front door 602 from the front without tilting their head from side to side, the names of the components "R15", "SEG2", "RA3", and "IC11" appear to be in a natural order from the worker's perspective, with each character constituting the component name being read from left to right. Furthermore, when the front door 602 is open, and the worker places their body on the front side of the main control board 1010 (the front side of the back of the front door 602), and tilts their head to the left (towards the open end of the front door 602) from the worker's perspective, the names of the components "C27," "C29," "Q7," "R22," and "LED1" appear to be in a natural order, read from left to right from the worker's perspective.

If the main control board 1010 is installed on the rear side of the front door 602, facing the housing 605, then when the front door 602 is open, an operator may position their body on the open end of the front door 602 and tilt their head to the right (towards the hinge end of the front door 602) from the operator's perspective to view the main control board 1010. In this case, the letters constituting the component names "C27," "C29," "Q7," "R22," and "LED1" will appear upside down and arranged from right to left from the operator's perspective.

Therefore, when the main control board 1010 is installed on the back side of the front door 602, if an operator wants to confirm the part name, they can avoid this situation by not using the above-described method (tilting their head towards the hinge end of the front door 602). Note that the sub-control board in the slot machine 601 is installed on the back side of the front door 602, facing the housing 605, and the arrangement of the letters constituting each part name is the same as that of the main control board 1010. Therefore, the same situation as when the main control board 1010 is installed on the back side of the front door 602 can occur. However, by utilizing this situation, there is an advantage in that an operator can distinguish whether the board they are looking at with their head tilted towards the hinge end of the front door 602 is the main control board 1010 installed inside the housing 605 or the sub-control board installed on the back side of the front door 602, based on the arrangement of the letters constituting the part name.

As shown in Figure 141, the area within the rectangular frame FB50 on the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 contains characters indicating the manufacturer's name, board name (number), etc. (in this example, "NAME BANGOU33-X"). Unlike component names, these characters (also referred to as "board name characters") are not silk-screen printed but are formed from copper foil or other materials that make up the conductive layer. Therefore, they are less conspicuous than component names that are silk-screen printed in white. On the other hand, attempting to scrape off the board name characters would damage the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011, making the damage more noticeable. Therefore, this has the effect of deterring fraudulent acts such as scraping off the board name characters.

The names of each component are printed on the printed circuit board 1011 in a position that does not overlap with the land areas around the through-holes or the solder areas formed on the through-holes and land areas by soldering. For example, as shown in Figure 143(A), when printing the component name "LED" near a through-hole (not shown), it is printed so as not to overlap with the land area LND and the solder area SLR. This makes it possible to clearly see the component name. In contrast, as shown in Figure 143(B), if the component name "LED" is printed so as to partially overlap with the land area LND and the solder area SLR, part of the letter may be cut off, and it may become impossible to identify the printed letter as "LED". That is, in the example shown in Figure 143(B), there is a risk that the "L" in the component name "LED" may be mistakenly recognized as an "I", and the "E" may be mistakenly recognized as an "F". Even when printing component names that partially overlap the land area (LND) or solder area (SLR), it is preferable to limit the overlap to a degree that does not lead to such misidentification. While "LED" is used as an example here, the same applies to any other component name.

<Component outlines printed on the surface of the circuit board>
As shown in Figure 141, within the rectangular frame FB50 on the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011, component frames corresponding to the outer shapes of the electrical elements to be mounted are printed in white using silk screen printing. Specifically, component frames PB1 for resistor 1030D, PB2 for resistor 1030E, PB3 for ceramic capacitor 1060D, PB4 for ceramic capacitor 1060E, PB5 for transistor 1110A, PB6 for resistor array 1080A, and PB7 for LED element 1090A are printed. Component frames for information indicator lamp 1070A and IC driver 1020C are also printed, but are not shown in the illustration.

Each component border is printed on the printed circuit board 1011 in a position that avoids overlapping with the lands around through-holes or the solder formed on the through-holes and lands by soldering. For example, as shown in Figure 144, if the land area LND and solder area SLR to which the lead wires (not shown) of transistor 1110A are soldered are located near the mounting location of transistor 1110A, then the component border PB5 for transistor 1110A is printed so as not to overlap with the land area LND and solder area SLR. While the component border PB5 for transistor 1110A is used as an example here, the same applies to any other component border. It is preferable to print each component border slightly away from the land area LND, as shown in Figure 144, to prevent contact with the land area LND. This prevents the silkscreen printing ink from adhering to the land area LND or through-hole areas.

<Ensuring the visibility of information indicator lights>
As shown in Figure 141, the LED element 1090A is mounted relatively close to the information display lamp 1070A. Also, as shown in Figure 145, when the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011 is used as the height reference, the height HT1 of the information display lamp 1070A is higher than the height HT2 of the LED element 1090A (HT1 > HT2). Furthermore, the light emitted by the LED element 1090A is relatively bright. Therefore, there is a risk that the light emitted from the LED element 1090A will reach the information display lamp 1070A and be reflected off the side surface of the package portion 1071 of the information display lamp 1070A, reducing the visibility of the information displayed by the information display lamp 1070. To address this, the information display lamp 1070A is configured to have a matte finish (for example, white) on the side surface of the package portion 1071 to reduce light reflection. Specifically, the light reflectivity on the side surface of the package portion 1071 is configured to be lower than the light reflectivity of the lead wire 1072 of the information display lamp 1070A. This ensures that the visibility of the information displayed by the information display lamp 1070 is maintained even when the LED element 1090A is emitting light. When mounting the setting indicator lamp on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011, it is preferable to apply the same treatment to the side surface of the package portion of the setting indicator lamp.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The slot machine according to the fifth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "fifth form slot machine") will be described below with additional reference to Figures 146 to 153. The following description will mainly focus on the features of the fifth form slot machine. The features described below are not limited to the fifth form slot machine and can be combined with other embodiments. The fifth form slot machine shares or is similar in basic configuration to the first embodiment slot machine 1 described above, and therefore their descriptions will be omitted. Furthermore, the control processes such as the role determination process and reel control process described in slot machine 1 can be applied to the fifth form slot machine in the same way, or with some modifications to the processing content. The following describes the characteristic configuration of the slot machine in this embodiment.

<Probability of winning in the internal lottery>
Next, the probability of winning the internal draw performed in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the number of placements table shown in Figure 146. The number of placements table shown in this figure is the same as the number of placements table shown in the first embodiment (see Figure 23) and the number of placements table shown in the second embodiment (see Figures 90 and 91), and shows the number of placements (total number of placements is 65536) assigned to the winning numbers corresponding to 40 types of hands. In this embodiment as well, the random number generator corresponding to the random number generator 66 shown in Figure 2 is capable of generating pseudorandom numbers from 0 to 65535 (integer values), so there are 65536 possible random values for the pseudorandom numbers. Therefore, the value obtained by dividing each winning number of placements shown in the number of placements table in Figure 146 by 65536 is the probability of winning the corresponding hand.

In the placement table shown in Figure 146, winning number 1 is a bonus role, and the bonus role in this embodiment is a Type 1 BB (indicated as "Type 1 BB Only/Pure Miss" in Figure 146), similar to the first embodiment. Furthermore, the state where no bonus role has been won is "Non-Internal," and once a bonus role is won, the winning state is carried over until another bonus role is won, resulting in "Internal." Also, winning number 1 can only be won when "Non-Internal," and it cannot be won when "Internal" (placement count is "0"). While a detailed explanation is omitted, the bonus role in this embodiment is a game role that can be missed.

Winning numbers 2-5 are replayable symbols, and in this embodiment, there are four types: Replay A (winning number 2, condition device: Replay-A), Replay B (winning number 3, condition device: Replay-B), Normal Stop Chance Replay (winning number 4, condition device: Replay-C), and Sliding Chance Replay (winning number 5, condition device: Replay-D). Here, Replay A for winning number 1 cannot be won when "not internally active" (the number of units is "0"), and can only be won when "internally active". Furthermore, the Normal Stop Chance Replay for winning number 4 and the Sliding Chance Replay for winning number 5 are rare symbols. These replayable symbols are guaranteed to be won without any losses.

Winning numbers 6 to 40 are minor wins, and in this embodiment, there are nine main types: watermelon (winning number 6, condition device: win-A), strong cherry (winning number 7, condition device: win-B), weak cherry (winning number 8, condition device: win-C), evenly spaced bell (winning numbers 9 to 20, condition device: win-D1 to D12), biased bell (winning numbers 21 to 36, condition device: win-E1 to E16), common evenly spaced bell (winning number 37, condition device: win-F), common biased bell (winning number 38, condition device: win-G), 1-coin win + BB (winning number 39, condition device: win-H), and 1-coin win (winning number 40, condition device: win-I).

Watermelon, strong cherry, and weak cherry are rare symbols, which will be explained later, and are symbols that can be missed during gameplay. Here, the normal stop chance replay, sliding chance replay, or strong cherry, which have a low probability of winning (164 occurrences), are also called "high-rarity symbols," while the watermelon or weak cherry, which have a high probability of winning (636 occurrences), are also called "low-rarity symbols."

There are 12 types of evenly spaced button press bells. In the "Name" column of the placement table shown in Figure 146, the three-digit number following the notation "Evenly Spaced Button Press Bell" represents the button press sequence (hereinafter referred to as the "correct button press sequence") that will cause the combination of symbols with the highest payout on the winning line to stop and display. That is, as explained in the second embodiment, "123," "132," "213," "231," "312," and "321" represent the button press sequences "Left-Center-Right," "Left-Right-Center," "Center-Left-Right," "Center-Right-Left," "Center-Right-Left," and "Right-Center-Left," respectively. If the stop switch is operated with a button press sequence other than the correct sequence when any evenly spaced button press bell is triggered, depending on the timing of the stop operation, either a single-coin winning combination will be displayed or the prize will be missed.

There are 16 types of biased-press order bells. Similar to the even-press order bells, the three-digit number following "Biased-Press Order Bell" in the "Name" column of the placement table shown in Figure 146 represents the correct pressing order. If any biased-press order bell is triggered and the stop switch is operated with the correct pressing order, the combination of symbols that yields the highest payout will be displayed on the winning line. If the stop switch is operated with any other pressing order, depending on the timing of the stop operation, either a single-coin winning combination will be displayed, or the prize will be missed.

When we look at the number of correct button presses for each sequence, combining evenly spaced and biased button presses, the total number of presses where the first stop operation is the left stop switch is 300 x 4 = 1200, the total number of presses where the first stop operation is the middle stop switch is 300 x 4 + 700 x 8 = 6800, and the total number of presses where the first stop operation is the right stop switch is 300 x 4 + 700 x 8 = 6800. Therefore, the probability of winning is higher for button presses where the first stop operation is the middle or right stop switch than for button presses where the first stop operation is the left stop switch.

When a common even-order bell or a common biased-order bell is won, the symbol combination that will dispense a predetermined number of medals to the winning line will be displayed, regardless of the order in which the stop switch is pressed. The number of medals dispensed in this case is the same as the number of medals dispensed when the stop switch is pressed in the correct order when an even-order bell or a biased-order bell is won.

When a single-coin win + Big Bonus (BB) occurs, if the specified symbol combination is displayed on the winning line by precisely stopping the reels on the designated symbols, a sub-bonus game will begin from the next game. If the specified symbols are not stopped correctly, the single-coin win symbol combination will either be displayed or missed depending on the timing of the stop switches. If a single-coin win occurs, the single-coin win symbol combination will either be displayed or missed depending on the timing of the stop switches.

<Aerial combat scene>
Next, with reference to Figures 147 to 149, the content of the aerial combat sequence implemented in this embodiment will be described.
(Flow of the aerial combat sequence)
First, the flow of the aerial battle sequence will be explained with reference to Figure 147. As a premise, in this embodiment, the advantageous section includes at least three game states: "Normal,""ChanceZone," and "AT.""Normal" is the first game state to which the player transitions when moving from the Normal section to the Advantage Section. "Chance Zone" is a game state in which the number of AT games may be increased. "AT" is a game state in which, when an evenly matched bell (winning - D1 to D12) or a biased bell (winning - E1 to E16) is won in the internal lottery, the correct button press sequence is announced with a probability such that the net increase in coins per game during "AT" (also called "net increase rate") is approximately 2 coins (hereinafter referred to as "2.0 coins/G").

Furthermore, if the aforementioned sub-bonus game starts during "AT," the correct button sequence will be announced with a probability such that the net increase in coins per game during the sub-bonus game is approximately 5 coins (hereinafter referred to as "5.0 coins/G"). Here, the state of a net increase rate during "AT" (2.0 coins/G) is called the low net increase state, and the state of a net increase rate during the sub-bonus game (5.0 coins/G) is called the high net increase state. Also, the design value for the overall average net increase rate during "AT," considering the ratio of sections in the low net increase state to sections in the high net increase state, is 2.5 coins/G.

In "Normal" mode, if the internal lottery results in a win of any rare symbol (Normal Stop Chance Replay, Sliding Chance Replay, Watermelon, Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry), the game transitions to the "Chance Zone." If the predetermined termination conditions (described later) are met in the "Chance Zone," the game transitions to "AT." After a predetermined number of AT games in "AT," the game returns to "Normal" mode.

The aerial combat sequence is a feature where the player's aircraft and an enemy aircraft are displayed on the slot machine 1's screen 11a. The player's aircraft fires at the enemy aircraft, and if the enemy aircraft is successfully shot down, the number of games in "AT" mode is increased by a predetermined number. First, when a rare symbol is hit during the "normal" advantageous period, as shown in Figure 147(a), the weapon/enemy aircraft determination phase begins. The type of enemy aircraft appearing in the aerial combat sequence and the player's aircraft's weapon are determined according to the type of rare symbol hit. If a normal stop chance replay (winning number 4), watermelon (winning number 6), or weak cherry (winning number 8) is hit, the enemy aircraft becomes a bomber and its weapon is a missile. If a slide chance replay (winning number 5) or strong cherry (winning number 7) is hit, the enemy aircraft becomes a fighter jet and its weapon is a machine gun.

In "Normal" mode, hitting a rare role triggers a transition to the "Chance Zone" mode for the next game. While in the "Chance Zone," as shown in Figure 147(b), the game enters a shell/missile acquisition phase. If a rare role is hit through an internal lottery, the number of shells or missiles corresponding to the weapon determined when the rare role was hit in "Normal" mode is determined. Specifically, when a rare role is hit in the "Chance Zone," a weapon acquisition lottery is held. If the determined weapon is a missile, one of the following is selected: laser-guided missile (high hit probability), infrared-guided missile (medium hit probability), unguided missile (low hit probability), or none (acquisition failure). If the determined weapon is a machine gun, the number of shells (including 0) is determined by a weapon acquisition lottery. Furthermore, for each acquired missile or shell, a lottery (hit lottery) is held to determine whether or not it hits an enemy aircraft.

In this embodiment, if a rare role is won five times in the internal lottery while staying in the "Chance Zone," the game state will transition from the "Chance Zone" to "AT."
If a rare role is hit for the fifth time in the "Chance Zone," and the start lever 25 shown in Figure 1 is tilted during the next game (i.e., the first game after transitioning to "AT"), the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c will freeze before they start to rotate, and the battle phase shown in Figure 147(c) will begin. In the battle phase, the display screen 11a of the image display device 11 shown in Figure 1 will display a title screen indicating the start of battle, followed by the player's aircraft, enemy aircraft (bomber or fighter), and the number of shells or missiles acquired during the "Chance Zone."

When the start lever 25 is tilted in this state, the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, which are currently stopped, rotate forward by a predetermined angle, and then rotate backward to return to their original stopping positions. Here, "forward direction" refers to the direction in which each reel rotates when playing a game (a game in which bonuses are awarded according to the combination of symbols displayed on each reel) in the slot machine 1 (the direction of the arrows in Figure 78), and "backward direction" refers to the direction opposite to the "forward direction." Rotating or turning in the forward direction is also called "forward rotation," and rotating or turning in the reverse direction is also called "reverse rotation." As a result, the player will perceive each reel as vibrating in response to the tilting operation of the start lever 25. Alternatively, each reel may be rotated backward by a predetermined angle and then rotated forward to return to its original position. In addition, each time the start lever 25 is tilted, a video showing the player's machine firing a machine gun or missile is displayed on the display screen 11a, and the number of projectiles or missiles displayed is reduced. Here, cannonballs or missiles are fired in the order they were acquired during the "Chance Zone".

If the fired shell or missile is the one that was selected in the aforementioned hit lottery, reels 3a, 3b, and 3c will rotate 1 full turn in the opposite direction, and a video showing the enemy aircraft being shot down will be displayed on screen 11a. After the number of games added to the AT game count is displayed, a new enemy aircraft will be shown. Once all acquired shells or missiles have been fired, the aerial combat sequence will end, the freeze state will be released, and the AT game will begin.

(Processing related to aerial combat sequences)
Next, an example of the processing performed by the main control means 100 in order to execute the aerial combat sequence described above will be explained with reference to Figures 148 and 149. Here, the aerial combat sequence processing shown in Figures 148 and 149 is performed after a predetermined number of tokens have been inserted into the slot machine 1, the start lever 25 has been tilted, an internal draw has been performed, and before the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c begin to rotate.

When the aerial combat simulation process shown in Figure 148 is initiated, the main control unit 100 first determines whether the hit determination flag stored in the RWM (Read-Write Memory) of the main control unit 100 is turned on (step Sb2). Here, the hit determination flag indicates whether the situation is such that a hit on an enemy aircraft should be determined for each shell or missile acquired in the shell/missile acquisition phase shown in Figure 147(b). When it is on, it indicates that the situation is such that a hit on an enemy aircraft should be determined. If the hit determination flag is on, the result of the determination in step Sb1 is YES, and a hit determination lottery is performed to determine whether each acquired shell/missile hit an enemy aircraft (details will be described later).

If the hit detection flag is off, the result of step Sb1 is NO, and it is determined whether the current game state is a "chance zone" (step Sb2). If the current game state is not a "chance zone," the result of the determination is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the aerial combat animation processing and performs other processing. If the current game state is a "chance zone," the result of the determination in step Sb2 is YES, and it is determined whether the weapon acquisition flag stored in the RWM (hereinafter simply referred to as "RWM") provided by the main control means 100 is on (step Sb3).

If the weapon acquisition flag is not turned on, the result of the judgment in step Sb3 will be NO, and the main control means 100 will determine the type of enemy aircraft and weapon that will appear in the aerial combat sequence according to the result of the internal lottery (step Sb4). Specifically, if the rare roles shown in Figure 146, such as the normal stop chance replay (winning number 4), watermelon (winning number 6), or weak cherry (winning number 8), are won, the enemy aircraft will be a bomber and its weapon will be a missile. If the sliding chance replay (winning number 5) or strong cherry (winning number 7) is won, the enemy aircraft will be a fighter jet and its weapon will be a machine gun. The determined type of enemy aircraft and weapon is then transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step Sb5). As a result, the sub-control means 200 displays a screen on the display screen 11a indicating that the aerial combat sequence has started, and then displays the player's aircraft and the determined type of enemy aircraft (bomber or fighter jet). After completing step Sb5, the main control means 100 then turns on the weapon acquisition flag (step Sb6), and the aerial combat simulation process shown in Figure 148 ends.

Next, in step Sb3, if the weapon acquisition flag is ON, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs a weapon acquisition lottery according to the result of the internal lottery (step Sb7). Here, if the weapon acquisition flag is ON, it means that it is the period for acquiring ammunition or missiles. In the weapon acquisition lottery, if the weapon determined in step Sb4 is a machine gun, the number of ammunition to be acquired (including 0) is determined, and if a missile is determined, the type of missile (including the case where it cannot be acquired) is determined. Specifically, a weapon acquisition lottery is performed when a rare role is won in the internal lottery. In this weapon acquisition lottery, if the type of weapon determined in step Sb4 is a machine gun, the number of ammunition is determined, and if it is a missile, the type (laser-guided missile (high hit rate), infrared-guided missile (medium hit rate), unguided missile (low hit rate), or none (acquisition failure)) is determined.

Furthermore, when a high-rarity role (normal stop chance replay, sliding chance replay, strong cherry) is won, the probability of obtaining a weapon is higher than when a low-rarity role (watermelon, weak cherry) is won. For example, if the determined weapon is a missile, if a high-rarity role is won in the internal lottery, the probability of obtaining a missile with a higher hit rate is higher than when a low-rarity role is won. Similarly, if the determined weapon is a machine gun, if a high-rarity role is won, the probability of obtaining more ammunition is higher than when a low-rarity role is won.

In step Sb7, a weapon acquisition lottery is performed. Next, the main control unit 100 determines whether or not a machine gun shell or missile has been acquired as a result of the weapon acquisition lottery (step Sb8). If a shell or missile has been acquired, the determination result is YES, and the number of acquired shells or missiles (1 in the case of missiles) is added to the value of the weapon counter stored in the RWM (step Sb9). Here, the weapon counter is a counter used to count the number of acquired shells or missiles. Furthermore, if the determined weapon is a missile, the type of missile acquired (laser-guided, infrared-guided, or unguided) is also stored in the RWM, corresponding to the count value of the weapon counter. Then, the number of acquired shells or missile type as a result of the weapon acquisition lottery in step Sb7 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 (step Sb10). As a result, the sub-control unit 200 displays the number of acquired shells or missile type on the display screen 11a.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the conditions for ending the period during which a projectile or missile can be acquired (hereinafter also referred to as the "weapon acquisition period") have been met (step Sb11). If the result of the determination in step Sb8 is NO, the determination process in step Sb11 is performed immediately without performing the processes in steps Sb9 and Sb10. In this embodiment, the conditions for ending the weapon acquisition period are the same as the conditions for ending the "chance zone," which are that a rare role is won five times in the internal lottery during the "chance zone." If the conditions for ending the weapon acquisition period have not been met, the result of the determination in step Sb11 is NO, and the aerial combat performance process in Figure 148 is terminated. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the weapon acquisition period have been met, the result of the determination in step Sb11 is YES, the main control means 100 turns off the weapon acquisition flag (step Sb12), and determines whether the value of the weapon counter is greater than 0 (in other words, whether it is 1 or greater) (step Sb13).

In step Sb13, if the weapon counter value is 0, the judgment result is NO, and the aerial combat sequence shown in Figure 148 is terminated. Since the weapon acquisition period has ended (the judgment result in step Sb11 is YES), the "chance zone" has also ended. Therefore, in the next game, the judgment results in steps Sb1 and Sb2 will both be NO, and no further processing for subsequent steps will be performed. Conversely, if the weapon counter value is 1 or greater, the judgment result is YES, and the weapon counter value is set to the hit lottery counter value (step Sb14). The hit lottery counter is a counter referenced when determining whether each acquired shell or missile hit an enemy aircraft, and its count value is stored in the RWM.

The main control means 100 then turns on the hit determination flag (step Sb15), ending the aerial combat simulation process shown in Figure 148. The hit determination flag indicates whether a hit determination lottery is being conducted to determine whether each acquired shell or missile hit an enemy aircraft. When it is on, it indicates that a hit determination lottery is being conducted. The state of the hit determination flag (on or off) is stored in the RWM.

In step Sb2, if the hit determination flag was on, the determination result was YES, and the main control means 100 read the value of the hit lottery counter stored in the RWM (step Sb16), and performed a hit lottery for that value (which can also be described as a unique number assigned to each acquired shell or missile) (step Sb17). The probability of winning this hit lottery (hit rate) is uniform for shells, but for missiles, it differs depending on the type of missile acquired, as mentioned above.

Then, it is determined whether the hit lottery was successful (hit) (step Sb18). If successful, the result is YES, and an additional lottery is performed to determine the number of games to be added to the initial AT game count (AT additional game count) (step Sb19). The value of the hit lottery counter at that time is then saved as the hit number (the number of the shell or missile that hit the enemy aircraft) along with the determined AT additional game count in the RWM (step Sb20).

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the number of hit numbers stored in the RWM has reached 10 (step Sb21). If the number of stored hit numbers is less than 10, the determination result is NO, and then it determines whether the value of the hit draw counter is greater than 0 (step Sb22). If the determination result in step Sb18 is NO, the process in steps Sb19 to Sb21 is skipped, and the determination process in step Sb22 is performed directly. If the value of the hit draw counter is not greater than 0, the determination result is NO, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the hit draw counter (step Sb23). Then, the process returns to step Sb17, and a hit draw is performed for the next shell or missile.

If the judgment result in step Sb21 or Sb22 is YES, the hit lottery process is completed, and the main control means 100 transmits the value of the weapon counter stored in the RWM, each hit number, and the corresponding number of AT bonus games to the sub-control means 200. At this time, if the determined weapon is a missile, information indicating the type of missile acquired is also transmitted to the sub-control means 200. As a result, the sub-control means 200 displays the number of acquired shells or the type of missile on the display screen 11a. Then, the hit judgment flag is turned off (step Sb25), the battle animation process described later is performed (step Sb26), and when the battle animation process is completed, the aerial battle animation process shown in Figure 148 is terminated.

Next, referring to the flowchart shown in Figure 149, the content of the battle animation processing performed in step Sb25 of Figure 148 will be explained. First, the main control means 100 transitions the slot machine 1 to a frozen state (step Sb30). Specifically, as mentioned above, the aerial battle animation processing is executed after the start lever 25 is tilted and the internal draw has taken place, so the rotation control of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is delayed. Then, after the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a shown in Figure 1 is blinked (step Sb31), it is determined whether or not the MAX-BET switch 23 has been operated (step Sb32).

In other words, flashing the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a suggests to the player that the battle sequence can be canceled. For example, if a re-spin winning combination was achieved in the previous spin, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a would normally not flash during the next spin. However, during a battle sequence, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a can flash even in such cases.

If the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated, the judgment result is YES, and a performance cancellation command is sent to the sub-control means 200 (step Sb33). The performance cancellation command indicates that the aerial battle performance has been canceled by the player. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control means 200 switches from the image of the aerial battle performance displayed on the display screen 11a to an image representing the total number of AT bonus games transmitted from the main control means 100, as processed in step Sb24 of Figure 148. Then, proceeding to step Sb45, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is turned off, and in step Sb46, the freeze state is released, and gameplay on the slot machine 1 resumes.

Furthermore, even if the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated during the decision-making process in step Sb32 described above, the main control means 100 does not execute the process of inserting a predetermined number of game tokens from the credited (stored) tokens. Alternatively, instead of canceling the aerial combat sequence by operating the MAX-BET switch 23, the system may skip to the next projectile corresponding to the next hit number (the next projectile that is determined to hit the enemy aircraft by the hit lottery in step Sb17 of Figure 148). In this case, each time the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated, the reels may be swayed, and a video of the next projectile, which is determined to hit the enemy aircraft, being fired may be displayed. Alternatively, if the start lever 25 is tilted after operating the MAX-BET switch 23, a projectile or missile firing sequence will be performed as described later, and the fired projectile or missile will always hit the enemy aircraft.

In the decision-making process of step Sb32, if the MAX-BET switch 23 is not operated, the decision result is NO, and after transitioning to a freeze state, it is determined whether or not the start lever 25 has been tilted (changed from off to on) (step Sb34). If the start lever 25 has changed from off to on, the decision result is YES, and a firing command is sent to the sub-control means 200 (step Sb35). The firing command indicates that the start lever 25 has been tilted by the player. When the sub-control means 200 receives this command, it displays a video on the display screen 11a showing a machine gun shell or missile being fired from the player's machine. It also displays an image on the display screen 11a indicating that the number of shells or missiles displayed has decreased by the amount fired.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether there is a hit number among those transmitted from the main control means 100 that is equal to the current weapon counter value (step Sb36), based on the processing in step Sb24 of Figure 148. If there is a hit number that matches the current weapon counter value, the determination result is YES, and the hit flag is turned ON (step Sb37). The hit flag is a flag that indicates whether or not a shell or missile fired in the battle simulation hit an enemy aircraft, and when it is ON, it indicates that an enemy aircraft was hit. Then, 1 is subtracted from the weapon counter value (step Sb38) and the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are swung (step Sb39). This swung reels refer to the movement in which the stationary reels 3a, 3b, and 3c rotate a few steps in the forward direction (the direction in which the reels rotate during gameplay), and then rotate a few steps in the reverse direction (the opposite direction to the direction in which the reels rotate during gameplay), returning each reel to its original position. If the result of step Sb36 is NO, the main control means 100 proceeds to the decision process in step Sb38 without performing the process in step Sb37.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the aforementioned hit flag is on (step Sb40). If the hit flag is on, the determination result is YES, and a hit command is sent to the sub-control means 200. The hit command indicates that a shell or missile fired in the combat simulation has hit an enemy aircraft. When the sub-control means 200 receives this command, it displays a video on the display screen 11a showing the enemy aircraft being shot down. Then, the main control means 100 turns off the hit flag (step Sb42) and rotates the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c in the reverse direction (step Sb43). This creates an effect where the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c rotate in reverse, in sync with the image of the enemy aircraft being shot down displayed on the display screen 11a.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the weapon counter value exceeds 0 (step Sb44). If the result of the determination in step Sb40 is NO, the process in steps Sb41 to Sb43 is skipped, and the process in step Sb44 is performed directly. In step Sb44, if the weapon counter value exceeds 0, the determination result is YES, and the process proceeds to step Sb32. Conversely, if the weapon counter value is 0, the determination result is NO, and in order to terminate the battle animation process, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is turned off (step Sb45), the freeze state is released (step Sb46), and the battle animation process shown in Figure 149, and consequently the aerial battle animation process shown in Figure 148, is terminated.

In the judgment process of step Sb34 described above, if the start lever 25 has not changed from off to on, the judgment result is NO. Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the weapon determined in step Sb4 of Figure 148 is a machine gun (step Sb47). If the weapon is not a machine gun (i.e., it is a missile), the judgment result is NO, and the process returns to step Sb32. Conversely, if the weapon is a machine gun, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the start lever 25 is pressed down (on state continues for a predetermined time) (step Sb48). Here, the determination of whether the start lever 25 is pressed down is made using a conventional method, and a detailed explanation is omitted. If the start lever 25 is not pressed down, the judgment result is NO, and the process returns to step Sb32.

In the decision-making process of step Sb47, if the start lever 25 was pressed and held, the decision result is YES, and the aforementioned firing command is sent to the sub-control means 200 (step Sb49). As a result, the sub-control means 200 displays a video on the display screen 11a showing the machine gun firing, and also displays an image on the display screen 11a indicating that the number of fired rounds has decreased from the number of rounds displayed.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether any of the hit numbers transmitted from the main control means 100 match the current weapon counter value (step Sb50), based on the processing in step Sb24 of Figure 148. If there is a hit number that matches the current weapon counter value, the determination result is YES, and the aforementioned hit flag is turned ON (step Sb51). Then, 1 is subtracted from the weapon counter value (step Sb52), and then 1 is added to the rapid-fire counter value (step Sb53). Here, the rapid-fire counter is used to count the number of rounds fired in rapid succession from the machine gun during combat simulation, and its value is stored in the RWM. If the determination result in step Sb50 is NO, the main control means 100 proceeds to the determination process in step Sb52 without performing the processing in step Sb51.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the rapid-fire counter has reached 3 (step Sb54). If the value of the rapid-fire counter is not 3, the determination result is NO, and the process returns to step Sb48. On the other hand, if the value of the rapid-fire counter is 3, the determination result is YES, the value of the rapid-fire counter is reset to 0, and the process proceeds to step Sb39 described above. Subsequently, if the start lever 25 is pressed and held, the processes of steps Sb48 to Sb54 are repeatedly executed until the value of the rapid-fire counter reaches 3, at which point the process proceeds to step Sb39.

As a result, when the weapon is determined to be a machine gun in step Sb4 of Figure 148, and the start lever 25 is pressed and held during the combat animation process in Figure 149, each reel will vibrate once, and the number of shells displayed on the display screen 11a will decrease by three (however, the number of remaining shells displayed on the display screen 11a will not decrease by three simultaneously, but one at a time). This allows the decrease in shells to be displayed in a rhythmic manner, regardless of the reel vibration cycle, providing the player with a sense of exhilaration.

As shown in Figure 149, the combat animation process causes each reel to swing in accordance with the tilting operation of the start lever 25 (step Sb34, YES) (step Sb39). In the aerial combat animation, the start lever 25 acts as a trigger, enhancing the excitement of the animation. Furthermore, if the start lever 25 is pressed and held, the machine gun shells will be fired in rapid succession. If a very large number of shells (e.g., 1000) are acquired, it becomes unnecessary to tilt the start lever 25 each time, reducing the burden on the player. Also, when shells are being fired in rapid succession, the reels are controlled to swing only once for every three shells fired. By reducing the number of times the reels swing in this way, the stepping motor that swings the reels is less likely to lose step, allowing for smoother reel swinging. Furthermore, even if the number of reel oscillations is reduced, the rapid rate at which the projectiles decrease during rapid firing makes it visually appear as if the firing of the projectiles and the oscillation of the reel are synchronized.

In the aerial combat sequence shown in Figure 148, the hit detection for acquired shells or missiles (steps Sb16 to Sb28) was performed all at once after the acquisition period ended. However, it is also possible to perform the hit detection for each shell or missile acquired (step Sb8, YES). Furthermore, in the aerial combat sequence described above, the firing of shells or missiles was performed by tilting the start lever 25. However, in a sequence where an enemy character and the player character engage in combat, for example, the animation of striking the enemy character may be performed by tilting the start lever 25. Also, if the start lever 25 is not tilted for a certain period of time (for example, 70 seconds) during the combat sequence, the combat sequence may proceed as if the start lever 25 had been tilted once. In this way, for example, even when the game is run by a test device during a performance test of the slot machine 1, the game of the slot machine 1 can be advanced. Also, for example, even if the player temporarily leaves the slot machine 1, the progression of the combat sequence takes time, making it easier to enjoy the shooting sequence when they return.

<Ending section transition control>
Next, with reference to Figures 150 and 151, the contents of the transition control to the ending section implemented in this embodiment will be described.
(Ending section)
In this embodiment, regardless of the number of games played during the advantageous period, the advantageous period ends when the number of payouts during the "AT" game state reaches 3250 coins (and the "AT" also ends when the advantageous period ends). However, if the advantageous period ends without any warning, players may become disappointed and their motivation to play may decrease. Therefore, in this embodiment, a presentation (hereinafter referred to as the "ending presentation") is made to suggest to the player that the end of the advantageous period is approaching. In this embodiment, when the number of payouts during "AT" reaches 3000 coins, the game transitions to the ending period and the ending presentation begins. Furthermore, once the game transitions to the ending period, it enters a high-payout state and remains in the ending period without transitioning to any other game state until the number of payouts reaches 3250 coins (i.e., until the advantageous period ends). In this embodiment, if the net increase in coins after the start of the advantageous period exceeds 2400 coins during the "AT," the "AT" will end. For example, if it is decided to transition to "AT" when the advantageous period begins, the transition to the ending period will occur when the net increase in coins reaches 2000.

(Overview of transition control to the ending section)
Next, the overview of the control for transitioning to the ending section during the advantageous section of this embodiment will be explained with reference to the graph shown in Figure 150. In the graph shown in Figure 150, the horizontal axis represents the number of games played since the start of "AT", and the vertical axis represents the number of medals paid out since the start of "AT". Furthermore, on the horizontal axis, the section indicated by "L _n " (where n is an integer from 1 to 4) represents the low net increase state (2.0 medals/G) (the section during "AT"), and the section indicated by "H _n " (where n is an integer from 1 to 4) represents the high net increase state (5.0 medals/G) (the section during the sub-bonus game). These low net increase and high net increase states are achieved by making the notification probability of the correct button press order different when an evenly matched button press order bell (winning - D1 to D12) or a biased button press order bell (winning - E1 to E16) is won in the internal lottery. In other words, the notification probability of the correct button press order is higher in the high net increase state than in the low net increase state.

First, when the game state transitions to "AT" (Automatic Trigger), the number of medals paid out increases at a low net increase rate (2.0 medals/game). Then, when a sub-bonus game starts during "AT," the number of medals paid out increases at a high net increase rate (5.0 medals/game), resulting in a steeper slope on the graph than during the low net increase period. While the number of medals paid out increases through repeated execution of "AT" and sub-bonus games, if, during the low net increase period, the total number of medals paid out up to that point (cumulative payout) and the remaining number of AT games indicate that the condition for ending the advantageous period (cumulative payout of 3250 medals) will be met by playing the remaining AT games, the game transitions to the ending period before meeting the original ending period condition (cumulative payout of 3000 medals). The game then continues in a high net increase state until the condition for ending the advantageous period is met.

For example, as shown in Figure 150, suppose that in the low net increase state _L4 , when the cumulative number of payouts reaches 2500, there are 300 AT games remaining. Here, since the design value for the average net increase rate in the low net increase state is 2.5 coins/G, it is expected that 750 coins (= 300 x 2.5) will be paid out in the remaining 300 games. As a result, the cumulative number of payouts after the remaining 300 games will be 3250 coins (= 2500 coins + 750 coins), and it is expected that the conditions for ending the advantageous section will be met. Therefore, in this case, when the number of remaining AT games reaches 300, the game will transition to the ending section and enter the high net increase state _H4 .

As a result, while the condition for ending the advantageous period would normally be met with 300 games remaining (as shown by the dashed line in the graph of Figure 150), it can be met with 750 coins ÷ 5.0 coins/game = 150 games. In this way, when it is expected that the condition for ending the advantageous period will be met within the remaining number of games, the transition to the ending period is made earlier than the original transition, allowing the condition for ending the advantageous period to be met in fewer games, thus reducing the physical burden of operations required to play the game.

Furthermore, for example, even if the number of AT games is increased while the current payout is approaching the payout amount that triggers the termination of the advantageous section during AT, it is possible that the payout amount triggering the termination of the advantageous section may be reached before all of the increased AT games are played. In such cases, there is a risk of giving the player a sense of loss. However, in this embodiment, if there is a prospect of reaching the payout amount triggering the termination of the advantageous section with the remaining AT games, the advantageous section can be terminated early by entering a high-net-increase state. This reduces the occurrence of unused additional games and minimizes the risk of giving the player an unnecessary sense of loss.

Furthermore, if the game is designed in a way that makes it more advantageous for the player to transition to an advantageous zone during an internal state than during a non-internal state (for example, if the probability of transitioning to "AT" is higher (e.g., a 50% chance of transitioning to "AT"), or if the game state is guaranteed to transition to "AT" after a relatively small number of games (e.g., 100 games) once the advantageous zone begins), then by transitioning to the ending zone early in the current advantageous zone, the duration of the advantageous zone can be shortened, reducing the number of games played until the next advantageous zone is reached and "AT" begins. This can enhance the enjoyment of the game and the player's motivation to play.

(Processing to control the transition to the ending section)
Next, referring to the flowchart in Figure 151, an example of the process for realizing the transition control to the ending section shown in Figure 150 will be explained. The ending transition control process shown in Figure 151 is executed by the main control means 100 after a predetermined number of tokens have been inserted into the slot machine 1, the start lever 25 has been tilted, an internal draw has been performed, and the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c have started to rotate.

When the ending transition control process shown in Figure 151 is started, the main control means 100 first determines whether the current game state is "AT" (step Sb60). If the current game state is not "AT", the determination result is NO, the ending transition control process ends, and other processing is performed. If the current game state is "AT", the determination result in step Sb60 is YES, and it is determined whether the ending flag stored in the RWM is ON (step Sb61). Here, the ending flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the game has transitioned to the ending section; when it is ON, it indicates that the game has transitioned to the ending section.

If the ending flag is turned off, the result of the judgment will be NO, and the main control means 100 will determine whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous section will be met with the remaining number of AT games (step Sb62). More specifically, the main control means 100 will determine whether or not the following equation is true.
P×g≦O _e −O … (1)
Here, P is the average net increase rate while in "AT" (2.5 coins/G in this embodiment), g is the remaining number of games in AT, O _e is the cumulative number of coins that will trigger a transition to the ending section, and O is the current cumulative number of coins. Equation (1) allows us to determine whether the expected number of coins that will be paid out when the remaining number of games in AT are played is less than or equal to the number of coins required to transition to the ending section based on the current cumulative number of coins.

If equation (1) above is true, the result of step Sb62 is YES, the aforementioned ending flag is turned ON (step Sb63), and it is determined whether either the evenly ordered bell (winning combination - D1 to D12) or the biased bell (winning combination - E1 to E16) was won in the internal draw (step Sb64). If the result of step Sb61 is NO, the process proceeds to step Sb64 without performing steps Sb62 and Sb63. Similarly, if the result of step Sb62 is NO, the process proceeds to step Sb64 without performing step Sb63. In the determination process of step Sb64, if neither the evenly ordered bell nor the biased bell was won, the result is NO, and the ending transition control process shown in Figure 151 is terminated.

If either an evenly-ordered bell or a biased-ordered bell is won, the result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not a sub-bonus game is currently being played (step Sb65). If the sub-bonus game is not being played, the result is NO, and the main control means 100 then determines whether or not the aforementioned ending flag is ON (step Sb66). If the ending flag is OFF, the result is NO, and the main control means 100 performs a low-net-increase-increase-increase-increase-increase-increase-increase-increase-increase-increase lottery (step Sb67). The low-net-increase

On the other hand, if the result of step Sb65 or Sb66 is YES (during a sub-bonus game or when the ending flag is on), the main control means 100 performs a high-payout button-press order notification lottery (step Sb68). The high-payout button-press order notification lottery is a lottery to determine whether or not to notify the correct button-press order for the evenly matched or biased button-press order bell that was won in the internal lottery. It is determined that the correct button-press order will be notified with a probability such that the net increase in coins per game is 5.0.

The main control means 100, after performing either the low-net-increase button-press notification lottery in step Sb67 or the high-net-increase button-press notification lottery in step Sb68, determines whether or not a win has occurred in either of these button-press notification lotteries (step Sb69). If a win has not occurred in the button-press notification lottery, the determination result is NO, and the ending transition control process shown in Figure 151 terminates. Conversely, if a win occurs in the button-press notification lottery, the determination result is YES, and the correct button-press sequence for the button-press bell that was won in the internal lottery is announced (step Sb70), and the ending transition control process shown in Figure 151 terminates.

<Button press order notification control during the advantageous period>
Next, with reference to Figures 152 and 153, the contents of the button press order notification control implemented in this embodiment during the advantageous period will be described.
(Overview of button press order notification control)
Next, an overview of the button-press order notification control during the advantageous period in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the graph shown in Figure 152. In the graph shown in Figure 152, the horizontal axis represents the number of games played since the start of the advantageous period, and the vertical axis represents the net increase in coins during the advantageous period. In this embodiment, the advantageous period ends when the net increase in coins during the advantageous period reaches 2400 coins.

First, from the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section until 8000 games have been played, when an evenly matched or biased bell combination is won in the internal lottery, the game state ("Normal")
The correct button press sequence is announced with a probability corresponding to the "Chance Zone,""AT,""Sub-Bonus," etc. This state in which the correct button press sequence is announced is called the first state. After 8000 games have passed since entering the advantageous section, the correct button press sequence is announced with a probability such that the ratio of the number of coins paid out to the number of coins inserted (hereinafter also called the "payout rate") is 105%, until the net increase in coins reaches 2000 coins (there is a margin of 400 coins in net increase until the condition for ending the advantageous section (net increase of 2400 coins) is met). This state in which the correct button press sequence is announced is called the second state. Furthermore, after the net increase in coins reaches 2000 coins in the second state, the correct button press sequence is announced with a probability such that the net increase in coins is maintained. This state in which the correct button press sequence is announced is called the third state. This third state is maintained at least while slot machine 1 is in operation.

(Control processing for notifying the order of button presses during the advantageous period)
Next, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 153, an example of the process for realizing the push-order notification control shown in Figure 152 will be explained. The push-order notification control process shown in Figure 153 is executed by the main control means 100 after a predetermined number of tokens have been inserted into the slot machine 1, the start lever 25 has been tilted, an internal draw has been performed, and the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c have started to rotate.

When the button-press order notification control process shown in Figure 153 is started, the main control means 100 first determines whether the current game section is an advantageous section (step Sb80). If the current game section is not an advantageous section, the determination result is NO, the button-press order notification control process ends, and other processing is performed. On the other hand, if the current game section is an advantageous section, the determination result in step Sb80 becomes YES, and 1 is added to the value of the advantageous section game count counter stored in the RWM (step Sb81). Here, the advantageous section game count counter counts the number of games played in the advantageous section.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether either an evenly matched bell (winning - D1 to D12) or a biased bell (winning - E1 to E16) has been won in the internal lottery (step Sb82). If neither an evenly matched bell nor a biased bell has been won, the determination result is NO, and the button press notification control process shown in Figure 153 ends. On the other hand, if either an evenly matched bell or a biased bell has been won, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 refers to the value of the advantageous section game counter and determines whether the number of games in the advantageous section has exceeded 8000 (step Sb83). If the number of games in the advantageous section has not exceeded 8000, the determination result is NO, and the correct button press sequence is notified with a probability corresponding to the game state ("normal", "chance zone", "AT", "sub-bonus", etc.) (step Sb84), and the button press notification control process shown in Figure 153 ends. Here, the period from the start of the advantageous period until the number of games played reaches 8000 is the first state shown in Figure 152.

In response to this, in the judgment process of step Sb83, if the number of games played during the advantageous period exceeds 8000, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the net increase in coins during the advantageous period is less than 2000 (step Sb85). If the net increase in coins during the advantageous period is less than 2000, the judgment result is YES, and the correct button press sequence for the button press bell that was won in the internal lottery is announced with a first probability (step Sb86). Here, the first probability is the probability at which the payout rate becomes 105%, and for example, in this embodiment, the correct button press sequence is announced with a probability of 40%. After the main control means 100 completes the process of step Sb86, it terminates the button press sequence notification control process shown in Figure 153.

In the judgment process of step Sb85, if the net increase in coins during the advantageous period is 2000 or more, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 notifies the correct button press order of the button press bell that was won in the internal lottery with a second probability (step Sb87), and terminates the button press order notification control process shown in Figure 153. Here, the second probability is the probability that the correct button press order will almost never be notified, for example, in this embodiment, the probability that the correct button press order will be notified is 0.8%. Then, after performing the process in step Sb87, the main control means 100 terminates the button press order notification control process shown in Figure 153.

As a result of the processing in steps Sb83 to Sb87 described above, after the number of games in the advantageous period exceeds 8000, the correct button press sequence is announced with the first probability solely through the processing in step Sb87 until the net increase in coins reaches 2000, resulting in the second state shown in Figure 152. Furthermore, after the net increase in coins exceeds 2000, the system enters the third state, and the correct button press sequence is announced with the second probability until the net increase in coins falls below 2000. Once the net increase in coins decreases to less than 2000, the system reverts to the second state and announces the correct button press sequence with the first probability. This control of the announcement of the correct button press sequence maintains the net increase in coins at approximately 2000, resulting in the third state shown in Figure 152.

Thus, if, after transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section continues in the first state for a long period of 8000 games (i.e., the net increase in tokens, which is the condition for the end of the advantageous section, does not reach 2400 tokens), then after 8000 games, the system transitions to the second state (payout rate of 105%), increasing the number of tokens paid out and accumulated, thus acting as a kind of relief measure for the player. Furthermore, if the net increase in tokens reaches 2000 tokens in the second state, the system transitions to the third state to maintain the net increase at 2000 tokens by suppressing the notification of the correct button press sequence. Therefore, the relief measure (second state) does not excessively stimulate the player's gambling instincts.

Furthermore, if, for example, a freeze lottery is performed in at least one of the second and third states, similar to the first state, and if the freeze lottery is won, the system transitions to "AT" mode, then the AT game may be played in the winning state (second or third state). Also, even if the system reaches the second or third state, the normal animations (animations performed when not in "AT" mode) may be executed, and the percentage of correct button press notifications may increase even though the system does not appear to have transitioned to "AT" mode. Even with this configuration, the system may transition to "AT" mode only if the freeze lottery is won, and the gameplay during "AT" mode may be played. Moreover, in the above embodiment, the transition condition from the second state to the third state was set to when the net increase in coins after the start of the advantageous section reaches 2000 coins after transitioning to the second state. However, for example, the transition from the second state to the third state may be set to occur when the number of games played after the start of the advantageous section reaches 12000.

Furthermore, while the embodiments described above illustrated examples of gaming machines to which the present invention applies, such as slot machines (revolving-type gaming machines) that use game tokens as game value, and pachinko gaming machines that use game balls as game value, the invention is not limited to these. For example, the invention can be similarly applied to revolving-type gaming machines that use game balls as game value, or to revolving-type gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, mahjong ball gaming machines, and arrangement ball machines that use information recorded on electronic recording media as game value, and similar effects can be obtained. The present invention can also be similarly applied to slot machines with four or more reels, and similar effects can be obtained.

1. Slot machine (first embodiment)
2. Front door 3a, 3b, 3c Reel (First embodiment)
25 Start lever 26a, 26b, 26c Stop switch (First embodiment)
60 Main control board 70 Sub-control board 70A Sub-main control board 70B Sub-sub-control board 100 Main control means 200 Sub-control means 200A Sub-main control means 200B Sub-sub-control means W Display window DP Image display unit PM Pachinko game machine 601 Slot machine (fourth embodiment)

Claims (1)

A main body member formed in the shape of a box having an opening,
A door member is attached to the main body member so as to be openable and closable using a hinge mechanism,
A predetermined substrate having a first surface on which multiple types of components are arranged and a second surface on which the lead wires of the multiple types of components are soldered,
The aforementioned multiple types of parts include a first part, a second part having the same performance as the first part, a third part having different performance from the first part, and a fourth part having different performance from the first part, the second part, and the third part.
The first component has lead wire 1a and lead wire 1b,
The second component has lead wires 2a and 2b,
The third component has lead wires 3a and 3b,
The fourth component has a plurality of lead wires 4,
The lead wire 1a of the first component is inserted into the through-hole 1c of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side.
The lead wire 1b of the first component is inserted into the through-hole 1d of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side.
The virtual line segment connecting the through-hole 1c and the through-hole 1d is defined as a predetermined virtual line segment 1.
The lead wire 1a protruding from the second surface is such that, when the second surface is viewed from above with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation, the angle with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 1 is n1 degrees.
The lead wire 1b protruding from the second surface is such that, when the second surface is viewed from above with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation, the angle with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 1 is n2 degrees.
The lead wire 2a of the second component is inserted into the through-hole 2c of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side.
The lead wire 2b of the second component is inserted into the through-hole 2d of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side.
The virtual line segment connecting the through-hole 2c and the through-hole 2d is defined as a predetermined virtual line segment 2.
The lead wire 2a protruding from the second surface is such that, when the second surface is viewed from above with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation, the angle with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 2 is n3 degrees.
The lead wire 2b protruding from the second surface is such that, when the second surface is viewed from above with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation, the angle with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 2 is n4 degrees.
The lead wire 3a of the third component is inserted into the through-hole 3c of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side.
The lead wire 3b of the third component is inserted into the through-hole 3d of the predetermined substrate from the first surface side.
The virtual line segment connecting the through-hole 3c and the through-hole 3d is defined as a predetermined virtual line segment 3.
The lead wire 3a protruding from the second surface is such that, when the second surface is viewed from above with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation, the angle with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 3 is n5 degrees.
The lead wire 3b protruding from the second surface is such that, when the second surface is viewed from above with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation, the angle with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 3 is n6 degrees.
The aforementioned n1 degrees and n3 degrees are approximately the same angle.
The aforementioned n2 degrees and n4 degrees are approximately the same angle.
The aforementioned n1 degrees and the aforementioned n5 degrees are different angles.
The aforementioned n2 degrees and the aforementioned n6 degrees are different angles.
The first surface has predetermined part information printed on it.
In a state in which the predetermined substrate is provided on the inner surface of the main body member or on the back surface of the door member, the predetermined component information is printed in a horizontal writing manner with characters arranged from left to right, or in a horizontal writing manner with characters arranged from bottom to top on the first surface.
The amusement machine is characterized in that the plurality of lead wires 4 of the fourth component are inserted into a plurality of through holes of a predetermined substrate from the first surface side, and the height of the plurality of lead wires 4 protruding from the second surface is greater than the height of the lead wires 1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b protruding from the second surface.